MODX M Operation Manual

Manual text content

EN MUSIC SYNTHESIZER Operation Manual 2 MODX M Operation Manual About this document Information • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Operation Manual are for instructional purposes only. • Unless indicated otherwise, the illustrations and displays as shown in this Operation Manual are based on the MODX M6 (in English). • Windows is a registered trademark of the U.S. Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A and other countries. • Lightning and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the U.S.A. and other countries. • MIDI is a registered trademark of the Association of Musical Electronics Industry (AMEI). • The MIDI 2.0 logos ( ) are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Association of Musical Electronics Industry (AMEI) and THE MIDI MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION INCORPORATED (MMA). • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Indications in this document Model name MODX M6, MODX M7, and MODX M8 are collectively referred to as "MODX M." Others Attribute Description NOTICE Indicates that malfunction, failure, or data loss may occur. NOTE Indicates supplemental information. [ ] Button or terminal name printed on the product 3 MODX M Operation Manual Contents About this document 2 1 How the MODX M Works 4 What is the MODX M? ............................................... 4 Tone generator block ................................................. 5 Internal memory......................................................... 8 2 Setting up for Live Performance 10 Selecting a Performance ..........................................11 Using overall functions for the entire Performance . 16 Editing the settings .................................................. 19 Saving edited settings ............................................. 36 Creating a Live Set .................................................. 37 Selecting Performances from a Live Set ..................41 Playing the keyboard ............................................... 42 3 Recording and Playback 43 Terminology ............................................................. 43 Recording and playing back patterns ...................... 44 Recording and playing back songs ......................... 47 Recording audio and playing back audio files ......... 50 4 Managing Back Ups 52 Available file formats ............................................... 52 The USB flash drive will be formatted. .................... 54 Saving settings to a USB flash drive ....................... 55 Loading settings from a USB flash drive ................. 57 5 Connecting external MIDI instruments 58 Connecting a microphone or audio device.............. 58 Connecting to a Computer or External MIDI Device ................................................................................. 62 6 Screens and parameters 71 Navigation bar ......................................................... 71 Performance Screens .............................................. 73 Common Edit Screens .......................................... 153 Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit Screens ...... 195 Part Edit (AWM2) Element Edit Screens ............... 239 Drum Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit Screens ............................................................................... 268 Drum Part Edit (AWM2) Key Edit screen ............... 279 Part Edit (FM-X) Part Common Edit Screens ........ 286 Part Edit (FM-X) Operator Edit Screens ................ 303 Part Edit (AN-X) Part Common Edit Screens .........310 Part Edit (AN-X) Oscillator Edit Screens ............... 336 Part Edit (AN-X) Noise Edit Screens ..................... 342 Category Search Screens ..................................... 343 Live Set Screens ................................................... 356 Utility Screens ....................................................... 361 Screens shown by pressing specific buttons ........ 387 7 Other information 400 Effect types ............................................................ 400 Effect parameters .................................................. 404 Shortcuts and special operations .......................... 424 Message List ......................................................... 426 When there's a problem ........................................ 431 4 MODX M Operation Manual 1. How the MODX M Works What is the MODX M? Block diagram and data flow This instrument consists of eight main functional blocks: Controller, Motion Sequencer, Tone Generator, Effects, Sequencer, Arpeggio, Envelope Follower, and A/D Input. (1) Control message (2) Audio signal (3) Controller (4) Motion Sequencer (5) Tone Generator (6) Effects (7) Sequencer (8) Arpeggio (9) Envelope Follower (10) A/D Input (11) Control Matrix (12) Computer (13) External MIDI equipment (14) Microphone, audio equipment, etc. (15) Powered speakers, etc. (1) Control message (2) Audio signal MIDI IN AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT MIDI OUT USB [TO HOST] MIDI [OUT] USB [TO HOST] MIDI [IN] USB [TO DEVICE] USB [TO HOST] A/D INPUT [L/MONO], [R] USB [TO HOST] OUTPUT [L/MONO], [R] (12) Computer (12) Computer (14) Microphone, Audio equipment, etc. (12) Computer (15) Powered speakers, etc. (13) External MIDI equipment (3) Controller Keyboard, Knobs, Pedals, etc. (4) Motion Sequencer (11) Control Matrix (9) Envelope Follower (8) Arpeggio (7) Sequencer (10) A/D Input (6) Effects (5) Tone Generator 5 MODX M Operation Manual Tone generator block The tone generator block is equipped with a hybrid sound engine combining three synthesis systems. AWM2 sound engine The AWM2 sound engine features waveforms containing sampled wave data you can assign to each element, and then modify the sound by using Filters and EGs (envelope generators). Normal Part The Normal Part uses up to 128 elements to generate a wide range of rich sounds that help you create expressive sounds. The "raw" waveforms sampled from acoustic instruments are processed to be compatible with various different types of music, enabling the realistic reproduction of piano, wind instruments, and so on. You can also try creating new sounds using functions such as Filters and EGs. Filter EQ Amplitude Waveform 2-Band EQ 3-Band EQ Insertion A Insertion B Master EQ Master FX Reverb Variation Element Part × 128 Drum Part For the Drum Part, you can use up to 73 drum keys to assign the waveforms of percussion sounds to each key on the keyboard to create a desired drum kit. Key (C0-C6) Part × 73 Filter EQ Amplitude Waveform 2-Band EQ 3-Band EQ Insertion A Insertion B Master EQ Master FX Reverb Variation Individual drum sounds (different for each key) (C0 to C6) C0 F1 C6 6 MODX M Operation Manual FM-X sound engine The FM-X sound engine produces sounds with complex harmonics by frequency modulating (FM) eight waveform generators called "operators." The arrangement of the eight operators is called an "algorithm," and there are 88 different patterns available. An operator has two roles: "carrier" and "modulator." A modulator modulates the operator it is connected to, and sound is ultimately output from the carrier. It also has a "feedback" function that allows the operator to modulate the sound itself. The harmonic structure of the operator's waveform can also be controlled with parameters, allowing you to apply the same high-quality filters, effects, EQ, etc. as the AWM2 sound engine to create expressive sounds that are difficult to create with conventional FM sound engines. 2-Band EQ 3-Band EQ Insertion A Insertion B Master EQ Master FX Reverb Variation Part (6) Algorithm (2) Modulators (3) Carriers 3 4 5 Filter Amplitude (1) Feedback (1) Feedback (7) (8) (9) 7 1 8 2 6 (4) Operators (5) Frequency modulation (1) Feedback (2) Modulator (3) Carrier (4) Operator (5) Frequency Modulation (6) Algorithm (7) Modulator wave (8) Carrier wave (9) Modulated wave 7 MODX M Operation Manual AN-X sound engine The AN-X sound engine is a virtual analog sound engine that fully digitally reproduces the behavior and characteristics of analog synthesizers. It is a new-generation AN sound engine that combines elements of tradition and innovation, and can express a wide range of sounds from realistic vintage sounds to edgy, extreme sounds. The AN-X sound engine consists of three oscillators and one noise generator. Each oscillator is equipped with waveform control functions such as Pulse Width, OSC Self Sync, and Wave Shaper, allowing for great freedom in sound creation. In addition, Oscillator 3 (OSC 3) can modulate Oscillator 1 (OSC 1) and Oscillator 2 (OSC 2) using FM or ring modulation, and the output destination of each oscillator can be set to before or after Filter1 or Filter2. 2-Band EQ 3-Band EQ Insertion A Insertion B Master EQ Master FX Reverb Variation Part FM Ring Mod Ring Mod FM Modifier Filter1 Filter2 Amp OSC 1 OSC 2 OSC 3 Noise 8 MODX M Operation Manual Internal memory The internal memory of this instrument holds the saved Performances, Live Sets, Songs, and other settings. This chart shows the data flow between the internal memory and the external device. Data communication with external devices Internal data communication Temporary storage area (erased when power is turned off) • User waveform edit • User motion sequence edit • User curve edit • User micro tuning edit • User live set edit • Performance • Arpeggios • Motion sequence • Audition phrases • User waveforms • User motion sequences • User curves • User micro tuning • User live sets • User audition phrases • Waveforms • Live sets • Curves • Micro tuning MIDI device or computer DAW software MONTAGE and other compatible files (.X7A, .X7U, .X7L, etc.) Library area *Same as user area (Excluding utility settings and quick setup) • User arpeggios • Utility settings • Quick setup • User performance Audio files (.WAV) Audio record play Audio files (.WAV and .AIF) User files (.Y2U) Backup files (.Y2A) Library files (.Y2L) MIDI files (.MID) Pattern / song area User area User memory Bulk dump Save Load USB flash drive Store Preset memory Compare buffer (Performance) Recall buffer (Performance) • Pattern / song record • Utility settings • Performance edit Edit buffer MODX M internal memory 9 MODX M Operation Manual Preset memory Contains the Preset Performances, Preset Arpeggios, Preset Audition Phrases, and other settings. You cannot overwrite the data in the Preset memory since it is read-only. Edit buffer The Edit buffer is the work area for editing Performances, Live Sets, Songs, and other settings. This work area allows both reading and writing, and the contents within this work area are erased when the instrument is turned off. Edited data must be saved to User memory before switching Performances or turning the instrument off (however, data other than Performances and Motion Sequences is saved automatically). User memory The User memory has two areas: User and Library. User area The User area holds the stored Performances and Motion Sequences, and other settings for the entire instrument, such as Utility settings and other User data edited in the Edit buffer. When a User Performance is edited, you can store it as a new Performance or overwrite the existing Performance. Library area The Library area allows up to 24 library files (.Y2L) to be loaded from the USB flash drive. The settings saved in the Library area cannot be edited. To edit the settings in the Library area, send the data to the Edit buffer by selecting a Performance stored in the Library area or loading a Motion Sequence from the Library area. After editing, the data will be stored in the User area. The User memory is used for reading and writing, and the data within this area will be retained after the instrument is turned off. Recall buffer and Compare buffer The Recall buffer and Compare buffer are areas used for temporarily saving the settings you are editing. Recall buffer The Recall buffer is used as a backup for the Edit buffer. If you accidentally changed to a different Performance without first storing the setting, you can use the Recall function to restore the temporarily saved settings from the Recall buffer to the Edit buffer. Compare buffer The Compare buffer is the area for keeping settings before making edits. By using the Compare function, you can bring the settings temporarily saved in the Compare buffer to compare the edited and unedited sounds. These buffers are for reading and writing data, but the settings will be lost when the instrument is turned off. 10 MODX M Operation Manual 2. Setting up for Live Performance Shown below is a general workflow guide for this instrument. Selecting a Performance Select from the Live Set screen or from the Performance screen (Category Search screen).  Editing the settings  Saving edited settings  Creating a Live Set  Selecting a Live Set  Playing the Keyboard 11 MODX M Operation Manual Selecting a Performance Selecting on the Live Set screen 1. Press the [LIVE SET] button. The Live Set screen will open. 2. Tap to select the Performance you want from the displayed list. 12 MODX M Operation Manual Selecting on the Category Search screen The Category Search function allows you to search through Performances, Parts, Rhythm Patterns, Arpeggios, and Waveforms to find ones you would like to use. To search for a Performance, press the [CATEGORY] button with the Performance screen open to open the Performance Category Search screen. Even while the Category Search screen is displayed, you can switch parts and mute using the buttons on the top panel. NOTE You can also select a Performance by moving the cursor to the Performance name on the Home screen and using the Data dial, [INC/ YES] button, or [DEC/NO] button. Screen description (1) (2) (3) (4) (6) (5) (7) (1) Filter You can use the filter to search through the list of Performances. • Category You can select one each from Main and Sub. • Attribute Select an attribute or combinations of attributes. The filter will vary depending on the combination. Filter: Exact match AWM2, FM-X, AN-X AND condition MC, SSS, Smart Morph OR condition Single, Multi MOTIF XF, MONTAGE, MODX M OS Vx.x (x.x is the OS version number) NOTE “MONTAGE” includes MODX and MODX+. (2) Bank (3) Search by keyword (4) Job 13 MODX M Operation Manual (5) List of Performances The Performances that correspond to the selected Category and Attribute are displayed. Text color Description White Currently selected Performance Green Single-Part Performance Blue Multi-Part Performance (6) Changing the sort order (7) Audition Procedure 1. Press the [CATEGORY] button. The Performance Category Search screen appears. This screen can also be opened by selecting Category Search from the context menu for the Performance Name. 2. Use the filter as needed. Search the Performances by switching filters, banks, and sorting. 3. Select from the list. Select from the list of Performances displayed on the right side of the screen. Use the Data dial, [INC/YES] button, [DEC/NO] button, or up and down buttons to make your selection. You can also use the Display knob to scroll through the screen without changing the currently selected Performance. 4. Close the screen. Press the [ENTER] button, [EXIT] button or [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button on the top panel, or tap the [ ] (HOME) icon or [ ] (EXIT) icon on the screen. NOTE You can use the Part Category Search function if you wish to change one of the Parts in a Multi-Part Performance (a Performance that has more than one Part). Select the Part you wish to change, then press the [CATEGORY] button while holding down the [SHIFT] button to display the Part Category Search screen. 14 MODX M Operation Manual Selecting an Initialized Performance or a Single-Part Performance Initialized Performance Set Bank/Favorite to either All or Preset. Set the filter to Category and select Init. Single-Part Performance Set the filter to Attribute and select Single. 15 MODX M Operation Manual Playing back an audition phrase By playing back the audition phrase, you can check the Performance. You can also hear how the sound of the Performance changes by manipulating the controller during playback. 1. Press the [AUDITION] button on the top panel or tap Audition on the Category Search screen. The Audition phrase of the current Performance will be played back. If you switch Performances during playback, the phrase from the new Performance will be played back. NOTE If the [AUDITION] button is turned off, the audition function is not available for the selected Performance, and nothing happens when you press it. 2. To stop the playback of the audition phrase, press the [AUDITION] button on the top panel once more, or tap the Audition button on the Category Search screen. 16 MODX M Operation Manual Using overall functions for the entire Performance There are other functions for adjusting the balance between Parts within the Performance or for quickly switching to different groups of settings that have been registered to the buttons in advance. Mixing The Mixing function allows you to adjust the balance between Parts. You can check the settings for each Part, such as Pan, Volume, and EQ, and adjust the parameters. Screen description (1) (2) (3) (4) (7) (5) (6) (1) Main category for each Part (2) Switching views for Solo, Mute, and Kbd Ctrl (3) Switching between 3-band EQ and 2-band EQ (4) EQ settings for each Part (5) Parameters for each Part (6) Switching to 16-part view (7) Switching to Audio Part view (Parts 9 to 16 hidden) You can set the following audio parameters for an Audio Part. • AD part: Audio input from the A/D INPUT jacks • Digital part: Audio input from the USB [TO HOST] terminal * Refers to the audio set to Digital L/R in audio channels 17 MODX M Operation Manual Procedure 1. Press the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button and tap Mixing. The Mixing screen appears. 2. Select a Parameter. Select a Parameter by using the PART buttons or cursor buttons, or tap the icons and buttons on the screen. 3. Change the value by using the Data dial or relevant Display knob. NOTE If you need to fine-adjust the value, press the [EDIT/ ] button while the Mixing screen is shown on the display to open the Edit screen. 18 MODX M Operation Manual Scene The Scene is a “snapshot” of various settings, such as Arpeggio type, Motion Sequence type, and Part parameters. By registering different Scenes to each of the eight SCENE buttons, you can use the SCENE buttons to recall different settings instantly. This would be convenient, for example, when you wish to change only the Arpeggio and Motion Sequence types, without changing the Performance, to follow the progression of a song, or to bring out a different aspect of a Performance. Screen description (1) (2) (3) (1) Scene tab (2) Memorize switch (3) Settings for the tab When the Memorize switch is On, the parameters for the function appear on the screen. Procedure 1. Press the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button and tap Scene. The Scene screen appears. 2. Set up Scene 1 – 8. The functions to which Memorize Switch (Memory) has been set to On will be registered to the selected SCENE button. The newly set Scene now becomes active when you press the appropriate SCENE button. 3. Press the [STORE] button to save the Performance. NOTICE Make sure to save (store) the Scene settings you have just edited before changing to a different Performance or turning off the instrument. Without performing the Store operation, the Scene settings will be lost. NOTE If a Parameter that can be registered to the SCENE button has already been assigned to a knob or slider, operate that. You can then register the settings to a button by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing one of the SCENE buttons. After that, press the [STORE] button to save the Scene settings to the Performance. 19 MODX M Operation Manual Editing the settings Using Split and Layer What is Split? This setting divides the entire keyboard into multiple groups and assigns a Part to each group. On this instrument, you can specify the split point and set the key range for each group. What is Layer? This setting allow you to combine multiple Parts on top of each other and play them simultaneously. By assigning two or more Parts to the same group, you can play a combination of multiple tones. Split Job Screen For a description of each item on the screen, refer to Split Job. Split setting procedure 1. Press the [SPLIT] button. The Split Job screen for the Performance appears. 2. By tapping the items on the screen to specify the number and position for the Split Point, you can set the key range for each group. Tap the group buttons while holding down the [SHIFT] button to assign a single Part to multiple groups. 3. Press the [EXIT] button or tap Done on the screen to confirm the settings. Tapping [×] (Close) on the upper left cancels the setup. Note range setting procedure 1. Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [SPLIT] button. The Part - Note view is shown on the Performance screen. 2. Use the keyboard or Data dial to change the note range for each Part. 20 MODX M Operation Manual Procedure for editing 1. Select a Performance. 2. On the Performance screen, move the cursor to the desired Performance name or Part you want to edit. 3. Press the [EDIT/ ] button or tap Edit in the context menu. The Common Edit screen will appear when the cursor is on the Performance name. The Part Edit screen for the sound engine will appear when the cursor is on the Part. NOTE You can change the Parameter to be edited by opening the Common Edit screen on the Edit screen and selecting the desired item from the Navigation bar. 4. Select a tab on the first and the second rows to open the screen. Changing the settings in each tab from the top to the bottom is recommended. Example: Normal Part (AWM2) 5. Edit the settings by changing the parameters shown on the right of the tabs. 6. Continue editing the parameters on different tabs if necessary. The target for editing will be shown on the navigation bar. Select Common for editing the settings for the entire Performance. Select Part Common for editing the settings for the entire Part. If you wish to go into detailed settings, select one of the following: Element 1–128, Operator 1–8, Oscillator 1–3, Noise, and C0–C6. 7. When you’ve finished editing, press the [STORE] button to save the Performance. 21 MODX M Operation Manual Using the Navigation screen 1. Press the [NAVIGATION] button. The NAVIGATION screen appears. Pressing the [NAVIGATION] button during editing calls up the current location icon ( ). 2. Select the item for editing. Select Part Common for editing the settings for the entire Part. If you wish to go into detailed settings, select one of the following: Element 1–128, Operator 1–8, Oscillator 1–3, Noise, and C0–C6. 3. Select the icon for the Parameter you want to edit. Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor, and press the [ENTER] button. Or, tap the icon on the screen. 4. Select the icon for the setting you want to edit. 5. Change the parameters shown on the screen. 6. Save the Performance. 22 MODX M Operation Manual Creating tonal changes For creating tonal changes, you can use Oscillators, filters, EGs (or Envelope Generators), LFOs (or Low-Frequency Oscillators), and effects. By changing those parameters, you can change the brightness, resonance, or other timbral qualities of the sound. The detailed settings vary depending on the sound engine, but the common settings are as follows: Oscillators (Osc) Creates a waveform Pitch (Pitch) Controls the pitch Filters (Filter) Controls the cutoff frequency EG Determines how the sound changes over time LFO Determines the cyclical change of the sound Motion Sequencer Creates complex changes to the sound over time Effects (Effects) Processes the sound LFO EG Motion Sequencer Envelope Follower Osc (Oscillator) Filter Amp Effects Output Effect configuration System Effect This effect is applied to all Parts of the Performance. The System Effect include two types: Variation and Reverb. You can also add Reverb to the Variation's output sound (Variation to Reverb). Insertion Effect This effect is applied to each Part. Master Effect This effect is applied to the overall sound at the final output. Part EQ A 3-band and 2-band equalizer that is applied to each Part. The Part EQ can be applied before or after the Insertion Effect. Master EQ A 5-band equalizer that is applied to the overall sound at the final output. 23 MODX M Operation Manual Effect connections and settings Connect as shown in the diagram below and set up each one using methods (1) to (4). Part Insertion A Insertion B Part EQ 3-Band EQ Part EQ 2-Band EQ Performance (1) (2) (3) (4) System Effect Master Effect Master EQ Reverb Variation Variation to Reverb Send Level Return Level (1) Setting the Part EQ and Insertion Effect [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Ins A [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Ins B [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → 3-band EQ [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → 2-band EQ (2) Setting the Variation and Reverb [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Variation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Reverb (3) Setting the Master Effect [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Master FX (4) Setting the Master EQ [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Master EQ NOTE Set the effect for the audio input signal from the A/D INPUT jacks as follows: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Audio In. For information on the effect category and effect types, refer to the Effect types. For information on the effect parameters, refer to the Effect parameters. For information on the Preset program for each effect type, refer to the Data List. 24 MODX M Operation Manual Changing the Effect settings By pressing the [NAVIGATION] button while holding down the [SHIFT] button, the FX Overview screen will appear, and you can see an overview of the effect settings. Tap the buttons on the effect names such as Ins A and Var to open the Edit screen. 25 MODX M Operation Manual Using Arpeggio Arpeggio is a function that automatically plays rhythm patterns and chord backings simply by pressing keys. It not only provides inspiration and full rhythmic passages in your live performances, but it gives you fully formed instrumental backing parts of various music genres for ease in creating songs. Features of the Arpeggio function of this instrument This instrument allows you to set up to eight Arpeggio types for each Part, and play back Arpeggios for eight Parts simultaneously. You can also set the range of keys used for Arpeggio playback (Note Limit) and the upper and lower limits of key pressure (Velocity Limit). The Arpeggio function lets you play Accent Phrases (the sequence phrase played only when the keyboard is played at a higher velocity than the specified value) or effect sounds such as guitar fret noises using the Random SFX function. You can search for preset Arpeggios containing these sounds on the Arp Category Search screen. Specifying Accent (Accent Phrase) or Random SFX in Attribute will narrow down the Arpeggios that match. Turning Arpeggio on and off To turn the Arpeggio function on or off, press the [ARP] button on the top panel. Changing Arpeggio by using the knobs Select ARP/MSEQ with the [QUICK EDIT] button and use Knobs 1 and 2 to change the way the Arpeggio sounds. Modify the sound by turning the knobs and listening to the Arpeggio playback. For details on the effects of Knobs 1 and 2, refer to Arp/MS → Arp Common on the Common Edit screen. Changing the way Arpeggio playback is turned on or off You can freely change the Arpeggio playback method from a setting that plays only while you hold down the key to a setting that continues playing even after you lift your finger from the key, etc. Follow the steps below to change this setting: Hold [EDIT/ ] button → Part selection → Common → Arpeggio → Common Trigger Mode [EDIT/ ] button → Part selection → Common → Arpeggio → Advanced Setting Hold Trigger Mode Played back only while a key is being pressed Off Gate Playback continues after the finger is lifted off from the key On Gate Playback is turned on or off each time the key is pressed Regardless of whether On/Off Toggle NOTE When Arp Master and Arp Part are on, turn the [KEYBOARD HOLD] button on the top panel on to achieve the same effect as when Hold is On. 26 MODX M Operation Manual Using Motion Control The Motion Control function lets you create Motion (rhythmic and dynamic sound changes) in real time, so you can find completely new ways of expression. This function allows you to make the settings in advance so that you can change the parameters without actually operating the pedals or wheels. This lets you create dramatic and powerful expressive changes that follow the beat of your music. (1) Continuous control of Motion changes (2) Switch between Motions (3) Trigger Motion Sequencer Envelope Follower Super Knob Beat Audio Beat Sync External MIDI Internal Tempo Audio Part 1-16 A/D Input Part Master Tone Generator Effect Arpeggio Motion Sequencer (5) Rhythmic change (4) Control the Motion Sequencer in real time (6) Automation (7) Multi-dimensional sonic change (7) Multi-dimensional sonic change (1) Continuous control of Motion changes (2) Switch between Motions (3) Trigger (4) Control the Motion Sequencer in real time (5) Rhythmic change (6) Automation (7) Multi-dimensional sonic change 27 MODX M Operation Manual Setting Motion Control Motion Control can be set by setting the Source for the Controller as well as the Destination and Parameter from the Control Assign screen. How to open the Control Assign screen [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Tap Common → [EDIT/ ] → Control → Control Assign [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Select Part → [EDIT/ ] → Mod/Control → Control Assign Setting to Super Knob Set the Display Filter to SuperKnob, and select the Source (AsgnKnob 1–8), Destination, etc. Setting to Motion Sequence For Motion Sequence, set the Source to a Motion Sequence Lane from 1 to 4. Setting to Envelope Follower Set the Source to EnvFollow. Customizing the Super Knob settings By using the Super Knob, you can simultaneously control the Assign 1–8 values that are assigned to Knobs 1 to 8 that are common to all Parts. By combining the Super Knob and the Motion Sequencer, you can achieve more complex sound changes. Controlling the Super Knob from the pedals You can control the Super Knob from the separately sold Foot controller (FC7) connected to this instrument. 1. Connect the Foot Controller (FC7) to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack ([1] or [2]). 2. Open the screen from: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Control → Control Number. 3. Select SuperKnob for Foot Ctrl1 or Foot Ctrl2, depending on the jack you have connected the Foot Controller (FC7) to. 4. Close the screen to finish the setup. 28 MODX M Operation Manual An example of a Super Knob setting The Super Knob settings can be customized. You can set two or three fixed values for using the Super Knob for morphing sounds. With three fixed values, you can set the median value. An example of morphing using three fixed values Here, we will explain how to add morphing effects to the layered sound made with three Preset Performances (acoustic piano, pad sound, and electric piano). Additionally, we'll explain how to add a morphing effect while keeping the original settings for these Performances. MID LEFT RIGHT Acoustic Piano (CFX PopStudioGrand) Electric Piano (TV Show FM EP) Pad sound (AN-X Sine Pad PAT) 1. Select sounds for Parts 1 to 3. 1-1. Press the [CATEGORY] button and select CFX PopStudioGrand. 1-2. From the Home screen, tap the [+] icon for Part 2 to open the Part Category Search screen and select AN-X Sine Pad PAT. 1-3. From the Home screen, tap the [+] icon for Part 3 to open the Part Category Search screen and select TV Show FM EP. 2. Set the parameters for Part 1. 2-1. Select Part 1. 2-2. Press the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button while holding down the [SHIFT] button to open the Control View screen. 2-3. Turn the Super Knob to open the Control Assign screen. 2-4. Go to Page 2 and tap the [+] icon to add Destination 10. 29 MODX M Operation Manual 2-5. Tap the Destination 10 tab and select Volume from Part Param. 2-6. Set Polarity (Curve Polarity) to Bi and set Ratio (Curve Ratio) to +127. 3. Set the parameters for Part 2. 3-1. Select Part 2. 3-2. Press the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button while holding down the [SHIFT] button and then turn the Super Knob. The Part 2 Control Assign screen will open. 3-3. Tap the [+] icon to add Destination 8. 3-4. Tap the Destination 8 tab and select Volume from Part Param. 3-5. Set Polarity (Curve Polarity) to Bi and set Ratio (Curve Ratio) to +127. 4. Set the parameters for Part 3. 4-1. Select Part 3. 4-2. Press the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button while holding down the [SHIFT] button and then turn the Super Knob. The Part 3 Control Assign screen will open. 4-3. Tap the [+] icon to add Destination 8. 4-4. Tap the Destination 8 tab and select Volume from Part Param. 4-5. Set Polarity (Curve Polarity) to Bi and set Ratio (Curve Ratio) to +127. 30 MODX M Operation Manual 5. Check to make sure that the parameters for Parts 1 to 3 are set to Common Assignable Knob. 5-1. Press the [COMMON] button. 5-2. Press the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button while holding down the [SHIFT] button and then turn the Super Knob. The Common Control Assign screen will open. 5-3. Tap each of the Destination 6 to 8 tabs to check that the Source is set to AsgnKnob 6 to 8 respectively, and the Destination Parameter is set to Part 1 to 3 Volume. 6. Set the LEFT position on the Super Knob. This makes the settings for the Super Knob when turned all the way to the left. 6-1. Press the KNOB POSITION [LEFT] button. 6-2. Make sure that the COMMON is selected for Part select and then press the [ASSIGN] button. Make sure that the Knobs are set to 5 to 8. 6-3. To set only the CFX PopStudioGrand on Part 1 to sound, turn Knob 6 (Assign6) all the way to the right (to the maximum value) and Knob 7 (Assign7) and Knob 8 (Assign8) all the way to the left (to the minimum value). 6-4. Save the settings by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the KNOB POSITION [LEFT] button. 7. Set the RIGHT position on the Super Knob. This makes the settings for the Super Knob when turned all the way to the right. 7-1. Press the KNOB POSITION [RIGHT] button. 7-2. To set only the TV Show FM EP on Part 3 to sound, turn Knob 8 (Assign8) all the way to the right (to the maximum value) and Knob 6 (Assign6) and Knob 7 (Assign7) all the way to the left (to the minimum value). 7-3. Save the settings by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the KNOB POSITION [RIGHT] button. 31 MODX M Operation Manual 8. Set the MID position on the Super Knob. Enable the MID position and then turn the Super Knob to set the value for the middle position. 8-1. Press the [NAVIGATION] button to open the NAVIGATION screen. 8-2. Tap on Super Knob and open the screen for the Super Knob settings. 8-3. Set the value 512 for the Mid Position. 8-4. Press the KNOB POSITION [MID] button. 8-5. To set only the AN-X Sine Pad PAT on Part 2 to sound, turn Knob 7 (Assign7) all the way to the right (to the maximum value) and Knob 6 (Assign6) and Knob 8 (Assign8) all the way to the left (to the minimum value). 8-6. Save the settings by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the KNOB POSITION [MID] button. The main setting is now complete. 9. Make fine adjustments. Adjust the Curve Type, Ratio, and Param for each Part, and LEFT, RIGHT, and MID for the KNOB POSITION if desired. 32 MODX M Operation Manual Using Motion Sequencer The Motion Sequencer function lets you create sound changes by controlling parameter times according to a sequence you create in advance. It allows you to set up rhythmical changes that are in sync with the Performance tempo, Arpeggio, or the rhythms input from the connecting device and to control such changes interactively and in real-time according to the progression of the song. You can use up to four lanes in one Part, or up to eight lanes in an entire Performance. You can set up to eight sequence patterns per lane. As with Arpeggios, you can set the Velocity Limit and sequence playback method, the number of steps, etc. for playing back the sequence. How to set the parameters for each lane: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Motion Seq → Lane Turning Motion Sequencer on or off To turn Motion Sequencer on or off, press the [MSEQ] button on the top panel. Changing Motion Sequencer by using the knobs Select ARP/MSEQ with the [QUICK EDIT] button to use Knobs 3 and 4 to change Motion Sequencer. Modify the Motion Sequencer settings by turning the knobs and listening to the Motion Sequencer playback. For details on the effects of Knobs 3 and 4, refer to Arp/MS → MS Common on the Common Edit screen. Changing the way Motion Sequence is triggered The way Motion Sequencer is triggered can be set with the LaneSw and Trigger parameters. LaneSw, Trigger [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Motion Seq → Lane Setting Lane Sw Trigger Sync Plays back the Motion Sequencer when you press a key On Off - Plays back the Motion Sequencer when you press the [MSEQ TRIGGER] button On On Other than Arp Editing the Motion Sequencer Motion Sequence is comprised of up to 16 steps. Tap Edit Sequence to open the Motion Sequence settings screen, and edit each step. 33 MODX M Operation Manual Using the Envelope Follower Envelope Follower is the function that extracts the envelope of the waveform from the audio input and is used as a controller for creating changes in the sound. It allows the output of Parts and the output from the external device connected to the A/D INPUT jacks. For example, you can use the Envelope Follower of one Part assigned a Rhythm Pattern as a source to add Variation to another Part. It is useful, for example, when you wish to set ducking (lowering the volume of a Part while a certain other Part is being played). Each Envelope Follower has its own input source, such as EnvFollow 1 for Part 1, EnvFollow 2 for Part 2, and EnvFollow AD for the Audio Part. The output from each Envelope Follower can be changed by selecting a different Source from the Control Assign screen. For example, you can set up the Envelope Follower for Part 1 (EnvFollow 1) to create changes in Part 2. How the sound is modified by the output from each Envelope follower can be set from the Control Assign screen. Envelope Follower Input Source Env Follower MST Env Follower AD Part 1 Performance (16 parts and Audio Part) A/D IN Part Part 2 Env Follower 2 EnvFollower 1 (1) Input signal to Envelope Follower (Fixed) (2) Output signal from Envelope Follower (The Destination can be changed) (1) Input signal to Envelope Follower (2) Output signal from Envelope Follower Settings for the Envelope Follower: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing → Envelope Follower (EnvFollow MST) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Audio In → Routing → Envelope Follower (EnvFollow AD) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing → Envelope Follower (EnvFollow 1–16) 34 MODX M Operation Manual Setting the Envelope Follower from the Rhythm Pattern screen You can set the Envelope Follower on the Rhythm Pattern screen. This way, you can quickly access the Envelope Follower parameters often used for the Rhythm Patterns. 1. Press the [SONG/PATTERN] button while holding down the [SHIFT] button to open the Rhythm Pattern screen. 2. Select a drum sound from the list shown on the right side of the screen. 3. Tap Envelope Follower and turn the switch on. You can play the keyboard to hear the effect of the Envelope Follower. 4. Adjust the settings. Setting example • Polarity (Curve Polarity): Bi • Ratio (Curve Ratio): −63 • Gain (Envelope Follower Gain): −12.0 dB 5. For finer adjustments, tap Edit on the screen. The Envelope Follower Edit screen will open. NOTE • You can select a new kit or Arpeggio type for the Rhythm Pattern by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [SONG/PATTERN] button to go back to the Rhythm Pattern screen. • The Envelope Follower settings are retained after selecting a new kit or Arpeggio for the Rhythm Pattern. 35 MODX M Operation Manual Using Smart Morph Smart Morph is a function that morphs FM-X Parts or AN-X Parts using machine learning. This allows you to create a new sound for Part 1 from multiple FM-X Parts or AN-X Parts to play on the keyboard. Features of Smart Morph The Smart Morph function analyzes each sound assigned to Parts 9 to 16 and plots one dot per Part on the map. Each dot on the map represents a sound, and the distance between dots shows the similarities of these sounds. Creating a new part (Learn) The Learn feature automatically generates sounds to fill in the gaps between dots on the map. When you tap the dot on the map, the sound for that dot will be selected for Part 1. You can find a new place you like from the map and save its settings to create a new part. By dragging the dot on the map while playing the keyboard, or by moving the Super Knob with the movements of two to eight dots assigned beforehand, you can create completely new sounds. 36 MODX M Operation Manual Saving edited settings After editing, save the Performance you have created in the internal memory. Saving the settings to internal memory is referred to as the “Store” operation. NOTICE • When you select a different Performance or turn off the instrument without first storing the Performance, you will lose the settings you are editing. • The existing Performances on the User Bank will be lost when you overwrite them. When you save Performances you have edited, make sure not to overwrite existing Performances. Important settings you’ve made should be saved to a USB flash drive (Save). For the Save operation, see “Saving settings to a USB flash drive as a backup file (Save).” How to store a Performance 1. Press the [STORE] button. • If you are saving a new Performance, Store As New Performance will be displayed. • If the Performance has already been stored, Overwrite Current Perf. and Store As New Performance will be displayed. 2. To store as a new Performance, tap Store As New Performance. If you want to overwrite a Performance that has already been stored, tap Overwrite Current Perf. and then tap Store (YES). 3. Type in the Performance name on the Keyboard screen. Use the keyboard shown on the Main display. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. 4. Tap Done when you have finished entering the name. When the Store operation is complete, the Performance screen will be shown on the display. 37 MODX M Operation Manual Creating a Live Set The Live Set function is a convenient way to change among different Performances as you play songs on a setlist, for example. On this instrument, you can create a Live Set simply by registering your favorite Performance to each slot. Registering a Performance to the slot You can register a Performance to the Live Set by following the procedure below. NOTICE • Store the Performance you have just edited before registering the Performance to the Live Set. However, when you register to the Live Set and select Store As New Perf. and Register or Overwrite Current Perf. and Register, you do not need to store the Performance in advance. • When you select a different Performance or turn off the instrument without first storing the Performance, you will lose the edited settings you have made. 1. Select a Performance from the Performance screen. Make sure the [LIVE SET] button is lit or semi-lit. 2. Simultaneously hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [LIVE SET] button. The Live Set Register screen appears. 3. Tap the slot you want to register to select it. 4. Select one of the available store operations and press the [ENTER] button, or simply tap your selection on the screen. Storage method Description Store As New Perf. and Register Stores as a new Performance and registers Overwrite Current Perf. and Register Overwrites the current Performance and registers Register Registers Change the Performance name as needed. Confirm the changes to register the Performance in the slot. NOTE If you want to register a new Performance before an already registered slot, follow the steps below. 1. Simultaneously hold down the [SHIFT] button and tap the slot. A cursor will appear in front of the slot. 2. While holding down the [SHIFT] button, select the storage method and press the [ENTER] button or tap the screen. At this time, the Performance registered in the last slot (bottom right) of the Live Set page will be deleted. 38 MODX M Operation Manual Exchanging Performances registered to slots You can exchange the contents of slots. 1. Open the screen from: [LIVE SET] (or Live Set icon) → User Bank selection → [EDIT/ ]. The Live Set Edit screen appears. When the Live Set page on the Preset bank or the Library bank is open, the Live Set Edit screen will not appear. 2. Tap Job on the screen. The Jobscreen will appear at the bottom of the screen. 3. Tap the slot you wish to move the Performance from, and then tap Exchange. The Jobscreen will appear at the bottom of the screen. 4. Tap the slot you wish to move the Performance to. The Performances of the two slots will be exchanged. 5. Once the exchange is complete, tap Done. NOTE If you wish the copy or exchange the entire Bank or the entire Page, with the Live Set screen displayed, simultaneously hold down the [SHIFT] button and press the [EDIT/ ] button. Then the dialog box will appear. 39 MODX M Operation Manual Registering a Pattern, Song, or Audio file to the slot You can also add Patterns, Songs, or Audio files to Live Set slots. This way, you can select a slot for playing back a desired Pattern, Song, or Audio file, and then play the Performance on the keyboard along with it. 1. Open the screen from: [LIVE SET] (or Live Set icon) → User Bank selection → [EDIT/ ]. The Live Set Edit screen appears. When the Live Set page on the Preset bank or the Library bank is open, the Live Set Edit screen will not appear. 2. Select a slot or tap [+] on the screen. 3. Select the slot you want to register from Slot Type. Slot Type Type Perform Performance Song Songs Audio Audio file Pattern Patterns 4. Tap Pattern Name, Audio Name, etc. to open the Load screen. 5. Select the desired pattern or file to register to the slot. 6. Once the settings are complete, tap Done. NOTE You can also register a Pattern or Song to the Live Set by pressing the [SHIFT] and [LIVE SET] buttons on the Pattern screen or Song screen. 40 MODX M Operation Manual Exchanging slots with the foot switch You can select a different Live Set slot by using a separately sold foot switch, such as the FC4A or FC5. Follow the procedure below. 1. Connect a foot switch (FC4A or FC5) to the FOOT SWITCH [ASSIGNABLE] jack. 2. Open the screen as follows: [UTILITY] → Settings → MIDI I/O. The MIDI I/O screen appears. 3. Set FS Assign to either Live Set+ or Live Set−. With Live Set+, you can select the next Live Set slot in forward order. With Live Set−, you can select the next Live Set slot in reverse order. 41 MODX M Operation Manual Selecting Performances from a Live Set Select Performances for a setlist from the Live Set screen. 1. Press the [LIVE SET] button to open the screen. The Live Set screen appears. 2. Switch between Bank and Page as needed. 3. Tap a slot to select it. The Performance for the setlist will be selected. 42 MODX M Operation Manual Playing the keyboard Make sure to select a Performance from the Live Set before playing the keyboard. If desired, you can also play back a specific Pattern, Song, or Audio file (registered to a Live Set slot) along with your keyboard performance. Playing back a Pattern, Song, or Audio file registered to a Live Set slot You can play the keyboard along with the Pattern, Song, or Audio file registered to the slot. NOTE While the Song or Pattern is being played back, you cannot change the Performance or select a different slot. If you attempt to change them, an error message will appear. 1. Select a slot on the Live Set screen. 2. Press the [  ] (Play) button. The Pattern, Song, or Audio file registered to the selected slot will then play back. NOTE While the Pattern, Song, or Audio file is played back, pressing the [  ] (Play) button shows the same screen as the Pattern screen, Song screen, or Audio screen. 3. Press the [  ] (Stop) button to stop playback. 43 MODX M Operation Manual 3. Recording and Playback You can use this instrument to record and play back Patterns, Songs, and Audio files. Patterns and Songs are recorded in the storage area within the instrument, while Audio files are recorded to a connected USB flash drive. Terminology Patterns Patterns are comprised of MIDI sequence data, containing short phrases recorded as MIDI events. They can be played back in a loop or used with the Scene function. This instrument can hold up to 128 Patterns within the memory area. Songs Songs are comprised of MIDI sequence data, containing information on the operation of the keyboard and other controllers recorded as MIDI events. This instrument can hold up to 128 Songs within the memory area. Tracks Tracks are separate storage locations for recording the keyboard performance. A track holds the information for one Part. A maximum of 16 tracks are available on this instrument, so you can use up to 16 Parts for recording and playing back. 44 MODX M Operation Manual Recording and playing back patterns Record a melody on a track. Recording a Pattern 1. Select the desired sound for recording on Track 1. 2. Press the [SONG/PATTERN] button and tap Pattern. The Pattern screen appears. NOTE You can also open the same screen from the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button → Play/Rec → Pattern. 3. Change the scene length (Length), tempo (Tempo), and other settings as needed. 4. Press one of the [SCENE] buttons to select the desired Scene for recording. 5. Press the [  ] (Record) button. Recording will be set to standby. (1) (2) (3) (4) (6) (8) (9) (10) (11) (5) (7) (1) Pattern name (2) Name of the Performance currently selected (3) Time signature (4) Position for starting playback and recording (5) Tempo (6) Quantize (7) Switching recording types (not shown when recording a new pattern) (8) Scene (9) Length of the pattern (10) Turning on or off the function to start recording at key-on (11) Turning the loop setting on or off 45 MODX M Operation Manual 6. Press the [  ] (Play) button to start recording. 7. Play the keyboard. When Loop is on, the phrase you play while recording will be played back in a loop, allowing you to record it onto another track while maintaining the recording status. NOTE When you press the [  ] (Record) button during recording, it will flash and Rehearsal mode is enabled. In this mode, you can temporarily disable recording on a track while continuing to play back. This is useful when you want to try out a sound. Pressing the [  ] (Record) button again while in Rehearsal mode will return you to Recording mode. 8. Select the desired sound for Track 2, and play the keyboard along with the phrase you recorded on Track 1. 9. Record other tracks as needed. Songs and Patterns are stored automatically when recorded. If you want to change the tempo or tone of a song or pattern after recording and then store it, tap Store Pattern&Perf Settings (or Store Song&Perf Settings for a song) to store it. NOTE If you have edited the Performance parameters, you will also need to store the Performance. Canceling the last recording action (Undo, Redo) Undo cancels the last recording action and deletes what has been just recorded. Redo restores the recording that has been canceled by Undo. Undo Media Record (does not appear when there are no recordings) Tapping this cancels the last recording action and restores the recording to its original state. 46 MODX M Operation Manual Redo Media Record (does not appear until Undo has been done) Tapping this restores the recording to its state before Undo. Playing back the Pattern To play back the recorded Pattern, use the Sequencer Transport buttons. You can use the SCENE buttons to select a Scene for playback. 47 MODX M Operation Manual Recording and playing back songs Recording a Song Not only the keyboard performance, but also the operations of the controllers and knobs are recorded to a track as MIDI data. When you play the keyboard or operate a controller, the parts with the Keyboard Control Switch On will be recorded. For the knob operations, Control Change and Parameter Change messages will also be recorded. For more information on Control Change, refer to the Data List. NOTE • When Arp Rec is On, only the result of the Arpeggio playback is recorded. • When Arp Rec is Off, data of the entire keyboard performance is recorded, enabling you to change the Arpeggio patterns later. 1. Select a Performance. 2. Press the [SONG/PATTERN] button to open the Play/Rec screen and select the Song tab, and then press the [  ] (Record) button. The [  ] (Record) button flashes, and recording is set to standby. NOTE Recording can also be set to standby by opening the screen from: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Song and pressing the [  ] (Record) button. 3. Change the Time Signature and Rec Quantize as needed. (1) (2) (3) (4) (9) (8) (6) (5) (7) (1) Song name (2) Name of the Performance currently selected (3) Time signature (4) Position for starting playback and recording (5) Quantize (6) The total length of the sequence and the current position for playback (7) Time for the entire sequence (8) Setting the track on or off for playback (9) Turning Arpeggio recording on or off (only for a new recording) 48 MODX M Operation Manual 4. When the preparation is complete, press the [  ] (Play) button to start recording. If the Click Settings is set, the Precount starts when you press the [  ] (Play) button. Start playing the keyboard after the precount. 5. When the keyboard performance is finished, press the [  ] (Stop) button to stop recording. Recording some parts again (Punch-in / Punch-out recording) There are three types of recording (Record Type) available on this instrument: Replace, Overdub, and Punch. • Replace: overwrites the existing data. • Overdub: adds a layer to the existing sound on the track. • Punch: overwrites the specified section of the existing data. If you wish to rerecord a specified section, you can set up the Punch-in / Punch-out parameters for the Punch recording. When you start the Punch recording, the recorded Song will be played back from the beginning. When the playback reaches the measure set for Punch-in, the recording starts automatically. The recording ends automatically when it reaches the measure set for Punch-out, and the rest of the recorded Song will be played back to the end. For example, if you wish to rerecord measures 3 to 5 of an eight-measure Song, follow the instructions shown below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Punch In Punch Out For the above Punch-in / Punch-out recording, set up the following parameters in the Record Setup screen. (1) (2) (3) (1) Record Type = Punch (2) Punch In (Measure and beat to start rerecording) = 003:01 Starting from the measure and beat specified here, the sound of the corresponding track will be turned off and your keyboard performance will be recorded. (3) Punch Out (Measure and beat to end rerecording) = 006:01 Starting from the measure and beat specified here, the track will be played back. 49 MODX M Operation Manual Canceling the last recording action (Undo, Redo) Undo cancels the last recording action and deletes what has been just recorded. Redo restores the recording that has been canceled by Undo. Undo Media Record (does not appear when there are no recordings) Tap to see the confirmation screen. Continue(YES) cancels the last recording action and restores the recorder to its original state. Redo Media Record (does not appear until Undo has been done) Tap to see the confirmation screen. Continue(YES) restores the recording to its state before Undo. Playing back the Song To check the recorded Song, use the Sequencer Transport buttons. 50 MODX M Operation Manual Recording audio and playing back audio files Recording audio You can use this instrument to record and playback Audio files in stereo (44.1 kHz, 24-bit wav). The recording level is fixed, and it is possible to record continuously for up to 74 minutes (assuming that the USB storage device has sufficient free memory). 1. Connect a USB flash drive to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument. 2. Opens the screen from: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Audio. The audio recording screen appears. 3. Press the [  ] (Record) button. The [  ] (Record) button flashes, and recording is set to standby. (1) (5) (2) (4) (3) (1) Position for recording (2) The total length of the audio file and the current position for recording (3) Available recording time (4) Level meter (5) Trigger Level 4. Sets the Trigger Level. If you set the Trigger Level to manual, recording will begin whenever you press the [  ] (Play) button. Alternatively, if you set the Trigger Level to a value between 1 and 127, recording will begin automatically after you have pressed the [  ] (Play) button and then whenever playback volume exceeds that level. The set Trigger Level will be indicated by a blue line in the level meter (4). For best results, set this parameter as low as possible to capture the entire signal, but not so low as to record unwanted noise. 5. Press the [  ] (Play) button. If you have set the Trigger Level to manual, recording will begin immediately right after you press the [  ] (Play) button. While recording, the [  ] (Record) button will light in red, and the [  ] (Play) button will light in green. If you have set a value between 1 and 127 as the Trigger Level, the recording will begin automatically whenever the playback volume exceeds that level. 51 MODX M Operation Manual 6. Play the keyboard. 7. When you have finished playing, press the [  ] (Stop) button. The recorded audio file will be saved to the USB flash drive. Playing an audio file As described below, this instrument can play audio files (44.1 kHz, 24-bit or 16-bit .wav in stereo) from a USB flash drive. You can also play a Performance on the keyboard while playing back the audio file. 1. Connect a USB flash drive to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument. 2. Opens the screen from: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Audio. 3. Tap Audio Name (1), then tap Load in the context menu. 4. Select the desired source USB flash drive and folder that contains the settings. 5. Select the desired .wav file on the USB flash drive to load. (1) (3) (2) (1) Audio name (2) Volume for playback (3) Audio length 6. Press the [  ] (Play) button. The audio file will play back. 7. Move the cursor to Audio Volume (2), and then adjust the playback volume by using the Data dial. 8. Press the [  ] (Stop) button to stop playback. 52 MODX M Operation Manual 4. Managing Back Ups You can save backups of the Performances, Live sets, and the Utility settings you have created and saved (stored) on the instrument to a USB flash drive, as well as load settings from backup files from the USB flash drive to this instrument. This section covers how to save all settings in the User memory to a USB flash drive and how to load your settings back to the instrument. The performance settings created on this device can also be backed up using Soundmondo (a sound management and sharing service). Soundmondo: https://www.yamaha.com/2/soundmondo Available file formats Saving to USB flash drive Formats common to MONTAGE M and MODX M • Backup file (.Y2A) Everything in User memory (including the User area, Library area, Songs, and Patterns) • User files (.Y2U) Everything in the User area of User memory (including the Utility settings and Quick Setups) • Library files (.Y2L) User area in User memory (Excluding utility settings and quick setup. Live Set is 1 bank only If the file size is larger than approximately 2 GB, the file will be divided in two. Split files will have different file extensions. • Backup files (.Y2B) • User files (.Y2W) • Library files (.Y2M) Generic file formats • Patterns and Songs (.MID) Patterns and Songs saved to User memory 53 MODX M Operation Manual Loading from a USB flash drive Files saved on the MONTAGE M and MODX M (.Y2A, .Y2U, .Y2L, .MID) Generic file formats • Audio files (.WAV and .AIF) Files used as User Waveforms • MIDI files (.MID) Files used as Patterns and Songs File formats used for older models • MONTAGE (.X7A, .X7U, .X7L) • MODX, MODX+ (.X8A, .X8U, .X8L) • MOTIF XF (.X3A, .X3V, .X3G, .X3W) • MOTIF XS (.X0A, .X0V, .X0G, .X0W) • MOXF (.X6A, .X6V, .X6G, .X6W) NOTE If the backup file saved on the MONTAGE M exceeds the capacity of the MODX M's user waveform memory, that file cannot be loaded. 54 MODX M Operation Manual The USB flash drive will be formatted. We recommend formatting the USB flash drive on the instrument. USB flash drives formatted on other devices may not work properly with this instrument. NOTICE Formatting a USB flash drive will erase all data stored on it. Please make sure that there is no necessary data on the card before formatting. Formatting Procedure 1. Connect a USB flash drive to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument. 2. Open the screen by going to [UTILITY] → Contents → Load. You can open the same screen by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [STORE] button. 3. Tap Job in the upper right corner of the screen, then tap the connected USB flash drive. 4. Tap Format in the context menu. 5. Tap Format(YES). Formatting is complete. 55 MODX M Operation Manual Saving settings to a USB flash drive 1. Connect a USB flash drive to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument. 2. Open the screen by going to [UTILITY] → Contents → Save. You can open the same screen by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [STORE] button, and then selecting the Save tab. 3. Under Content Type, select Backup File. 4. Select the USB flash drive and desired folder for saving the file. (1) (2) (3) (4) (1) Parent folder name (2) Name of the destination folder currently selected in the USB flash drive (3) Save to (4) List of files already saved in the folder 56 MODX M Operation Manual 5. Tap [+] for Save As New File. This calls up the screen for entering names. NOTE To overwrite the existing file, confirm the process by tapping the file name on the screen. Tap Save(YES) to save the file. 6. Enter the file name you wish to use. For specific information on how to enter file names, refer to the Quick Guide. 7. Tap Done to finish entering the name. The backup file will then be saved to the USB flash drive. 57 MODX M Operation Manual Loading settings from a USB flash drive NOTICE When settings are loaded, the existing settings on the instrument will be overwritten and lost. Important settings you want to keep should be saved to a USB flash drive (Save) before loading the settings. 1. Connect a USB flash drive to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument. 2. Open the screen by going to [UTILITY] → Contents → Load. You can open the same screen by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [STORE] button. 3. Under Content Type, select Backup File. 4. Select the desired source USB flash drive and folder that contains the settings. 5. Select the desired file on the USB flash drive to load. (1) (2) (3) (1) Parent folder name (2) Name of desired folder currently selected in the USB flash drive (3) List of files already saved in the folder 58 MODX M Operation Manual 5. Connecting external MIDI instruments Connecting a microphone or audio device This device allows you to connect audio devices such as microphones and CD players, as well as electronic musical instruments such as synthesizers, to the A/D INPUT terminal and play the input audio as an audio input part (A/D INPUT part). As with other parts, you can set Volume, Pan, Effects, etc. The audio input part is mixed with other parts and output as the sound of this instrument. Connecting microphones and audio devices 1. Make sure to turn off this instrument and set the A/D INPUT [GAIN] knob to the minimum value. 2. Connect the external device to the A/D INPUT jack(s) on the rear panel.  When connecting a microphone A/D INPUT [L/MONO] Mic. NOTE Make sure to use a dynamic microphone. Condenser microphones cannot be used.  When connecting audio devices, electronic musical instruments, etc. A/D INPUT [R ] A/D INPUT [L /MONO] L R (1) Stereo audio equipment (CD player, etc.) (1) Stereo audio device (CD player, etc.) 3. Turn on the connected device, and then turn on this instrument. 4. Open the screen by going to [UTILITY] → Settings → Audio I/O. 59 MODX M Operation Manual 5. Select the A/D Input setting for the device connected to the A/D INPUT jack(s). Set to Mic when a microphone or any device with a low output level is connected. Set to Line when an audio device, electronic instrument, or any device with a high input level is connected. 6. Press the [A/D INPUT] button. The button lights up and the input from the audio equipment connected to this instrument is enabled. 7. Listen to the sound from the external device connected to the MODX M and turn the A/D INPUT [GAIN] knob to adjust the gain. 8. Press the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button and select the Performance you wish to use with the external device connected to the MODX M. 9. Play the keyboard while singing into the microphone or playing audio with the audio device. Adjust the A/D INPUT volume on the Control sliders. 60 MODX M Operation Manual Using the Vocoder This instrument is equipped with a Vocoder. The Vocoder is an effect that processes the sound of the internal sound engine of this device using the characteristics of the voice input from the microphone. If you play the keyboard while speaking into the microphone, the sound of the instrument will change to sound like a robot voice. This mechanism is based on the principle of how humans make sounds. The sound produced by the vocal cords resonates in the mouth and nose. The mouth and nose act like filters that enhance certain frequencies, creating formants (peaks at specific frequencies) in the sound. The Vocoder effect applies this principle by extracting the filter characteristics of the voice input from the microphone and reproducing the formants with multiple bandpass filters. By passing the sound of musical instruments through it, a robot voice effect is created. Vocoder (3) (5) (1) Mic Input Part Output (2) Part Output (Keyboard Performance) (4) (1) Mic Input or Part Output (2) Part Output (instrument output) (3) Extracting voice characteristics (4) Reproducing formants with filters (5) Robot-like voice To use the Vocoder, connect the microphone, set the A/D Input settings in the Utility screen, and adjust the gain. Finally, select a Performance that uses the Vocoder effect, as shown below. 1. On the Performance screen, press the [CATEGORY] button. 2. Tap the button(s) on the screen to select the Pad/Choir category. 61 MODX M Operation Manual 3. Tap the search box on the Category Search screen, and enter "Vocoder". 4. Set Filter to Attribute and select Single. A list of Performances for Vocoder effects will be shown. 5. Select the desired Performance and press the [ENTER] button to confirm. 62 MODX M Operation Manual Connecting to a Computer or External MIDI Device The USB and MIDI terminals on the rear panel are used for connecting to a computer and external MIDI devices. You can use these terminals to send Program Change messages to external MIDI devices when you change the Performance. The Zone function is useful for setting up external MIDI devices. Setting up the Zone function The Zone function enables control of multiple external devices from the keyboard on this instrument. You can set up to eight zones for each performance. For example, you can use this function to switch between the internal sound engine and connected external sound engines by velocity or note range. 1. Press the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button to open the Performance screen. 2. Select a part, then open the screen by selecting [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Zone Settings. 3. Check the Part Mode settings. Select Internal to play the sound from the sound engine, and External to play the sound from the external sound engine. NOTE You can toggle between Part Mode Internal and External by quickly pressing the PART button twice when the [PART SELECT] button is on. 4. If necessary, set the parameters for Tx/Rx Ch (Transmit-Receive Channel) and Note Limit. 5. Press the [STORE] button to save the Performance. 63 MODX M Operation Manual Connecting and setting up a computer By connecting your computer to this instrument, you can use a DAW or sequencer software on the computer to create your own music. The acronym DAW (digital audio workstation) refers to music software for recording, editing, and mixing audio and MIDI. Typical DAW software includes Cubase, Logic, Pro Tools, and Live. Connecting a computer and setting up By connecting a computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, you can send and receive audio signals and MIDI messages. An AB-type USB cable and the driver for sending and receiving audio and MIDI are required for the connection. In Windows you must install the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver. On a Mac, it works with only the generic driver included in the OS, so no driver installation is required. How to Install the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver 1. Download the latest driver from the URL shown below. https://download.yamaha.com/ NOTE • Information on the system requirements is also available at the above URL. • The Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver may be updated without prior notice for improvement purposes. For more details and the latest information, please check the URL above. 2. Unzip the downloaded file and install the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver on your computer. For instructions on how to install the driver, refer to the Installation Guide included in the downloaded file. When connecting this instrument to a computer, use a USB cable to connect the USB [TO HOST] terminal to the computer's USB terminal as shown in the diagram below. (1) USB terminal (3) USB [TO HOST] terminal (2) USB cable (4) MODX M (Rear panel) (1) USB terminal (2) USB cable (3) USB [TO HOST] terminal (4) Rear panel of this instrument 64 MODX M Operation Manual Setting up for sending and receiving audio and MIDI Connect the computer with a USB cable, and then set the parameters for handling audio and MIDI through the USB connection. • Audio Can be used by simply connecting the USB cable. And, if necessary, change settings such as sampling frequency and gain. • MIDI Connect the cable and then set the parameters for transmitting and receiving. Please follow the steps below to set it up. Open the screen from the [UTILITY] → Settings → MIDI I/O → MIDI IN/OUT and select USB. Set this instrument to enable the transmission and reception of MIDI through the USB [TO HOST] terminal. About audio channels For the output of audio signals, you can use the USB [TO HOST] terminal and the OUTPUT jacks. The audio signal output to the USB [TO HOST] terminal is up to 10 channels (5 stereo channels) at a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. To select which signal to output to a specific channel, open the screen from the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Part Settings, and select the appropriate Part Output. For the input of audio signals, you can use the USB [TO HOST] terminal and A/D INPUT jacks. Audio signals coming in through the USB [TO HOST] terminal can contain up to 4 channels (or 2 stereo channels), and the output levels for Digital In L/R and Main L/R are set on the Mixing screen or Performance Edit screen, and are output to the OUTPUT terminals. In addition, the audio signal from the A/D INPUT terminal is sent to the A/D input section of this instrument on up to two channels (one stereo channel). MIDI channels and MIDI ports MIDI has 16 channels, but for large song data, 16 channels may insufficient. Therefore, the concept of MIDI ports exists to handle data with more than 16 channels. Each MIDI port can handle 16 channels. • One MIDI cable can transmit data for one port (16 channels) at a time. • However, a single USB cable is capable of handling MIDI data for up to 8 ports (or 16×8=128 channels) simultaneously. On this instrument, the determined ports are provided for the USB terminals, as shown below. Port 1: Port for handling the sound engine section of this instrument Make sure to set to Port 1 on the external MIDI device or the computer, if you wish the sound engine to be played on the external MIDI device or the computer. Port 2: Dedicated for using the DAW remote control. Port 3: Dedicated for receiving MIDI messages from a MIDI device and sending them to another MIDI device for MIDI Thru. • MIDI port 3 data received by the USB [TO HOST] terminal is passed through the MIDI [OUT] terminal. • MIDI data received by the MIDI [IN] terminal is passed through the USB [TO HOST] terminal as MIDI port 3 data. For sending MIDI messages between the instrument and the computer through the USB cable, you need to select the appropriate MIDI Port as well as the MIDI channel. Set the Port settings on the external device suitable for the situation. 65 MODX M Operation Manual Using the MIDI 2.0 functions This instrument supports MIDI 2.0 functionality. By connecting this instrument to a computer that meets the MIDI 2.0 operational requirements, you can use data of higher resolution than that of any MIDI 1.0 instrument. For more information about MIDI 2.0, see the MIDI 2.0 site (https://www.yamaha.com/2/midi-2-0/). For details on the supported MIDI 2.0 messages, refer to the Data List. https://download.yamaha.com/ To use the MIDI 2.0 functionality, first access the setting from [UTILITY] → Settings → Advance → USB Driver Mode and set Legacy Mode to Off, then connect a computer that meets the MIDI 2.0 operating requirements. About music production using the computer By connecting this instrument and the computer, you can use the DAW software as in the examples shown below. • Using the DAW software on the computer to record your keyboard performance in MIDI or audio • Using the tone generator block to play back the Song recorded on the DAW software These instructions assume that the instrument and the computer are already connected. Shown below are some examples of using the DAW software and this instrument. MIDI recording of your keyboard performance on the DAW This shows how to record your keyboard performance on the DAW as MIDI data. Settings on this instrument 1. Open the screen by going to [UTILITY] → Settings → Quick Setup. 2. Select MIDI Rec on DAW. 3. Press the [EXIT] button to close the Quick Setup screen, or press the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button to open the Performance screen and select the Performance you want to record. 66 MODX M Operation Manual The setting on the DAW software 1. Enable MIDI Thru. MIDI Thru is a setting used for sending MIDI messages from the built-in keyboard to the computer and back to the Tone generator block of the instrument according to the settings on the recording tracks. As shown below, for example, the MIDI data entered from this instrument is sent to Channel 1. If MIDI Thru is set to ON on the computer, then the MIDI data is sent to Channel 3 from the computer to play the sound engine at Channel 3. By using this setup, you can record the keyboard performance while listening to the same sound as the final output. MODX M USB [TO HOST] terminal (1) Tone Generator (recognizing data over MIDI Channel 3) (2) Keyboard (output via MIDI Channel 1) MIDI Thru = on IN Ch1 OUT Ch3 (3) Local Control = off (4) Computer (DAW software such as Cubase) (1) Tone generator block (recognizing data over MIDI Channel 3) (2) Keyboard (Ch1) (3) Local Control = OFF (4) Computer (DAW software such as Cubase) 2. Record the instrument performance on the DAW. Using the sound engine to play back Songs on the DAW This shows how to use the DAW software as a Multi-timbral sound generator. It allows you to use the high-quality MIDI sound generator without placing too much load on your computer’s CPU. Settings on this instrument 1. Select a Performance. After selecting a Performance, you may find it helpful to use the Mixing screen from: the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Mixing to mix Part 1 to 16. From the [UTILITY] → Effect Switch screen, set Kbd Ctrl Lock to ON to set the Tx/Rx Ch. of each Part to enable the reception of messages. The setting on the DAW software 1. With the tracks you wish to use for playing the sound engine, set the MIDI output to Port 1 on this instrument. 2. Enter the MIDI data for each track. The sound engine corresponding to each track's MIDI channel is set on the Mixing screen of this instrument. 67 MODX M Operation Manual Using Expanded Softsynth Plugin for MONTAGE M/MODX M Expanded Softsynth Plugin for MONTAGE M/MODX M is a software synthesizer with the same sound engine system as the hardware MONTAGE M and MODX M. Since this software works in sync with the hardware MONTAGE M or MODX M, the same sounds can be seamlessly integrated into your music production (where software is most convenient for a DAW), and into your live performance (where the actual instrument is used onstage). This lets you use either version of the MONTAGE M or MODX M, depending on your personal preferences and specific application. For more information on the installation and activation of the ESP, access the MODX M Welcome page from the Expanded Softsynth Plugin for MONTAGE M/MODX M Download Information leaflet included with the instrument. ESP Manual can be downloaded from the website below. https://download.yamaha.com/ Using the DAW Remote function The DAW Remote function allows you to control the DAW software from the controllers on the top panel of this instrument. This function can only be used when the instrument is connected to a computer with an USB cable. It cannot be used when connected with a MIDI cable. Settings on this instrument 1. Use an AB-type USB cable to connect a computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal of the instrument. 2. Select the DAW software from: [DAW REMOTE] → Settings → DAW. The setting on the DAW software This section explains how to set up the DAW software. Depending on the version of your DAW software, the setup procedure may be different or the setup itself may not be possible. For details, please refer to the relevant owner’s manual for the DAW software you are using. NOTE Once the connection between the computer and this instrument is lost, the DAW software may not recognize this instrument even after reconnection. If this happens, restart the DAW after the reconnection. • Cubase 1. Device/Studio → Device Settings.../Studio Setup... to open the dialog box. 2. Select MIDI → MIDI Port settings, and uncheck All MIDI Input for Port 2 of MODX M-2 or MODX M. 3. Press the [+] button on the upper left corner of the dialog, and then select Mackie Control from the list. 4. Select Remote Devices → Mackie Control. 5. Set the MIDI Input and MIDI Output to MODX M-2 or MODX M Port2. 6. (Optional) Assign desired functions to F1–F8 of User Commands. • Logic Pro 1. Select Logic Pro X → Preferences → Advanced → and check Show [Advanced Tools]. 2. Logic Pro X → Control Surfaces → Setup... to open the dialog box. 3. From New → Install..., select Mackie Designs from Mackie Control. 4. Set the Output Port and the Input Port of Mackie Controlto MODX M Port2. 5. (Optional) From Logic Pro X → Control Surface → Controller Assignments... set the Zone to Control Surface: Mackie Control, then assign functions to Control F1–F8. 68 MODX M Operation Manual • Pro Tools 1. Setup → Peripherals... to open the dialog box. 2. Select the MIDI Controllers tab. 3. Set the Type to HUI and the Receive From and Send To to the predefined ones (Predefined) MODX M-2 or MODX M, Port2. • Live 1. Live → Preferences... to open the dialog box. 2. Select the Link/MIDI tab. 3. Select MackieControl for the Control Surface. 4. Set the MIDI Input and MIDI Output to MODX M-2 or MODX M Port2. 5. (Optional) Assign desired functions to F1–F8 by setting the operation of MIDI Note F#2–C#3 in the MIDI Map Assign Mode. 69 MODX M Operation Manual Connecting a smart device You connect a smart device such as a smartphone and a tablet to this instrument. Smart device apps that are compatible with this instrument provide many more convenient and enjoyable ways to use this musical instrument. For more information on the apps and supported devices, refer to the Yamaha website. For details on how to connect, search for "Smart Device Connection Manual" on the Yamaha website. To use audio communication with an iOS device, please prepare the following adapters according to the type of connector/terminal. • Lightning Terminals: Lightning to USB 3 Camera Adapter • USB Type-C port: USB-C Digital AV Multiport Adapter When connecting a smart device, on the instrument go to [UTILITY] → Settings → USB Driver Mode and set it to Generic. Connecting External MIDI Instruments Using USB cables and standard MIDI cables (that are commercially available), you can connect an external MIDI instrument to this instrument. You can play an external MIDI instrument from the built-in keyboard, or play the tone generator block from an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer. NOTE You can use either the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal or the MIDI terminal to connect the external MIDI device. Connecting an external MIDI device to MIDI terminals When using MIDI terminals, connect an external MIDI device with MIDI cables, and then select MIDI from [UTILITY] → Settings → MIDI I/O. Controlling an external MIDI sound engine with this instrument You can play sounds from an external MIDI sound engine using the keyboard on this instrument or by song playback. To play the sounds from the internal sound engine and external MIDI sound engine separately, use the Zone function. Make sure to match the MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI device with the MIDI Receive Channel of the instrument. Setting the MIDI receive channel for this instrument The MIDI output channel on this instrument should be set to a different value, depending on whether there are any Parts with Part Mode set to External. • If Part Mode does not have any External Parts Parts with Common or Keyboard Control Switch set to ON: MIDI I/O Ch. Parts with Keyboard Control Switch set to OFF: Tx/Rx Ch. • If Part Mode does have External Parts Parts with Common or Keyboard Control Switch set to ON: Tx Ch. for which the Part Mode is set to External and Keyboard Control Switch is set to ON Parts with Keyboard Control Switch set to OFF: Part Mode is set to External and other Part's Tx Ch. *Any Parts with Part Mode set to Internal will not transmit MIDI messages. Setting the receive channel for an external MIDI sound engine Please refer to the instruction manual for the external MIDI sound engine. When you wish to play the sound only from the external sound engine, lower the volume on this instrument, or set Local Control to OFF from [UTILITY] → Settings → MIDI I/O. 70 MODX M Operation Manual Playing the sounds of this instrument with an external MIDI keyboard You can use the keys on an external MIDI keyboard to play this instrument's Performances and change Performances. Make sure to match the MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI device with the MIDI Receive Channel of the MODX M. Setting the MIDI receive channel for this instrument Parts with Keyboard Control Switch set to ON: MIDI I/O Ch. Parts with Keyboard Control Switch set to OFF: Tx/Rx Ch. * If the Part Mode is set to External, the Part will not receive MIDI messages from the external device. Setting the transmit channel for an external MIDI keyboard Please refer to the Owner's Manual for your external MIDI keyboard. Connecting a USB MIDI keyboard to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal By connecting a USB MIDI keyboard to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal, you can use the connected keyboard just like the built-in keyboard, depending on the functions of the connected USB MIDI keyboard. NOTICE • The rating of the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal is a maximum of 5 V/500 mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above this, since this can cause damage to the instrument itself. • Use an AB-type USB cable of less than 3 meters. Compatible MIDI devices • USB class-compliant MIDI devices USB MIDI keyboard, etc. • Yamaha MIDI devices that have been tested for compatibility CP88, CP73, MODX, MODX+, MONTAGE, MOTIF XF, MOXF, MX, reface, YC, MONTAGE M, SEQTRAK Special notes concerning MIDI communication MIDI communication with a device connected via the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal follows special rules for allowing the device to behave like a built-in keyboard. • MIDI communication is one-way only (sent from the external MIDI device and received by this instrument). • All MIDI data is received regardless of the MIDI IN/OUT and MIDI I/O Ch. settings. • For Parts with Keyboard Control Switch set to ON, data received on all corresponding channels is shared. (For example, when Keyboard Control Switch for Parts 1 to 3 is set to ON, data received from any of channels 1 to 3 will be delivered to all Parts 1 to 3.) • Each Part with Keyboard Control Switch set to OFF receives the data of only the corresponding channel for the Part. 71 MODX M Operation Manual 6. Screens and parameters Navigation bar This chapter explains the Navigation bar, which is always displayed on the screen. (3) (1) (2) (4) (5) (7) (8) (9) (6) (1) HOME icon This has the same function as the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button on the top panel. Tap to display the Performance screen (HOME). (2) EXIT icon This has the same function as the [EXIT] button on the top panel. Tap to return to the screen one level higher. (3) INFORMATION area This area displays information such as the currently selected screen name, part, element, operator, oscillator, and drum key. Tap  to switch parts, elements, operators, oscillators, and drum keys. • Normal Part When a Normal Part is selected, the status of the elements, operators and oscillators is displayed on the right side of this area. When muted, an M icon appears below the number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M S Element (AWM2) When an element is sounding, the  below the number lights up to  . When dividing elements according to velocity, you can check which element is being played. Elements: 18 The total number of set elements The indicator shows the volume of the element being played 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M S Operator (FM-X) 1 2 3 N M S Oscillator (AN-X) • Drum Part When a Drum Part is selected, the status of the drum key is displayed on the right side of this area. Drum Keys: 73 The total number of set drum keys The indicator shows the volume of the drum part being played 72 MODX M Operation Manual (4) VIEW icon This function allows you to select the view on the Performance screen. Tap to display the view list on the Performance screen. (5) EFFECT icon Tap to display the Effect Switch screen. When the Insertion Effect, System Effect, or Master Effect is turned Off, the indicator turns off. (6) QUICK SETUP icon Tap to display the MIDI I/O screen. Displays on or off for Local Control On when the icon is on, Off when it is off. Displayed when MIDI IN/OUT is set to MIDI Displayed when MIDI IN/OUT is set to USB (7) TEMPO SETTINGS icon Displays the tempo of the currently selected Performance. Tap to display the Tempo Settings screen. (8) LIVE SET icon Tap to display the Live Set screen. The currently selected slot is displayed in blue. (9) UTILITY icon Tap to display the most recently opened Utility screen. 73 MODX M Operation Manual Performance Screens The Performance screen lets you select a Performance for playing on the keyboard or modify the Performance settings to customize the Performance. HOME Operation Press the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button Tap the HOME icon ( ) (1) (2) (3) (14) (13) (4) (11) (12) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (1) Performance Name Shows the name of the selected Performance. Tap to display the context menu for Category Search, Edit, Recall, etc. You can switch Performances using the Data dial, the [INC/YES] button, and the [DEC/NO] button. There are two ways to switch. • Default ( ) Switches in the order of the Performance list on the Performance Category Search screen. • Live Set ( ) Switches in the order of the Live Set slots. You can set the switching method from [UTILITY] → Settings → System → Perf Inc/Dec. You can check the status of the Performance with the flags. • Favorite Flag ( ) A will be shown when you turn on the Favorite switch. It will also be displayed on the Performance Category Search screen. • Edit Flag ( ) The blue flag will be shown when you change a parameter in the Performance. The Edit flag will be turned off when you save the settings with the [STORE] button. 74 MODX M Operation Manual (2) Performance Flag The Performance flags are displayed. Attribute Description AWM2 A Performance consisting only of AWM2 sound engine parts FM-X (1 color) A Performance consisting only of FM-X sound engine parts FM-X (2 colors) Performances using an FM-X Part containing the Smart Morph information AN-X (1 color) Performances using the AN-X sound engine AN-X (2 colors) A Performance using an AN-X Part containing the Smart Morph information MC Performances featuring Motion Control SSS A Performance that supports Seamless Sound Switching * Performances that combine multiple sound engine types are indicated with the “+” sign. (3) Oscilloscope The Main L&R output is displayed as a waveform. (4) Part Indicator When the cursor is on either Performance Name or Parts 1 to 8, the status for Parts 9 to 16 will be shown. When the cursor is on Parts 9 to 16, the status for Parts 1 to 8 will be shown. Nothing will be shown when Parts 9 to 16 are not used. (5) View area for various parameters Different parameters will be shown in this view area depending on the Display Mode. (6) Part Name Part Type and Category, or Part Name will be shown. Tap to display the context menu for Category Search, Edit, Copy, and Property. When a Part other than Part 1 is selected and the sound is already set for that Part, the context menu for Category Search, Edit, Copy, and Delete is displayed. (7) Keyboard Control Switch You can set which Parts will play simultaneously by turning each Part's Keyboard Control Switch on or off. If the Part is set to Common or the Keyboard Control Switch for the Part is set to On, you can simultaneously play Parts having the Keyboard Control Switch set to On. If the Keyboard Control Switch for the Part is set to Off, when you play the keyboard with that Part selected, those sounds will be played. Settings: Off, On (8) Part Mute Switches Part Mute on or off. Settings: Off, On (9) Part Solo Switches Part Solo on or off. Settings: Off, On (10) Part Volume Sets the volume of the Part. Settings: 0–127 (11) Part Level Meter Shows the audio output level for the Part. 75 MODX M Operation Manual (12) [+] (Add) Tap to display the Part Category Search screen or Performance Merge screen, which allows you to add a Part. (13) Changing the Display Mode (14) Changing the View Mode Changing the Display Mode When you change the Display Mode, different parameters will be shown in the view area of the Home screen. You can select a different Display Mode by moving the corresponding display knob. „ Range Navigation The Navigation screen will open. Fx Overview The FX Overview screen will open. Control View The Control View screen will open. Favorite Turns the Favorite switch on or off. Settings: Off, On Note Limit Sets the note range (the lowest and the highest notes) for the Part. When the first note specified is higher than the second (for example, C5 to C4), the notes in the ranges C−2 to C4 and C5 to G8 will be played. Settings: C−2–G8 Velocity Limit Sets the velocity range for the Part. Settings: 1–127 76 MODX M Operation Manual „ FX/Pan Var Return Sets the output level (Return Level) of the signals processed by the Variation Effect. Settings: 0–127 Rev Return Sets the output level (Return Level) of the signals processed by the Reverb Effect. Settings: 0–127 Pan Adjusts the Pan position (stereo position) of the currently selected Performance. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 Volume Adjusts the volume of the currently selected Performance. Settings: 0–127 Var (Part Variation Send) Sets the level of the signals sent to the Part Variation Effect. Settings: 0–127 Rev (Part Reverb Send) Sets the level of the signals sent to the Part Reverb Effect. Settings: 0–127 Dry (Part Dry Level) Sets the dry level (or the level of the signals not processed by the System Effect) of the Part. Settings: 0–127 Pan (Part Pan) Adjusts the Pan position (in the stereo field) for the Part. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 77 MODX M Operation Manual „ Arp/MS/Porta Arp Select Selects the Arpeggio. Settings: 1–8 MS Select Changes the Motion Sequence selection. Settings: 1–8 Portamento Switch Sets Portamento on or off for Parts having the Portamento Part Sw set to On. This switch is linked to the [PORTAMENTO] button on the top panel. Settings: Off, On Portamento Time Sets the time length (or speed) for the pitch transition of Portamento for the Part. This is the offset value for the Part's Portamento Time (the value adjusted relative to the reference). Settings: −64–+0–+63 Arp On/Off (Arpeggio Part Switch) Sets the Arpeggio on or off for the Part. When both Arpeggio and Arpeggio Hold are On, Arp Hold On will be displayed. When the Arpeggio is set to On, you can switch Arp Hold On or Off by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and tapping the Arp On/Off button on the screen. Settings: Off, On MS On/Off (Motion Sequencer Part Switch) Sets Motion Sequencer for the Part on or off. Settings: Off, On Prt On/Off (Portamento Part Switch) Sets Portamento for the Part on or off. Settings: Off, On Time (Portamento Part Time) Sets the time length of the pitch transition for the Portamento of the Part. Settings: 0–127 78 MODX M Operation Manual „ Mode/Transpose MIDI I/O Ch. Sets the MIDI channel for input and output of the Common and the Part with the Keyboard Control Switch to be set to On. Settings: Ch1–Ch16 Octave Shift (Keyboard Octave Shift) Shifts the pitch of the keys in octaves. It is linked to the OCTAVE buttons on the top panel. Settings: −3–+0–+3 Transpose (Keyboard Transpose) Shifts the pitch of the keys in semitones. Settings: –11semi to +0semi to +11semi NOTE If the pitch exceeds the range (C-2 to G8) that the sound source section of the unit can play, a note one octave higher (or lower) will be output. Int/Ext (Part Mode) Set whether to use the built-in sound source of the instrument (Int) or an external sound source (Ext). Settings: Int, Ext Ch (Tx/Rx Ch) Sets the channel for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages for the Zone when Part Mode is set to Internal and the Keyboard Control Switch is set to Off. Settings: Ch1–Ch16, Off Ch (Transmit Ch) Sets the channel for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages for the Zone when Part Mode is set to External. Settings: Ch1–Ch16 Oct (Zone Octave) Shifts the pitch of the zone in octaves. Settings: −3–+0 (standard)–+3 Trans (Zone Transpose) Shifts the pitch of the zone in semitones. Settings: −11–+0 (standard)–+11 79 MODX M Operation Manual „ Filter Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency) Changes the sound by setting the cutoff frequency of the filter. When the Low Pass Filter is selected, larger values here result in a brighter sound, and smaller values result in a darker sound. This is specified as an offset value to the filter cutoff frequency for the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Resonance Adds special characteristics to the sound by adjusting the signal level near the cutoff frequency. This is specified as an offset value to the filter resonance for the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 FEG Depth Sets the depth range for the cutoff frequency change controlled by the FEG. This is specified as an offset value to the Part's FEG Depth. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Cut (Part Cutoff Frequency) Changes the sound by setting the cutoff frequency of the Part's filter. When the Low Pass Filter is selected, larger values here result in a brighter sound, and smaller values result in a darker sound. This is specified as an offset value to the filter cutoff frequency set on the Filter Type screen. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Res (Part Resonance) Adds special characteristics to the sound by adjusting the signal level near the Part's cutoff frequency. This is specified as an offset value to the filter resonance set on the Filter Type screen. Settings: −64–+0–+63 FEG (Part FEG Depth) Adjusts the range of the cutoff frequency change controlled by the FEG setting in the Filter Type screen. When it is set to 0, the settings in the Filter Type screen will be used as is. Settings: −64–+0–+63 80 MODX M Operation Manual Changing the View Mode You can access more detailed information from the Home screen by using View Mode. You can select a different View Mode by moving the corresponding display knob. When the cursor is on the Performance Name, pressing the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button also changes the view. „ Part Info • Element Sw/Level Displayed when the currently selected Part is a Normal Part (AWM2). Element Sw (Element Switch) Switches the Element On or Off. Settings: Off, On Element Level Sets the output level for the Element. Settings: 0–127 • Drum Key Displayed when the currently selected Part is a Drum Part. Drum Key Level Sets the output level for the Drum Key. Settings: 0–127 81 MODX M Operation Manual • Algorithm Displayed when the currently selected Part is a Normal Part (FM-X). Algorithm (Algorithm Number) Changes the Algorithm. Tapping the Algorithm image calls up the Algorithm Search screen. Settings: Refer to the Data List Feedback (Feedback Level) Set the degree (level) of feedback (modulating the modulator itself using the output waveform of the carrier modulated by the modulator). Settings: 0–7 • Virtual Analog Displayed when the currently selected Part is a Normal Part (AN-X). 1–3 (Oscillator 1–3) Opens the OSC/Tune screen for Part Edit (AN-X). N (Noise) Opens the Noise screen for Part Edit (AN-X). Oscillator Level Sets the output level for the Oscillator. Settings: 0–511 82 MODX M Operation Manual Noise Level Sets the noise level. Settings: 0–511 Filter 1, 2 Opens the Filter Type screen for Part Edit (AN-X). Amplifier Opens the Amp EG screen for Part Edit (AN-X). „ Smart Morph The Smart Morph map is displayed. However, the map will not be shown when there is no Smart Morph information. „ Motion Seq Shows the lane set in the View Lane of the currently selected Part. However, it will not be displayed if the set lane is Off. 83 MODX M Operation Manual „ Velocity - Note The Velocity - Note view is displayed. This is convenient for setting velocity splits when using multiple Parts. „ Part - Note The Part - Note view is displayed. Shown when the View Mode is set to Part Info and the selected Part is Common. 84 MODX M Operation Manual „ Ribbon Shown when the View Mode is Ribbon. 85 MODX M Operation Manual Motion Control On the Motion Control screen, you can set the Motion Control settings applied to the entire Performance. Super Knob On the Super Knob screen, you can set the values for controlling the Super Knob. You can set a link between the Super knob and each of the assignable knobs. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Motion Control → Super Knob (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) Super Knob Link (2) Assignable Knob 1–8 Value (3) Assignable Knob 1–8 Value Left (4) Assignable Knob 1–8 Value Mid (5) Assignable Knob 1–8 Value Right MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch) Sets the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on or off. This switch is linked to the [MSEQ] buttons on the top panel. Settings: Off, On Super Knob MS (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Switch) Sets the Motion Sequencer used for the Super Knob on or off. Settings: Off, On Edit Super Knob The Common Edit Control Assign screen will open. You can set the parameters to be controlled by the Super Knob. 86 MODX M Operation Manual LED Pattern Sets the lighting pattern of the Super knob. Settings: Off, Type 1, Type 2-1, Type 2-2, Type 3-1, Type 3-2, Type 4-1, Type 4-2, Type 5-1, Type 5-2, Type 6, Type 7-1, Type 7-2, Type 8-1, Type 8-2, Type 9, Type 10, Type 11, Type 1B, Type 2-1B, Type 2-2B, Type 3-1B, Type 3-2B, Type 4-1B, Type 4-2B, Type 5-1B, Type 5-2B, Type 6B, Type 7-1B, Type 7-2B, Type 8-1B, Type 8-2B, Type 9B, Type 10B, Type 11B, Rotary 1, Rotary 2, Rotary 3, Rotary 4, Rotary 5, Rotary 6, Rotary 7, Rotary 8, Rotary 9, Rotary 10 Super Knob (Super Knob Value) Sets the Super Knob value. Settings: 0–1023 Mid Position (Super Knob Mid Position) Set the Mid value for the Super Knob. Settings: Off, 1–1022 Super Knob Link Sets the corresponding knob to link to the Super Knob. When these switches are set to Off, the operation of the Super Knob will not affect the parameter of the knob. Settings: Off, On Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Value Shows the current values for the Assignable knobs (Knobs 1–8). Settings: 0–1023 Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Value Left Shows the value of the assignable knobs (Knobs 1–8) when the Super Knob Value is set to 0 (or the Super Knob is turned all the way to the left). Settings: 0–1023 Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Value Mid Shows the value of the assignable knobs (Knobs 1–8) when the Super Knob Value is set to Mid Position. This parameter is not available when the Mid Position is Off. Settings: 0–1023 Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Value Right Shows the value of the assignable knobs (Knobs 1–8) when the Super Knob Value is set to 1023 (or the Super Knob is turned all the way to the right). Settings: 0–1023 NOTE • When you set Value Left to a smaller value and Value Right to a larger value, Knobs 1–8 will move in the same direction as the Super Knob. • When you set Value Right to a smaller value and Value Left to a larger value, Knobs 1–8 will move in the opposite direction to the Super Knob. 87 MODX M Operation Manual Knob Auto In the Knob Auto screen, you can set the Motion Sequencer for the Super Knob (Super Knob Motion Sequencer). You can set the Motion Sequencer to automatically control the Super Knob value. Only one Lane can be used by the Super Knob. NOTE Up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. However, the Lane used for the Knob Auto screen is not included in the eight referred to here. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Motion Control → Knob Auto Motion Seq Master Sw (Motion Sequencer Master Switch) Sets the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on or off. This switch is linked to the [MSEQ] buttons on the top panel. Settings: Off, On Super Knob MS Sw (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Switch) Sets the Super Knob Motion Sequencer on or off. Settings: Off, On MS FX (Super Knob Motion Sequencer FX Receive) Sets Knobs to be affected by the operation of the Super Knob. Settings: Off, On Trigger (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Trigger Receive) Sets to receive the signals from the [MSEQ TRIGGER] button. When set to On, the Motion Sequence will not be played back unless you press the [MSEQ TRIGGER] button. Settings: Off, On Sequence Select (Motion Sequence Select) Changes the Motion Sequence type selection. Settings: 1–8 SK MS Random (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Randomness) Sets randomness of the changes in the Step value of the sequence. Settings: 0–127 Edit Sequence The Super Knob Motion Sequence Edit screen will open. 88 MODX M Operation Manual „ Sync/Speed Tabs Sync (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync) Selects the speed and the timing for the playback of the Super Knob Motion Sequence. Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat Off: Plays back the Super Knob Motion Sequencer alone Tempo: Plays back at the Performance tempo. Beat: Plays back in sync with the beat. • When Sync is set to Off Speed (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Speed) Sets the playback speed for the Motion Sequence. Settings: 0–127 Delay Time (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Lane Key On Delay Time Length) Sets the delay time for starting the playback of the Motion Sequence. Settings: 0–127 Fade In Time (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Lane Fade In Time Length) Sets the time for the Motion Sequence to reach maximum amplitude. Settings: 0–127 • When Sync is set to something other than Off Unit (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Unit Multiply) Sets the percentage for stretching or compressing the Super Knob Motion Sequencer playback time. Settings: 50%–6400%, Common 200%: The playback time is doubled, and the tempo is halved 100%: The playback time is kept unchanged 50%: The playback time is halved, and the tempo is doubled Common: The value set in the Unit common to all Parts is applied Delay Steps (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Lane Key On Delay Step Length) Sets the delay time for starting the playback of the Motion Sequence. Settings: 0–32 Fade In Steps (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Lane Fade In Step Length) Sets the time to reach the maximum amplitude for the Motion Sequence. Settings: 0–32 Vel Limit (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Velocity Limit) Sets the velocity range (lowest and highest values) for playing back the Motion Sequence. Settings: 1–127 89 MODX M Operation Manual „ Loop/Length Tabs Key On Reset (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Key On Reset) Resets the Motion Sequence playback when you press any key on the keyboard. This parameter is not available when the Trigger is On. Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On Each-On: Each time you play any note, playback starts from the beginning 1st-On: Playback starts from the beginning at the first note you play. When the second note is played while the first note is held, playback will not be reset. Loop (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Loop) Sets the Motion Sequence to loop playback (in repeats) or one-shot playback. Settings: Off, On Loop Start (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Loop Start) Specifies the starting point for the loop playback of the Motion Sequence. Settings: 1–16 (should be below the Length setting) Length (Super Knob Motion Sequence Length) Sets the Motion Sequence length. Settings: 1–16 (should be above the Loop Start setting) MS Grid (Super Knob Motion Sequence Grid) Sets the length of a step in the Motion Sequence. Settings: 60, 80, 120, 160, 240, 320, 480 90 MODX M Operation Manual „ Super Knob Motion Sequence Edit The setting screen for the Super Knob Motion Sequencer. You can create a sequence of up to 16 steps. Loop Start (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Loop Start) Specifies the starting point for the loop playback of the Motion Sequence. Settings: 1–16 (should be below the Length setting) Length (Super Knob Motion Sequence Length) Sets the Motion Sequence length. Settings: 1–16 (should be above the Loop Start setting) MS Grid (Super Knob Motion Sequence Grid) Sets the length of a step in the Motion Sequence. Settings: 60, 80, 120, 160, 240, 320, 480 Sequence Select (Motion Sequence Select) Changes the Motion Sequence type selection. Settings: 1–8 Polarity (Super Knob Motion Sequence Polarity) Sets the polarity of the Motion Sequence. Settings: Unipolar, Bipolar Unipolar: Only positive values are used for the parameter change Bipolar: Both positive and negative values are used for the parameter change Amplitude (Super Knob Motion Sequence Amplitude) Sets the degree of changes in the Motion Sequence. Settings: 0–127 Smooth (Super Knob Motion Sequence Smoothness) Sets the smoothness of the changes in the Motion Sequence over time. Settings: 0–127 91 MODX M Operation Manual Job Calls up the Job menu. • Store Sequence Saves (stores) the edited Motion Sequence. • Load Sequence Loads the Motion Sequence. • Copy Sequence Copies the Motion Sequence. Super Knob Motion Sequence Step Value Sets the value for each step in the Motion Sequence. You can use Control sliders 1 to 8 to change the values for Steps 1 to 8 and Steps 9 to 16, depending on the cursor position. Settings: 0–127 Super Knob Motion Sequence Step Type Sets the type and direction of each step in the Motion Sequence. Settings: A, B, Reverse A, Reverse B Pulse A (Super Knob Motion Sequence Step Curve Type A) Pulse B (Super Knob Motion Sequence Step Curve Type B) Selects a parameter change curve for Pulse A and Pulse B. Use the Super Knob Motion Sequence Step Type to select which of the curve types to use for each step. The vertical axis represents the time while the horizontal axis represents the step value. Settings: (When a preset bank is selected) Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold, Harmonic, Steps (When a user bank is selected) Init Curve 1–32 (When loading a Library file) Curve within Library 1–24 Edit User Curve Displayed when Init Curve is selected for Pulse A and Pulse B. The User Curve Edit screen will open. Prm 1 (Super Knob Motion Sequence Step Curve Parameter 1) Prm 2 (Super Knob Motion Sequence Step Curve Parameter 2) Adjusts the shape of the step curve in the Motion Sequence. Also, the range for the parameter value differs depending on the Curve Type. This setting is not available depending on the Curve Type. Control (Super Knob Motion Sequence Step Curve Shape Control Switch) Enables or disables the use of the knobs for controlling the step curve shape of the Motion Sequence. Shown only when MS FX (Super Knob Motion Sequencer FX Receive) is set to On. This setting is not available depending on the Curve Type. Settings: Off, On 92 MODX M Operation Manual „ User Curve Edit This is the setting screen for the User Curve. You can create an 8-point Linear curve or an 8-step curve. Curve No. (Curve Number) Indicates the current curve number. Settings: 1–32 Curve Name You can save the curve you are editing under a new name. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Curve Type Sets the Curve type. Settings: Linear, Step Input Sets the input level for the curve. Input 1 is fixed to the value 0. Input 8 is fixed to the value of 1023 when the Curve Type is set to Linear. Settings: 0–1023 Output Sets the output level for the curve. Settings: 0–1023 93 MODX M Operation Manual Mixing On the Mixing screen, you can change the mix by adjusting the volume of each Part and make effect settings. The settings in the Mixing screen are saved (stored) in the Performance. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Mixing Part 1–16 (Part 1–16 Switch) Audio (Audio Switch) Changes the view. Settings: Part 1–16, Audio (Part 1–8, Audio Part, Master) „ Part 1–16 view Sets the mix for Parts 1 to 16. (1) (2) (4) (3) (1) Part Category (2) Keyboard Control (3) Volume (4) Part Level Meter 94 MODX M Operation Manual Part Category The Main category of the selected Part is shown. Tap to display the context menu for Category Search, Edit, Property, etc. When a Part other than Part 1 is selected and the sound is already set for that Part, the context menu for Category Search, Edit, Copy, and Delete is displayed. Tap [+] to add a Part. Settings: Refer to the Data List Mute/Solo Switch Kbd Ctrl Switch Switches between the Mute/Solo view and Keyboard Control view. Mute (Part Mute) Solo (Part Solo) Switches Mute and Solo for the Part on or off. Settings: Off, On Keyboard Control Switches Keyboard Control on or off. For Parts 9 to 16, the buttons will not be shown since Keyboard Control cannot be set to On for those Parts. Settings: Off, On 3-band (3-band EQ Switch) 2-band (2-band EQ Switch) Switches between the 2-band EQ view and 3-band EQ view of Parts 1 to 16. Settings: 3-band, 2-band EQ (Equalizer) Shows the EQ setting either in 3-band or 2-band views. Tapping on the area calls up the context menu of Part EQ. Rev Send (Reverb Send) Sets the level of the signals sent from Parts 1 to 16 to the Reverb Effect. Settings: 0–127 Var Send (Variation Send) Sets the level of the signals sent from Parts 1 to 16 to the Variation Effect. Settings: 0–127 Dry Level Sets the dry level (or the level of the signals not processed by the System Effect) of Parts 1 to 16. Settings: 0–127 Pan Adjusts the Pan position (in the stereo field) for Parts 1 to 16. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 Volume Sets the volume for Parts 1 to 16. Settings: 0–127 Part Level Meter Shows the level for Parts 1 to 16. 95 MODX M Operation Manual „ Audio view Sets the mix for the Audio Part. (1) (9) (8) (12) (11) (10) (14) (13) (15) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1) Part Category (2) Digi (Digital Part) (3) Main (USB Main Part) (4) AD (A/D Part) (5) Mst (Master) (6) A/D Part EQ (7) Master EQ (8) Digital Part Volume (9) Part Level Meter (10) Digi (Digital Part Level Meter) (11) USB Main Monitor Volume (12) Main (USB Main Monitor Level Meter) (13) A/D Part Volume (14) AD (A/D Part Level Meter) (15) Performance Volume Part Category The Main category of the selected Part is shown. Tap to display the context menu for Category Search, Edit, Property, etc. When a Part other than Part 1 is selected and the sound is already set for that Part, the context menu for Category Search, Edit, Copy, and Delete is displayed. Tap [+] to add a Part. Settings: Refer to the Data List Digi (Digital Part) Main (USB Main Part) AD (A/D Part) Mst (Master) Tap to display the context menu for Edit, etc. Mute/Solo Switch Kbd Ctrl Switch Switches between the Mute/Solo view and Keyboard Control view. 96 MODX M Operation Manual Mute (Part Mute) Solo (Part Solo) Switches Mute and Solo for the Part on or off. Settings: Off, On A/D Part EQ Tapping on the area calls up the context menu of Part EQ. Digital Part Reverb Send A/D Part Reverb Send Sets the level of the signals sent from the A/D Part or Digital Part to the Reverb Effect. Settings: 0–127 Digital Part Variation Send A/D Part Variation Send Sets the level of the signals sent from the A/D Part or Digital Part to the Variation Effect. Settings: 0–127 Digital Part Dry Level A/D Part Dry Level Sets the dry level (or the level of the signals without the System Effect) of the Digital Part or A/D Part. Settings: 0–127 Digital Part Pan A/D Part Pan Adjusts the Pan position (in the stereo field) of the Digital Part or A/D Part. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 Digital Part Volume A/D Part Volume USB Main Monitor Volume Sets the volume for the Audio Part. Settings: 0–127 Master EQ Shows the 5-band parametric EQ. Tapping on the area calls up the context menu for Master EQ Edit. Rev Return (Reverb Return) Var Return (Variation Return) Sets the output level (Return Level) of the signals processed by the Reverb or Variation Effect. Settings: 0–127 Rev Send (Reverb Send) Sets the level of the signals sent to the Reverb Effect. Settings: 0–127 Var Send (Variation Send) Sets the level of the signals sent to the Variation Effect. Settings: 0–127 97 MODX M Operation Manual Pan (Performance Pan) Sets the Pan position (in the stereo field) of the Performance. This parameter value offsets the Pan setting for each Part. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 Performance Volume Sets the volume for the Performance. Settings: 0–127 Part Level Meter Digi (Digital Part Level Meter) Main (USB Main Monitor Level Meter) AD (A/D Part Level Meter) Shows the level of Parts 1 to 8 and Audio Part. 98 MODX M Operation Manual Scene On the Scene screen, you can register the settings for the Arpeggio type, Motion Sequence type, and Part parameters to each of the SCENE buttons. On this screen, set the appropriate Memory (Memory Switch) On, and edit the desired parameter values so that you can save the settings to the Scene. NOTE The Scene function can be set from a screen other than Scene. You can change the assigned Scene parameters by moving the corresponding knobs and sliders and registering the settings by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the desired SCENE button. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Scene (1) (1) Scene Select Scene Select Select a Scene tab to register the settings. The Scene1 to Scene8 tabs are linked to the SCENE buttons on the top panel. Settings: 1–8 Memory (Memory Switch) Selects each of the parameter values such as Arpeggio, Motion Sequencer, Super knob, Super knob link, Mixing, Keyboard Control, Amplitude EG, and Arp/MS FX to register to the Scene. When these switches are set to Off, the parameter values will not be shown on the display even when the corresponding tabs are selected. Settings: Off, On Part 1–16 / Common Switches the view between Part1-16 and Common. Shown on the Mixing 1, Mixing 2, Kbd Ctrl, AEG, Arp/MS FX1, and Arp/MS FX2 tabs. Offset (Scene Mixing / AEG Value Mode Switch) By setting Offset to Off, some Scene parameters can be finely-adjusted. Shown on the Mixing 1, Mixing 2, and AEG tabs. Settings: Off (Absolute), On (Offset) 99 MODX M Operation Manual When the Memory Switch for Arp and Motion Seq are set to On Motion Seq Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch) Sets the Motion Sequencer on or off for the entire Performance. Settings: Off, On Motion Seq Select (Motion Sequence Select) Changes the Motion Sequence Selection. Settings: 1–8 Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Sets the Arpeggio on or off for the entire Performance. Settings: Off, On Arp Select (Arpeggio Select) Changes the Arpeggio selection. Settings: 1–8 When the Memory Switch for Super Knob and Link are set to On Super Knob (Super Knob Value) Sets the Super Knob value. Settings: 0–1023 Super Knob Link Sets the link between the Super Knob and Assignable Knob 1–8 on or off. When this switch is set to Off, operation of the Super Knob will not affect the parameters of the Assignable Knob. Settings: Off, On 100 MODX M Operation Manual When the Memory Switch for Mixing 1 and Mixing 2 are set to On „ Mixing 1 Part 1–16 View: Scene parameters for Part 1–16 are shown. Common View: Scene parameters for Part 1–8 and Common are shown. Common parameters are applied to the entire Performance. • Part 1–16 View Rev Send (Reverb Send) Sets the Reverb Send for each Part. Settings: 0–127 Var Send (Variation Send) Sets the Variation Send for each Part. Settings: 0–127 Dry Level Sets the Dry Level of each Part. Settings: 0–127 Pan Adjusts the Pan position (in the stereo field) for each Part. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 Volume (Part Volume) Sets the Volume for each Part. Settings: 0–127 • Common View Rev Return (Reverb Return) Sets the Reverb Return. Settings: 0–127 Var Return (Variation Return) Sets the Variation Return. Settings: 0–127 Pan (Performance Pan) Adjusts the Pan position (in the stereo field) of the Performance. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 101 MODX M Operation Manual „ Mixing 2 • Part 1-16 View When Offset is set to On Cutoff (Filter Cutoff Frequency) Sets the cutoff frequency for each Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Res (Filter Resonance/Width) Sets the filter resonance or filter width for each Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 FEG Depth Sets the FEG depth for each Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 When Offset is set to Off By setting Offset to Off, some Scene parameters can be finely-adjusted. Cutoff Settings: (AN-X, FM-X): 0–1023 Res Settings: (AN-X): 0–255 Settings: (FM-X): 0–127 FEG Depth Settings: (AN-X): −9600–+0–+9600 Settings: (FM-X): −64–+0–+63 NOTE It is recommended to set Offset to On when you wish to use both Smart Morph and Scene. Mute (Part Mute) Switches Mute for the Part on or off. Settings: Off, On Volume (Part Volume) Sets the volume for the Part. Settings: 0–127 • Common View Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency) Sets the offset value for the cutoff frequency of the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Res (Filter Resonance/Width) Sets the offset value for the filter resonance or filter width of the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 FEG Depth This is specified as an offset value to the Part FEG Depth. Settings: −64–+0–+63 102 MODX M Operation Manual When the Kbd Ctrl Memory Switch is set to On Kbd Ctrl (Part Keyboard Control Switch) Switches Keyboard Control for the Part on or off. When Keyboard Control for the Part is set to Off, no sound will be produced when you play the keyboard. Settings: Off (gray), On (green) 103 MODX M Operation Manual When the AEG Memory Switch is set to On • Part 1-16 View When Offset is set to On Attack (AEG Attack Time) Sets the AEG attack time for the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Decay (AEG Decay Time) Sets the AEG decay time for the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Sustain (AEG Sustain Level) Sets the AEG sustain level for the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Release (AEG Release Time) Sets the AEG release time for the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 When Offset is set to Off By setting Offset to Off, some Scene parameters can be finely-adjusted. Attack Settings: (AN-X): 0–255 Decay Settings: (AN-X): 0–255 Sustain Settings: (AN-X): 0–511 Release Settings: (AN-X): 0–255 • Common View Attack Sets the offset value to Attack (AEG Attack Time) for the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Decay Sets the offset value to Decay (AEG Decay Time) for the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Sustain Sets the offset value to Sustain (AEG Sustain Level) for the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Release Sets the offset value to Release (AEG Release Time) for the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 104 MODX M Operation Manual When the Memory Switch for Arp/MS FX 1 and Arp/MS FX 2 are set to On „ Arp/MS FX 1 • Part 1-16 View Swing Sets the swing value of the Arpeggio or Motion Sequencer for each Part. Settings: −120–+0–+120 Unit (Part Unit Multiply) Sets the percentage for stretching or compressing the playback time of the Arpeggio or Motion Sequencer for each Part. Settings: 50%–400%, Common 200%: The playback time is doubled, and the tempo is halved 100%: The playback time is kept unchanged 50%: The playback time is halved, and the tempo is doubled Common: The value set in the Unit (Common Unit Multiply) common to all Parts is applied Gate Time (Arp Gate Time Rate) Sets the Arpeggio gate time rate for each Part. Settings: 0%–200% Velocity (Arp Velocity Rate) Sets the Arpeggio velocity rate for each Part. Settings: 0%–200% • Common View Swing Sets the offset value to Swing for each Part. Settings: −120–+0–+120 Unit (Common Unit Multiply) Sets the Unit Multiply for all Parts. Settings: 50%–400% 200%: The playback time is doubled, and the tempo is halved 100%: The playback time is kept unchanged 50%: The playback time is halved, and the tempo is doubled Gate Time (Arp Gate Time Rate) Sets the offset value to Arpeggio Gate Time Rate for each Part. Settings: −100–+0–+100 Velocity (Arp Velocity Rate) Sets the offset value to Arpeggio Velocity Rate for each Part. Settings: −100–+0–+100 105 MODX M Operation Manual „ Arp/MS FX 2 • Part 1-16 View Amp (Motion Sequencer Amplitude Part Offset) Sets the offset value to Motion Sequencer Amplitude for each Part. Settings: −127–+0–+127 Shape (Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape Part Offset) Sets the offset value to Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape for each Part. Settings: −100–+0–+100 Smooth (Motion Sequencer Smoothness Part Offset) Sets the offset value to Motion Sequencer Smoothness for each Part. Settings: −127–+0–+127 Random (Motion Sequencer Randomness) Sets the offset value to Motion Sequencer Randomness for each Part. Settings: 0–127 • Common View Amp (Motion Sequencer Amplitude Performance Offset) Sets the offset value to Motion Sequencer Amplitude for all Parts. Settings: −127–+0–+127 Shape (Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape Performance Offset) Sets the offset value to Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape for all Parts. Settings: −100–+0–+100 Smooth (Motion Sequencer Smoothness Performance Offset) Sets the offset value to Motion Sequencer Smoothness for all Parts. Settings: −127–+0–+127 Random (Motion Sequencer Randomness Performance Offset) Sets the offset value to Motion Sequencer Randomness for all Parts. Settings: −127–+0–+127 106 MODX M Operation Manual Play/Rec On the Play/Rec screen, you can record Patterns and Songs to the Internal memory of this instrument, and Audio to a USB flash drive, and play back your recordings. Pattern „ Playback and playback standby Operation [SONG/PATTERN] button → Pattern [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern [  ] (Play) button → Pattern (1) (1) Link Icon Pattern Name Shows the name of the selected Pattern. Tap to display the context menu for Load, Rename, and New Pattern. You can select a Pattern by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons when the cursor is on the Pattern Name. Link Icon The Link Icon is shown if the Performance used for recording the Pattern and the selected Performance are the same. If not, a broken Link Icon will be shown. Performance Name Shows the name of the selected Performance. NOTE The blue flag will be shown at the top right of the Performance Name when you change a parameter in the Performance. Click Settings Opens the Tempo Settings screen. 107 MODX M Operation Manual Time Signature Shows the meter for the Pattern. Position Sets the position for starting playback and recording, as well as the current playback position. The number shown on the left is the measure, and the numbers shown on the right are the beats and ticks. Tempo Sets the tempo for Pattern playback. Settings: 5–300 Store Pattern & Perf Settings (Store Pattern and Performance Settings) Saves the link between the edited Patterns and the Performance used. NOTE If you have edited the Performance parameters, you will also need to store the Performance. Edit/Job Opens the screen for Pattern edit and jobs. By using the Pattern function, you can register a sequence for each Scene. Scene Shows the selected Scene number. This switch is linked to the SCENE buttons on the top panel. Length (Section Length) Sets the sequence length of the selected Scene. Settings: 1–256 Key On Start Sets the Pattern to start recording or playback the moment you press a key on the keyboard. Settings: Off, On Chain Enables chain playback. Settings: Off, On Undo *** Cancels the previous action and returns to the previous state. This button becomes available when one or more Jobs have been used after a sequence has been recorded. Redo *** Restores the action canceled using Undo. This button is only active after Undo *** has been used. Part 1–8 Part 9–16 Switches between Part views 108 MODX M Operation Manual „ Recording standby Operation [SONG/PATTERN] button → Pattern → [  ] (Record) button [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → [  ] (Record) button Time Signature Sets the meter of the Scene. Settings: 1/16–16/16, 1/8–16/8, 1/4–8/4 Rec Quantize (Record Quantize) Quantize is a function that corrects the recorded notes to be on the exact fraction of the beat (in note values). Settings: Off, 60 (thirty-second note), 80 (sixteenth note triplet), 120 (sixteenth note), 160 (eighth note triplet), 240 (eighth note), 320 (quarter note triplet), 480 (quarter note) Loop When set to On, Pattern recording continues in a loop. Settings: Off, On NOTE Pressing the [  ] (Record) button during Song recording sets the recorder to Rehearsal mode and makes the [  ] (Record) button flash. In Rehearsal mode, playback of the Pattern continues but recording is temporarily paused, making it useful for practicing. You can return to Recording mode by pressing the [  ] button again. 109 MODX M Operation Manual „ Recording Operation [SONG/PATTERN] button → Pattern → [  ] (Record) button → [  ] (Play) button [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → [  ] (Record) button → [  ] (Play) button Hold [SHIFT] + key to erase Erase You can delete specific note events by holding down the [SHIFT] button and pressing the key corresponding to the note you wish to delete. Alternately, you can tap on the Erase button on the screen to turn on the function, and then press the corresponding key on the keyboard to delete the note event. 110 MODX M Operation Manual „ Overdub recording When you operate a controller during overdub recording, you can delete the existing events of that controller and record the operation as new events. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → (with the Song already recorded) → [  ] (Record) button → Tap Record Type → Select Overdub from the menu → [  ] (Play) button Record Type Selects from Replace or Overdub recording. Settings: Replace, Overdub 111 MODX M Operation Manual Pattern Edit Overview Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Overview [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Overview Type Tap this button to see the Main and Sub categories of the Part. It also changes the list shown on the Play/Rec screen. Name Tap to see the Part Name. It also changes the list shown on the Play/Rec screen. Part Mute Icon Part Solo Icon Shows the status of mute and solo settings for the Part. Undo *** Cancels the previous action and returns to the previous state. This button becomes available when one or more Jobs have been used after a sequence has been recorded. Common operations for all tabs on the Pattern Edit screen. Redo *** Restores the recording that has been canceled by Undo. This button is only active after Undo *** has been used. Common operations for all tabs on the Pattern Edit screen. Scene Shows the selected Scene number. Save As .mid File Opens the Save screen. You can save the sequence of the selected Scene as a MIDI file. Load .mid File Opens the Load screen for loading a MIDI file. After you have selected a MIDI file, select a Pattern and Scene in the load location. Length Sets the sequence length of the selected Scene. Position Shows the current position for the Scene playback, and lets you specify the playback position. Settings: 001–256 112 MODX M Operation Manual Pattern Edit Note „ Quantize Quantization is the process of adjusting the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest exact beat. You can use this feature, for example, to improve the timing of a Pattern you have recorded in real time. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Note → Quantize [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Note → Quantize Track Specifies the track for the job. Settings: All, 1–16 Scene Specifies the Scene for the job. Settings: 1–8 Start Measure Specifies the starting measure position for the job. Settings: 001–257 Start Beat Specifies the starting beat position for the job. Settings: Depends on the Time Signature setting Start Clock Specifies the starting clock position for the job. Settings: Depends on the Time Signature setting 113 MODX M Operation Manual End Measure Specifies the ending measure position for the job. Settings: 001–257 End Beat Specifies the ending beat position for the job. Settings: Depends on the Time Signature setting End Clock Specifies the ending clock position for the job. Settings: Depends on the Time Signature setting Quantize Sets the quantization resolution (or a note to be used as a base for the quantization). Settings: Thirty-second note, sixteenth note triplet, sixteenth note, eighth note triplet, eighth note, quarter note triplet, quarter note, sixteenth note + sixteenth note triplet, eighth note + eighth note triplet Strength Sets the “magnetic strength” of the quantization. When this parameter is set to 100%, all notes will move to the position specified in Quantize while a setting of 0% results in no quantization. Settings: 0%–100% Swing Rate Changes the timing of the even-numbered beats (backbeats) counted from the value specified in Quantize to add a swing feel to the rhythms. Settings: Depends on the Quantize (quantization resolution) setting. When Quantize is set to quarter note, eighth note, sixteenth note, or thirty-second note: 0 to half the grid When Quantize is set to quarter note triplet, eighth note triplet, or sixteenth note triplet: 0 to half the grid When Quantize is set to eighth note + eighth note triplet, or sixteenth note + sixteenth note triplet: 0 to half the triplet grid Gate Time Changes the gate time (or the actual time for the note to be played) of the even-numbered beats (backbeats) counted from the value specified in Quantize to add a swing feel to the rhythms. Settings: 0%–200% Execute Carries out the selected Job to the MIDI sequence. Common operations for all tabs on the Pattern Edit screen. 114 MODX M Operation Manual „ Velocity Changes the sound strength (velocity) of the notes in the specified range. NOTE Velocity is modified using the following formula Adjusted Velocity = (Original Velocity × Rate) + Offset If the result is 0 or less, the value is set to 1. If the result is higher than 128, the value is set to 127. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Note → Velocity [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Note → Velocity Set All Sets the velocity of all notes in the selected section. When set to Off, Set All will not work. When set to anything other than Off, Rate and Offset will be disabled. Settings: Off, 001–127 Rate Sets the percentage for changing the velocity. When set to 99% or lower, the velocity will be slower. When set to 101% or higher, the velocity will be faster. At 100% the velocity will be kept unchanged. This parameter cannot be changed when Set All is set to anything other than Off. Settings: 0%–200% Offset Sets the value to add to or subtract from the original Velocity value. When set to −1 or smaller, the velocity will be slower. When set to +1 or larger, the velocity will be faster. When set to 0, the velocity will be kept unchanged. This parameter cannot be changed when Set All is set to anything other than Off. Settings: −127–0–+127 115 MODX M Operation Manual „ Gate Time Changes the sound time (gate time) of the notes in the specified range. NOTE Gate time is modified using the following formula Adjusted Gate Time = (Original Gate Time × Rate) + Offset If the result is 0 or lower, the value is set to 1. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Note → Gate Time [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Note → Gate Time This is the same as Pattern Edit Note → Velocity, except that the Set All setting values are different. Set All Settings: Off, 001–9999 116 MODX M Operation Manual „ Cresc. (Crescendo) Applies a gradual increase (crescendo) or decrease (decrescendo) of the velocity of notes in the specified range Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Note → Cresc. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Note → Cresc. Velocity Range Sets the intensity of the crescendo or decrescendo. Within the specified range, gradually increases or decreases the intermediate velocities so that the final velocity becomes the "Initial velocity value + Velocity Range value" based on the initial velocity. If the final velocity is 0 or lower, the final velocity is set to 1, and if it is 128 or higher, it is set to 127. A positive value produces a crescendo, and a negative value produces a decrescendo. At 0, there is no velocity change. Settings: −127–0–+127 117 MODX M Operation Manual „ Transpose This Job lets you change the key or pitch of the notes in the specified range. NOTE When transposed, notes set in the range beyond C–2 to G8 are automatically moved to fit within C–2 to G8. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Note → Transpose [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Note → Transpose Note Specifies the range of keys (notes) for transposing. Tap to open the context menu and then set the Keyboard to On so that you can use the keys on the keyboard. Settings: C−2–G8 Transpose Sets the range of notes to shift in semitones. A setting of +12 transposes up one octave, while a setting of −12 transposes down an octave. The value 0 produces no change. Settings: −127–0–+127 118 MODX M Operation Manual „ Roll This Job creates a series of repeated notes (like a drum roll) over the specified range. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Note → Roll [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Note → Roll Track Settings: 1–16 Start Step Sets the size of the step (i.e., the number of clocks) between each note in the roll. By setting a smaller value, you can play faster rolls. The clock specified here is for the beginning of the range. Settings: 015–999 End Step Sets the size of the step (i.e., the number of clocks) between each note in the roll. By setting a smaller value, you can play faster rolls. The clock specified here is for the end of the range. Settings: 015–999 Note Sets the notes for rolls. Tap to open the context menu and then set the Keyboard to On so that you can use the keys to set notes. Settings: C−2–G8 Start Velocity Sets the velocity for the strength of rolls. The velocity specified here is for the beginning of the range. Settings: 001–127 End Velocity Sets the velocity for the strength of rolls. The velocity specified here is for the end of the range. Settings: 001–127 NOTE By setting both Start Velocity and End Velocity, you can create crescendo or decrescendo for the rolls. 119 MODX M Operation Manual Pattern Edit Track „ Copy/Exchange This Job copies data from a specified source track to the specified destination track or exchanges data between two specified tracks. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Track → Copy/Exchange [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Track → Copy/Exchange Copy Copies data from the specified track to another track. NOTICE When Copy Track is carried out, the existing data on the destination track will be overwritten and lost. Exchange Exchanges data between two tracks. Pattern Name *Source Specifies the Pattern to copy from. Track *Source Specifies the track to copy from. Settings: All, 1–16 Scene *Source Specifies the Scene to copy from. Settings: All, 1–8 Pattern Name *Destination Specifies the Pattern to copy to. Track *Destination Specifies the track to copy to. This parameter is not available when Source is set to All. Settings: 1–16 Scene *Destination Specifies the Scene to copy to. This parameter is not available when Source is set to All. Settings: 1–8 Copy Track Executes a copy action. NOTE When Copy Track is carried out with the Track and Scene set to All, the Chain data will also be copied. Exchange Track Executes an exchange. NOTE When Exchange Track is carried out with the Track and Scene set to All, the Chain data will also be copied. 120 MODX M Operation Manual „ Mix Mixes (merges) the data from the specified track A and track B and places the result in track B. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Track → Mix [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Track → Mix Pattern Name *Source A Specifies the first Pattern to mix. Track *Source A Specifies the track for the job. Settings: 1–16 Scene *Source A Specifies the Scene for the job. Settings: All, 1–8 Pattern Name *Source B Specifies the first Pattern to mix. Track *Source B Specifies the track for the job. Settings: 1–16 Scene *Source B Specifies the Scene for the job. This parameter is not available when Source A is set to All. Settings: 1–8 Pattern Name *Destination B Shows the name of the Pattern to mix to. Track *Destination B Shows the track number for the job. Scene *Destination B Shows the Scene number for the job. This parameter is not available when Source A is set to All. Mix Track Executes a mix action. 121 MODX M Operation Manual „ Append Adds the data in the specified track to the end of another track. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Track → Append [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Track → Append Pattern Name *Source Specifies the Pattern to add from. Track *Source Sets the target track for the job. Settings: All, 1–16 Scene *Source Specifies the Scene for the job. Settings: 1–8 Pattern Name *Destination Specifies the Pattern to add to. Track *Destination Sets the target track for the job. This parameter is not available when Source is set to All. Settings: 1–16 Scene *Destination Specifies the Scene for the job. Settings: 1–8 Append Track Executes an append action. 122 MODX M Operation Manual „ Split Splits the data of the specified track at the specified measure and moves the second half to another specified track. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Track → Split [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Track → Split Pattern Name *Source Specifies the Pattern to split. Track *Source Sets the target track for the job. Settings: All, 1–16 Scene *Source Sets the target scene for the job. Settings: 1–8 Measure *Source Specifies the measure at which the data is to be split. Settings: 2–256 Pattern Name Shows the Pattern to split into. Track Shows the track for the job. Scene Shows the Scene for the job. Pattern Name *Destination Specifies the Pattern to which the split data is to be sent. Track *Destination Sets the target track for the job. This parameter is not available when Source is set to All. Settings: 1–16 Scene *Destination Sets the target scene for the job. Settings: 1–8 Split Track Executes a split action. 123 MODX M Operation Manual „ Clear Deletes data of the specified track. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Track → Clear [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Track → Clear Pattern Name Specifies the pattern to delete. Track Specifies the track for the job. Settings: All, 1–16 Scene Specifies the Scene for the job. Settings: All, 1–8 Clear Track Executes a clear action. NOTE When Clear Track is carried out with the Track and Scene set to All, the Chain data will also be deleted. 124 MODX M Operation Manual „ Divide Drum Tr (Divide Drum Track) Takes the recorded drums from the specified track and assigns each Instrument (individual percussion instrument in the drum set) to Tracks 9 to 16. NOTE When there is existing data on Tracks 9 to 16 and Parts 9 to 16, carrying out the Divide Drum Track operation will overwrite the existing data. Undo and Redo cannot be used with this operation. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Track → Divide Drum Tr [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Track → Divide Drum Tr Pattern Name Sets the target pattern for the job. Track Sets the target track for the job. Settings: 1–16 Divide Drum Track Executes a drum track divide action. 125 MODX M Operation Manual Pattern Edit Song/Event „ Get Phrase Copies a specific section of the Song to the specified track. NOTICE The data at the copy destination will be overwritten and lost. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Song/Event → Get Phrase [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Song/Event → Get Phrase Song Name Specifies the Song to copy from. Track *Source Sets the target track for the job. Settings: All, 1–16 Start Measure Sets the target starting measure for the job. Settings: 001–998 End Measure Sets the target ending measure for the job. Settings: 002–999 Pattern Name Specifies the Pattern to copy to. Track *Destination Specifies the track to copy to. This parameter is not available when Source is set to All. Settings: 1–16 Scene Specifies the Scene to copy to. Settings: 1–8 Get Phrase from Song Copies a phrase. 126 MODX M Operation Manual „ Put Phrase Copies the specified measures of the specified Pattern track to the specified Song track. NOTE The copied data will be merged into the existing data on the destination track. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Song/Event → Put Phrase [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Song/Event → Put Phrase Pattern Name Specifies the Pattern to copy from. Track *Source Sets the target track for the job. Settings: 1–16 Scene Sets the target scene for the job. Settings: 1–8 Song Name Specifies the Song to copy to. Track *Destination Sets the target track for the job. Settings: 1–16 Measure Specifies the measure to copy to. Settings: 001–999 Put Phrase to Song Copies a phrase. 127 MODX M Operation Manual „ Erase Event Erases the event. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Song/Event → Erase Event [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Song/Event → Erase Event Many of the parameters are the same as Pattern Edit Note → Quantize. Auto Select Switches the Auto Select setting of the Event Type on or off. When this is set to On, you can simply move the controller whose data you wish to erase, and the corresponding controller’s event will automatically be set for Event Type. Settings: Off, On Event Type Specifies the type of event you wish to erase. Settings: Note, Poly, CC, NRPN, RPN, PC, AfterTouch, PitchBend, Superknob, SysEx, All CC Number Displayed when the Event Type is set to CC. Specify the Control Change number of the event to erase. Settings: All, 1–127 Erase Event Executes the event deletion. 128 MODX M Operation Manual „ User Arp (User Arpeggio) Registers the data in the specified measures of the Scene as a User Arpeggio. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Song/Event → User Arp [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Song/Event → User Arp Scene Specifies the Scene for the job. Settings: 1–8 Start Measure Specifies the starting measure position for the job. Settings: 1–256 End Measure Specifies the ending measure position for the job. Settings: 2–257 Arp (Arp Number) Sets the Arpeggio Number of the User Arpeggio for conversion. Initially, the next unused number will be set. Keep in mind that if you change this to a number already being used, the Arpeggio will be overwritten, meaning that you will lose the existing User Arpeggio for that number. Settings: 1–256 Category (Arpeggio Category) Sub Category (Arpeggio Sub Category) Sets the Main and Sub categories of the converted Arpeggio. Settings: Refer to the Data List Name (Arpeggio Name) Give the User Arpeggio a name. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Track Sets the track number to convert from for each Arpeggio track. Settings: Off, 1–16 129 MODX M Operation Manual Convert Type Select the method for converting MIDI sequence data recorded in the track into an arpeggio. You can use a different Convert Type for each Arpeggio track. Settings: Normal, Fixed, Org Notes Normal: The Arpeggio is played back at the same octave as the recorded MIDI Sequence. Fixed: The recorded MIDI sequence is played back the same way no matter how you play the keyboard. Org Notes: Basically the same as Fixed, but the MIDI sequence changes according to the chords you play on the keyboard Org Notes Root Sets the root note when the Convert Type of any track is set to Org Notes. This parameter is not available when no track is set to Org Notes. Settings: C−2–G8 Store As User Arp (Store As User Arpeggio) Converts the Pattern to a User Arpeggio using the settings on the screen. This parameter is not available when all Track are set to Off. 130 MODX M Operation Manual Pattern Edit Play FX (Play Effects) Applies effects to the MIDI sequence during Pattern playback. Sets the range and level of the effect for each parameter of the specified track. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Play FX [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Play FX „ Common Track Specifies the track to be normalized. Settings: All, 1–16 Scene Specifies the Scene to be normalized. Settings: All, 1–8 Normalize Play FX Fixes the effect specified in Play FX to the MIDI data. Length Sets the sequence length of the selected Scene. Position Shows the current position for the Scene playback, and lets you specify the playback position. Settings: 001–256 131 MODX M Operation Manual „ Play FX1 Controls Qntz Value, Qntz Str, Swing Vel, Swing Gate, and Swing Rate. Qntz Value (Quantize Value) Sets the quantization resolution (or a note to be used as a base for the quantization). Settings: Off, 60 (thirty-second note), 80 (sixteenth note triplet), 120 (sixteenth note), 160 (eighth note triplet), 240 (eighth note), 320 (quarter note triplet), 480 (quarter note) Qntz Str (Quantize Strength) Sets the “magnetic strength” of the quantization. When this parameter is set to 100%, all notes will move to the position specified in Qntz Value (Quantize Value) while a setting of 0% results in no quantization. Settings: 0%–100% Swing Vel (Swing Velocity Rate) Changes the velocity of the even-numbered beats (backbeats) counted from the value specified in Qntz Value (Quantize Value) to add a swing feel to the rhythms. This parameter is not available when Qntz Value (Quantize Value) is set to Off. Settings: 0%–200% Swing Gate (Swing Gate Time Rate) Changes the gate time (or the actual time for the note to be played) of the even-numbered beats (backbeats) counted from the value specified in Qntz Value (Quantize Value) to add a swing feel to the rhythms. This parameter is not available when Qntz Value (Quantize Value) is set to Off. Settings: 0%–200% Swing Rate (Swing Offset) Changes the timing of the even-numbered beats (backbeats) counted from the value specified in Qntz Value (Quantize Value) to add a swing feel to the rhythms. This parameter is not available when Qntz Value (Quantize Value) is set to Off. Settings: 0 to half of Qntz Value (Quantize Value) 132 MODX M Operation Manual „ Play FX2 Controls Note Shift, Clock Shift, Gate Time, Velocity Rate, and Velocity Offset. Note Shift Adjusts the pitch in semitones. Settings: −99–+0–+99 Clock Shift Shifts the timing of the notes back or forward in clock increments. Settings: −120–+0–+120 Gate Time Changes the gate time (the actual time for the sound of the note to be generated) of the note events. Settings: 0%–200% Velocity Rate Changes the velocity by the specified percentage. Settings: 0%–200% Velocity Offset Increases or decreases velocity by the specified value. Settings: −99–+0–+99 133 MODX M Operation Manual Pattern Edit Chain This Job chains Scenes for playback. Operation [  ] (Play) button → Pattern → [EDIT/ ] → Chain [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Pattern → Edit/Job → Chain Chain Enables chain playback. Settings: Off, On Measure Specifies the starting measure position for Scene playback. Settings: 001–999 Scene Sets the Scene to play back at the specified Measure. Settings: 1–8, End Page When there are more than eight rows for the list of Measure and Scene, the up or down arrow will be shown. Convert to Song Saves the chain as a Song. Length Shows the length of the entire sequence. Position Shows the current position of chain playback, and lets you specify the playback position. Settings: 001–999 134 MODX M Operation Manual Song In the Song screen, you can record your keyboard performance in MIDI Song, and play back the Song. The data of both the keyboard performance and the operation of controllers and knobs is recorded to the MIDI track. You can also select Arpeggio playback to be recorded to the Song. „ Playback and playback standby Operation [SONG/PATTERN] button → Song [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Song [  ] (Play) button → Song (1) (2) (3) (1) Link Icon (2) Song Length (3) Track Play Switch Song Name Shows the name of the selected Song. Tap to display the context menu for Load, Rename, New Song, and User Arp. You can select a Song by using the [INC/YES] and [DEC/NO] buttons when the cursor is on the Song Name. Performance Name Shows the name of the selected Performance. NOTE The blue flag will be shown at the top right of the Performance Name when you change a parameter in the Performance. Link Icon The Link Icon is shown if the Performance used for recording the Song and the selected Performance are the same. If not, a broken Link Icon will be shown. Click Settings This calls up the Tempo Settings screen. Time Signature Shows the meter for the Pattern. 135 MODX M Operation Manual Position Sets the position for starting playback and recording, as well as the current playback position. The number shown on the left is the measure, and the numbers shown on the right are the beats and ticks. Tempo Sets the tempo for Song playback. Settings: 5–300 Loop Sets Loop playback on or off. When set to On, the playback of a section between the Loop Start and Loop End points will be repeated. Settings: Off, On Loop Start Loop End Sets the section for Loop playback. The number shown on the left is the measure, and the number shown on the right is the beat. This parameter is not available when Loop is set to Off. Store Song & Perf Settings (Store Song and Performance Settings) Saves the link between the edited Songs and the Performance used. NOTE If you have edited the Performance parameters, you will also need to store the Performance. Save As .mid File Pressing this button calls up the Save screen, allowing you to save the Song as a file. Not available in the following situations. • For a new recording (when there is no Song) • During playback • When recording standby is enabled • During recording Song Length Shows the length of the entire sequence. Track Play Switch Turns playback of each track on or off. Settings: Off, On 136 MODX M Operation Manual „ Recording and recording standby Operation [SONG/PATTERN] button → Song → [  ] (Record) button [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Song → [  ] (Record) button New recording When something has already been recorded Time Signature Shows the meter for the Song. Settings: 1/16–16/16, 1/8–16/8, 1/4–8/4 Rec Quantize Quantize is a function that corrects the recorded notes to be on the exact fraction of the beat (in note values). Settings: Off, 60 (thirty-second note), 80 (sixteenth note triplet), 120 (sixteenth note), 160 (eighth note triplet), 240 (eighth note), 320 (quarter note triplet), 480 (quarter note) 137 MODX M Operation Manual Record Type Selects a record type for the tracks already recorded. This parameter is not available for a new recording. Settings: Replace, Overdub, Punch Replace: Overwrite and record in real-time. The existing data will be lost Overdub: Overdub and record in real-time. The existing data will not be lost Punch: Re-record a section and record in real-time. This overwrites the existing data of a specified section Punch In Sets the Punch in point (specific measure and beat at which to start re-recording). This parameter is available only when Record Type is set to Punch. Punch Out Sets the Punch out point (specific measure and beat at which to end re-recording). This parameter is available only when Record Type is set to Punch. Arp Rec When set to On, the results of Arpeggio playback are recorded. When set to Off, only the keyboard performance is recorded. This parameter can be set for recording a new Song. The setting cannot be changed after the recording. To add something to the Song recorded with Arp Rec set to Off, only Replace can be used for Record Type. Settings: Off, On NOTE With the Song with Arp Rec set to Off, you can select a different Arpeggio for playback by changing the Arpeggio selection in the Performance. Undo Media Record Cancels the previous action and returns to the previous state. This button becomes available when one or more Jobs have been used after a sequence has been recorded. Redo Media Record Restores the recording that has been canceled by Undo Media Record. Enabled when Undo Media Record was used. 138 MODX M Operation Manual Put Track to Arpeggio Converts the selected Song to a User Arpeggio. Up to 16 different notes can be converted. (All notes with the same Note Number are counted as one.) Make sure to use only up to 16 notes for a Song if you wish to convert it to a User Arpeggio, especially when you use multiple tracks. Operation [SONG/PATTERN] button → Tap on Play/Rec → Song → Song Name to open the context menu → User Arp Arp (Arpeggio Number) Sets the Arpeggio Number of the User Arpeggio for conversion. Initially, the next unused number will be set. Keep in mind that if you change this to a number already being used, the Arpeggio will be overwritten, meaning that you will lose the existing User Arpeggio for that number. Settings: 1–256 Category (Arpeggio Category) Sub Category (Arpeggio Sub Category) Sets the Main and Sub categories of the converted Arpeggio. Settings: Refer to the Data List Name (Arpeggio Name) Sets the Arpeggio Name. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Song Track Sets the track number of the Song to convert from for each Arpeggio track. Settings: Off, 1–16 139 MODX M Operation Manual Convert Type Selects how to convert the MIDI sequence recorded in the Song to the Arpeggio from three different settings. You can use a different Convert Type for each Arpeggio track. Settings: Normal, Fixed, Org Notes Normal: The Arpeggio is played back at the same octave as the recorded MIDI Sequence Fixed: The recorded MIDI sequence is played back the same way no matter how you play the keyboard. Org Notes: Basically the same as Fixed, but the playback of the MIDI sequence changes according to the chords you play on the keyboard Org Notes Root (Original Notes Root) Sets the root note when the Convert Type of any track is set to Org Notes. This parameter is not available when no track is set to Org Notes. Settings: C−2–G8 Start Measure Sets the starting measure for the conversion. Settings: 1–998 End Measure Sets the ending measure for the conversion. Settings: 2–999 Store As User Arp Converts the Song to a User Arpeggio with the settings specified on this screen. This button is disabled when all tracks are set to Off. 140 MODX M Operation Manual Audio On the Audio screen, you can record your keyboard performance as an audio file .wav (44.1-kHz, 24-bit stereo) to the USB flash drive. The maximum recording time is 74 minutes, or up to the capacity of the recording device. „ Playback and playback standby Operation [SONG/PATTERN] button → Audio [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Audio [  ] (Play) button → Audio Audio Name Shows the name of the selected Audio file. Tap to display the context menu for Load. Position Sets the position for starting playback, as well as the current playback position. Audio Volume Sets the position for starting playback. This parameter is not available during recording. Settings: 0–255 Audio Length Shows the total length of the audio file. Level meter Shows the audio input and output level. 141 MODX M Operation Manual „ Recording and recording standby Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Play/Rec → Audio → [  ] (Record) button Recordable (Audio Recordable Time) Shows the recordable time for audio. This parameter is shown only while recording standby is enabled. Trigger Level Selects how to start recording. This parameter is shown only while recording standby is enabled. Settings: manual, 1–127 manual: Press the [  ] (Play) button to start recording 1–127: After pressing the [  ] (Play) button, recording will start when a signal exceeding the set value is input. The level set here will be indicated by blue triangles in the level meter NOTE For best results, set Trigger Level as low as possible to capture the entire signal, but not so low as to record unwanted noise. 142 MODX M Operation Manual Smart Morph Play Tap on the Smart Morph map, and create changes in the FM-X sound or AN-X sound on Part 1. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Smart Morph → Play 143 MODX M Operation Manual Edit Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Smart Morph → Edit Unused Part Tap to open the Part Category Search screen for selecting an FM-X sound or AN-X sound. Part being used Tap to display the context menu for Category Search, Edit, Property, etc. Display Selects the Part Main Category view or Part Name view for each Part. Mode Switches between FM-X and AN-X. Settings: FM-X, AN-X Learn Tap the button to start machine learning (map creation). This button will not be shown when there is no FM-X sound or AN-X sound on Parts 9 to 16. Undo Redo After the Learn operation, the Undo button will be shown on the upper right. Use the Undo button to restore the original map before using machine learning. After the Undo operation, the Redo button will appear, and you can use it to restore the map before the Undo operation. 144 MODX M Operation Manual Analyze Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Smart Morph → Analyze Red Each dot on the map represents the parameter value indicating a degree or level as a shade of red. Green Each dot on the map represents the parameter value indicating a degree or level as a shade of green. Blue Each dot on the map represents the parameter value indicating a degree or level as a shade of blue. NOTE For the list of available Red, Green, and Blue parameters, see "Parameters that can be set for Red, Green, and Blue." Coloring When set to Auto, the Red, Green, and Blue are automatically reset for the Learn process. When set to Manual, the Red, Green, and Blue are not automatically reset for the Learn process. Settings: Auto, Manual Learn Tap the button to start machine learning (map creation). Undo Redo After the Learn operation, the Undo button will be shown on the upper right. Use the Undo button to restore the original map before using machine learning. After the Undo operation, the Redo button will appear, and you can use it to restore the map before the Undo operation. 145 MODX M Operation Manual „ Parameters that can be set for Red, Green, and Blue • FM Common Display Name Parameter Name Random Pan Depth Random Pan Depth Alternate Pan Alternate Pan Depth Scaling Pan Depth Scaling Pan Depth KeyOnDly Time Key On Delay Time Length KeyOnDly Sync Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch KeyOnDly Note Key On Delay Note Length Pitch/Vel Pitch Velocity Sensitivity Random Pitch Depth Random Pitch Depth Pitch/Key Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Pitch/Key Center Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Note PEG Initial Lvl PEG Initial Level PEG Attack Lvl PEG Attack Level PEG Decay 1 Lvl PEG Decay 1 Level PEG Decay 2 Lvl PEG Decay 2 Level PEG Release Lvl PEG Release Level PEG Attack Tm PEG Attack Time PEG Decay 1 Tm PEG Decay 1 Time PEG Decay 2 Tm PEG Decay 2 Time PEG Release Tm PEG Release Time PEG Depth/Vel PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity PEG Depth PEG Depth PEG Time/Key PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity 2nd LFO Wave 2nd LFO Wave LFO Speed 2nd LFO Speed LFO Phase 2nd LFO Phase LFO Delay 2nd LFO Delay Time LFO Key On Reset 2nd LFO Key On Reset LFO Pitch Mod 2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth LFO Amp Mod 2nd LFO Amp Modulation Depth LFO Filter Mod 2nd LFO Filter Modulation Depth Algorithm Number Algorithm Number Feedback Level Feedback Level LFO Speed Range LFO Speed Range LFO Ex Speed LFO Extended Speed Filter Type Filter Type Cutoff Filter Cutoff Frequency Cutoff/Vel Filter Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity Resonance / Width Filter Resonance/Width Res/Vel Resonance Velocity Sensitivity HPF Cutoff HPF Cutoff Frequency Distance Distance Filter Gain Filter Gain FEG Hold Tm FEG Hold Time 146 MODX M Operation Manual Display Name Parameter Name FEG Attack Tm FEG Attack Time FEG Decay 1 Tm FEG Decay 1 Time FEG Decay 2 Tm FEG Decay 2 Time FEG Release Tm FEG Release Time FEG Hold Lvl FEG Hold Level FEG Attack Lvl FEG Attack Level FEG Decay 1 Lvl FEG Decay 1 Level FEG Decay 2 Lvl FEG Decay 2 Level FEG Release Lvl FEG Release Level FEG Depth FEG Depth FEG Segment FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment FEG Time/Vel FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity FEG Depth/Vel FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity FEG Curve FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve FEG Time/Key FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity FEG Center FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Note Flt Cutoff/Key Filter Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity Flt Break Point 1 Filter Cutoff Scaling Break Point 1 Flt Break Point 2 Filter Cutoff Scaling Break Point 2 Flt Break Point 3 Filter Cutoff Scaling Break Point 3 Flt Break Point 4 Filter Cutoff Scaling Break Point 4 Flt Cutoff Offset 1 Filter Cutoff Scaling Offset 1 Flt Cutoff Offset 2 Filter Cutoff Scaling Offset 2 Flt Cutoff Offset 3 Filter Cutoff Scaling Offset 3 Flt Cutoff Offset 4 Filter Cutoff Scaling Offset 4 HPF Cutoff/Key HPF Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity • Operator Display Name Parameter Name Key On Reset Oscillator Key On Reset Freq Mode Oscillator Frequency Mode Coarse Tune Coarse Fine Tune Fine Detune Detune Pitch/Key Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Pitch/Vel Pitch Velocity Sensitivity Spectral Spectral Form Skirt Spectral Skirt Resonance Spectral Resonance PEG Initial Lvl PEG Initial Level PEG Attack Lvl PEG Attack Level PEG Attack Tm PEG Attack Time PEG Decay Tm PEG Decay Time AEG Attack Lvl AEG Attack Level AEG Decay 1 Lvl AEG Decay 1 Level 147 MODX M Operation Manual Display Name Parameter Name AEG Decay 2 Lvl AEG Decay 2 Level AEG Release Lvl AEG Release (Hold) Level AEG Attack Tm AEG Attack Time AEG Decay 1 Tm AEG Decay 1 Time AEG Decay 2 Tm AEG Decay 2 Time AEG Release Tm AEG Release Time AEG Hold Tm AEG Hold Time AEG Time/Key AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Level Operator Level Lvl Break Point Level Scaling Break Point Lvl/Key Lo Level Scaling Low Depth Lvl/Key Hi Level Scaling High Depth Curve Lo Level Scaling Low Curve Curve Hi Level Scaling High Curve Level/Vel Level Velocity Sensitivity LFO PM Depth 2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth Offset LFO AM Depth 2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth Offset Pitch/Ctrl Pitch Controller Sensitivity Level/Ctrl Level Controller Sensitivity • AN-X Common Display Name Parameter Name Random Pan Random Pan Depth Alternate Pan Alternate Pan Depth Scaling Pan Scaling Pan Depth Delay Length Key On Delay Time Length KeyOnDly Sync Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch Delay Length Key On Delay Note Length Unison Unison Unison Detune Unison Detune Unison Spread Unison Spread OSC Reset OSC Reset Voltage Drift Voltage Drift Ageing Ageing Attack Pitch EG Attack Time Decay Pitch EG Decay Time Sustain Pitch EG Sustain Level Release Pitch EG Release Time Time/Vel Pitch EG Time Velocity Sensitivity Wave Pitch LFO Wave Speed Pitch LFO Speed Key On Reset Pitch LFO Key On Reset Phase Pitch LFO Phase Delay Pitch LFO Delay Time Fade In Pitch LFO Fade In Time 148 MODX M Operation Manual Display Name Parameter Name Noise Tone Noise Generator Tone Connect Noise Generator Out Select Out Level Noise Generator Out Level Out Level/Vel Noise Generator Out Level Velocity Sensitivity Attack Filter Cutoff EG Attack Time Decay Filter Cutoff EG Decay Time Sustain Filter Cutoff EG Sustain Level Release Filter Cutoff EG Release Time Time/Vel Filter Cutoff EG Time Velocity Sensitivity Wave Filter Cutoff LFO Wave Speed Filter Cutoff LFO Speed Key On Reset Filter Cutoff LFO Key On Reset Phase Filter Cutoff LFO Phase Delay Filter Cutoff LFO Delay Time Fade In Filter Cutoff LFO Fade In Time Level Amplitude Level Level/Vel Amplitude Level Velocity Sensitivity LFO Depth Amplitude Level LFO Depth Level/Key Amplitude Level Key Follow Drive Amplitude Saturator Drive Attack Amplitude EG Attack Time Decay Amplitude EG Decay Time Sustain Amplitude EG Sustain Level Release Amplitude EG Release Time Time/Vel Amplitude EG Time Velocity Sensitivity Wave Amplitude LFO Wave Speed Amplitude LFO Speed Key On Reset Amplitude LFO Key On Reset Phase Amplitude LFO Phase Delay Amplitude LFO Delay Time Fade In Amplitude LFO Fade In Time 149 MODX M Operation Manual • Oscillator Display Name Parameter Name Wave Oscillator Wave Octave Oscillator Octave Pitch Oscillator Pitch Pitch EG Depth Oscillator Pitch EG Depth Pitch EG Depth/Vel Oscillator Pitch EG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Pitch LFO Depth Oscillator Pitch LFO Depth Sync Pitch Oscillator Self Sync Pitch Sync Pitch/Vel Oscillator Self Sync Pitch Velocity Sensitivity Sync Oscillator Self Sync EG Depth Sync Oscillator Self Sync LFO Depth Pulse Width Oscillator Pulse Width PulseWidth/Vel Oscillator Pulse Width Velocity Sensitivity Pulse Width Oscillator Pulse Width EG Depth Pulse Width Oscillator Pulse Width LFO Depth Shaper Oscillator Wave Shaper Shaper/Vel Oscillator Wave Shaper Velocity Sensitivity Shaper Oscillator Wave Shaper EG Depth Shaper Oscillator Wave Shaper LFO Depth FM Level Oscillator FM Level FM Level/Vel Oscillator FM Level Velocity Sensitivity Ring Level Oscillator Ring Level Ring Level/Vel Oscillator Ring Level Velocity Sensitivity Connect Oscillator Out Select Invert Oscillator Out Invert Enable Out Level Oscillator Out Level Out Level/Vel Oscillator Out Level Velocity Sensitivity Attack Oscillator EG Attack Time Decay Oscillator EG Decay Time Sustain Oscillator EG Sustain Level Release Oscillator EG Release Time Wave Oscillator LFO Wave Speed Oscillator LFO Speed Key On Reset Oscillator LFO Key On Reset Phase Oscillator LFO Phase Delay Oscillator LFO Delay Time Fade In Oscillator LFO Fade In Time 150 MODX M Operation Manual • Filter Display Name Parameter Name Type Filter Type Cutoff Filter Cutoff Cutoff/Vel Filter Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity Filter EG Depth Filter Cutoff EG Depth Filter EG Depth/Vel Filter Cutoff EG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Filter LFO Depth Filter Cutoff LFO Depth Cutoff/Key Filter Cutoff Key Follow Resonance Filter Resonance Resonance/Vel Filter Resonance Velocity Sensitivity Saturator Drive Filter Saturator Drive Saturator Drive/... Filter Saturator Drive Velocity Sensitivity Out Level Filter Out Level • Modifier Display Name Parameter Name Wave Folder Modifier Wave Folder Folder/Vel Modifier Wave Folder Velocity Sensitivity EG Depth Modifier Wave Folder EG Depth LFO Depth Modifier Wave Folder LFO Depth Texture Modifier Wave Folder Texture Type Modifier Wave Folder Type Attack Modifier EG Attack Time Decay Modifier EG Decay Time Sustain Modifier EG Sustain Level Release Modifier EG Release Time Time/Vel Modifier EG Time Velocity Sensitivity Wave Modifier LFO Wave Speed Modifier LFO Speed Key On Reset Modifier LFO Key On Reset Phase Modifier LFO Phase Delay Modifier LFO Delay Time Fade In Modifier LFO Fade In Time 151 MODX M Operation Manual Super Knob Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Smart Morph → Super Knob Super Knob Link When set to On, you can use the Super Knob for following the path on the map from start to end, instead of running your finger across the touchscreen. Settings: Off, On Start Sets the position of the smallest Super Knob value on the map. When the cursor is on Start, tap on the map to set the value for the starting point. End Sets the position of the largest Super Knob value on the map. When the cursor is on End, tap on the map to set the value of the ending point. Waypoints Sets the number of interspersed points (waypoints) between the start and end. Settings: 0–6 Waypoint 1–Waypoint 6 Sets the position on the map. 152 MODX M Operation Manual Job Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Smart Morph → Job Load Smart Morph Opens the Load screen. On the Load screen, you can select another Performance and import the Smart Morph settings from that Performance to the current Performance. Delete Smart Morph Deletes the Smart Morph settings from the selected Performance. Delete Part 9–16 Deletes all Parts 9 to 16 at once to make these Parts unused. Parts 9 to 16 are used for creating a Smart Morph map. When you are finished adjusting the parameters and you no longer need to use the map, you can delete Parts 9 to 16. 153 MODX M Operation Manual Common Edit Screens On the Common Edit screen, you can edit the parameters for the entire Performance as well as the parameters for the Audio Part. General/Pitch Perf Settings On the Perf Settings screen, you can set general parameters for the Performance. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Perf Settings Main Category Sub Category Sets the Main category and Sub category of the selected Performance. Settings: Refer to the Data List Performance Name Names the currently selected Performance. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Volume (Performance Volume) Sets the volume of the selected Performance. Settings: 0–127 Pan (Performance Pan) Adjusts the Pan position (stereo position) of the currently selected Performance. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 154 MODX M Operation Manual Var Return (Variation Return) Sets the output level (Return Level) of the signals processed by the Variation Effect. Settings: 0–127 Rev Return (Reverb Return) Sets the output level (Return Level) of the signals processed by the Reverb Effect. Settings: 0–127 MC Flag (Motion Control Flag) Sets an MC (Motion Control) flag to the currently selected Performance. When set to On, the MC flag appears on the Performance screen (HOME), and filtering will be performed by the MC attribute on the Performance Category Search screen. Settings: Off, On Portamento Master Sw (Portamento Master Switch) Sets Portamento on or off for Parts having the Portamento Part Sw set to On. This switch is linked to the [PORTAMENTO] button on the top panel. Settings: Off, On Portamento Time Sets the time length (or speed) for the pitch transition of Portamento for the Part. This is specified as an offset value to the Part Portamento time. Settings: −64–+0–+63 155 MODX M Operation Manual USB Monitor Adjusts the volume of the audio signal input from the USB [TO HOST] terminal on the USB Monitor screen. When you tap on the USB Volume in the Audio Signal Flow, the cursor moves on the Audio I/O screen to the USB Volume. NOTE USB Main Monitor Volume is saved (stored) in the Performance. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → USB Monitor Monitor Volume Main Adjusts the volume of the audio signals input from the USB [TO HOST] terminal and output to the OUTPUT jacks. Settings: 0–127 Audio Settings Tap to open the Utility Audio I/O screen. The same screen can be opened from [UTILITY] → Settings → Audio I/O. 156 MODX M Operation Manual Pitch On the Pitch screen, you can make pitch settings. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Pitch [SHIFT] + [PORTAMENTO] „ Note Shift / Detune Part Switches the view between Part 1-8 and Part 9-16. Detune Adjusts the pitch of the Part in 0.1 Hz increments. By slightly shifting the pitch, you can detune the sound. Settings: −12.8Hz–+0.0Hz–+12.7Hz Shift (Note Shift) Adjusts the pitch of the Part in semitones. Settings: −24–+0–+24 Perf Note Shift (Performance Note Shift) Adjusts the pitch of all Parts in semitones. Settings: −24–+0–+24 157 MODX M Operation Manual „ Pitch Bend / Mono Mono / Poly will not be shown for the Drum Part. Edit Control Assign The Common Edit Control Assign screen will open. Group (Pitch Control Group) Parts assigned to the same group are given the same pitch. This is convenient when you wish to apply Portamento to a layered sound or have the same micro-tuning settings for multiple Parts at once. Lower (Pitch Bend Lower) Upper (Pitch Bend Upper) Sets the range of the changes created with the pitch bend wheel in semitones. Settings: −48–+0–+24 Mono / Poly Sets the tone generation mode for the keyboard. Mono is for playing single notes, and Poly is for playing multiple simultaneous notes. Settings: Mono, Poly 158 MODX M Operation Manual „ Portamento Sw, Mode, Time, and Time Mode will not be shown for the Drum Part. Master Sw (Portamento Master Switch) Sets Portamento on or off for Parts having the Sw (Portamento Part Switch) set to On. This switch is linked to the [PORTAMENTO] button on the top panel. Settings: Off, On Time (Portamento Time) Sets the time length (or speed) for the pitch transition of Portamento for the Part. This is specified as an offset value to the Part Portamento time. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Sw (Portamento Part Switch) Sets Portamento on or off for the Part. Settings: Off, On Portamento Mode Sets the way Portamento is applied according to your keyboard performance. Settings: Fingered, Full-time Fingered: Portamento is applied only when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one) Full-time: Portamento is applied at all times Time (Portamento Part Time) Sets the time length (or speed) for the pitch transition of Portamento for the Part. Settings: 0–127 Time Mode (Portamento Time Mode) Sets how the pitch changes over time. Settings: Rate 1, Time 1, Rate 2, Time 2 Rate 1: Pitch changes at a specific rate. Time 1: Pitch changes at a specific time. Rate 2: Pitch changes at a specific rate within an octave. Time 2: Pitch changes at a specific time within an octave. 159 MODX M Operation Manual „ Micro Tuning Micro Tuning Name and Root will not be shown for the Drum Part. Edit Global Tuning Opens Settings → Sound on the Utility screen. Edit User Tuning Opens the User Micro Tuning settings window. • Tuning No. (Micro Tuning Number) Indicates the selected User Micro Tuning Number. Settings: 1–8 • Tuning Name (Micro Tuning Name) You can save the User Micro Tuning you are editing under a new name. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. • C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B You can adjust the pitch of each note in cent to set the micro tuning. Settings: −99–+0–+99 • Initialize Initializes the selected User Micro Tuning. 160 MODX M Operation Manual Micro Tuning Name Sets the micro tuning (temperament) for the Part. See the table below for an explanation of each setting. Settings: Equal Temperament, Pure Major, Pure Minor, Werckmeister, Kirnberger, Vallotti & Young, 1/4 shift, 1/4 tone, 1/8 tone, Indian, Arabic 1, Arabic 2, Arabic 3 Init Tuning 1–8 (When a user bank is selected) Library 1–1 – 24–8 (When loading a Library file) Equal Temperament Each octave is divided into 12 intervals of equal size. This is the most commonly used tuning in music. Pure Major Pure Minor These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies, such as choirs and a cappella singing. Werckmeister Kirnberger Vallotti & Young Each of the scales combines the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of these scales is that each key has its unique character. They were used in the time of Bach and Beethoven, and are used now when playing music from those eras on instruments like the harpsichord. 1/4 shift The equal-tempered scale shifted up 50 cents. You can create tension in your music by mixing this setting with Equal Temperament. 1/4 tone Twenty-four equally spaced notes per octave. One octave consists of 24 keys. 1/8 tone Forty-eight equally spaced notes per octave. One octave consists of 48 keys. Indian Usually observed in Indian music. Play white keys only. Arabic Usually observed in Arabic music. Root (Micro Tuning Root) Sets the root note for the micro tuning. This parameter is not shown when the selected type in Micro Tuning Name does not require a root note. Settings: C–B 161 MODX M Operation Manual Audition On the Audition screen, you can set the audition phrase. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Audition Audition Bank Selects the bank for the audition phrases. Audition Phrase Number Selects the audition phrase. The preset Performances already have suitable audition phrases assigned. By playing back the audition phrase, you can listen to the selected Performance in an appropriate musical context. Settings: Refer to the Data List Note Shift (Audition Note Shift) Adjusts the pitch of the notes in the audition phrase in semitones. Settings: −24 semi to +0 semi to +24 semi Velocity Shift (Audition Velocity Shift) Adjusts the velocity of the notes in the audition phrase. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Update User Auditions Converts all Songs saved to internal memory into User Auditions. If any User Auditions already exist, all previous User Auditions will be overwritten. 162 MODX M Operation Manual Filter/Amp Filter EG On the Filter EG screen, you can set the Filter Envelope Generator (FEG). This lets you set the degree (or level) of changes to the cutoff frequency and how those changes evolve over time, starting from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to the moment the sound decays. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Filter/Amp → Filter EG FEG Atk (FEG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the sound to change from the moment you press a key to when the Cutoff Frequency reaches the value set at Attack Level. This is specified as an offset value to the Part FEG. Settings: −64–+0–+63 FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the Cutoff Frequency to change from the attack level. You can control the crispness or the decay speed of the sound. This is specified as an offset value to the Part FEG. Settings: −64–+0–+63 FEG Rel (FEG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the Cutoff Frequency to change from the moment you release your finger from the key until it reaches the Release Level. This allows you to make the decay of the sound after the key is released slower or faster. This is specified as an offset value to the Part FEG. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency) Changes the sound by setting the cutoff frequency of the filter. When the Low Pass Filter is selected, larger values here result in a brighter sound, and smaller values result in a darker sound. This is specified as an offset value to the filter cutoff frequency for the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 163 MODX M Operation Manual Resonance Adds special characteristics to the sound by adjusting the signal level near the cutoff frequency. This is specified as an offset value to the filter resonance for the Part. Settings: −64–+0–+63 FEG Depth Sets the depth range for the cutoff frequency change controlled by the FEG. This is specified as an offset value to the Part's FEG Depth. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Amp EG On the Amp EG screen, you can set the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator). By setting the Amp EG, you can set how the volume changes from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to when the sound decays. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Filter/Amp → Amp EG The settings on the Amp EG screen are offset values to the AEG for all Parts. Attack (AEG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to when it reaches the maximum. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Decay (AEG Decay Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to change after it has reached the maximum. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Sustain (AEG Sustain Level) Sets the volume that is maintained while the key is held down. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Release (AEG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the sound to decay after you have released the key. Settings: −64–+0–+63 164 MODX M Operation Manual Effect Routing On this screen, you can set the System Effects applied to all Parts and view the signal flow of the Master Effects. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing Var (Variation Switch) Rev (Reverb Switch) MFX (Master Effect Switch) Sets the Variation Effect, Reverb, and Master Effect on or off. Settings: Off, On Var Type (Variation Type) Rev Type (Reverb Type) MFX Type (Master Effect Type) Sets the type for the Variation Effect, Reverb, and Master Effect. Settings: Refer to the Effect types Var Preset (Variation Preset Number) Rev Preset (Reverb Preset Number) MFX Preset (Master Effect Preset Number) Selects a Preset from the Variation Effect, Reverb, and Master Effect parameters. Settings: Refer to the Data List Side Chain (Variation Side Chain Part) Side Chain (Master Effect Side Chain Part) Modulator (Variation Modulator Part) Modulator (Master Effect Modulator Part) Sets the Side Chain Part (or the Modulator depending on the effect type) for the Variation Effect and Master Effect. This parameter is not available when Master is set to the Modulator Part. In that case, the parameter value will be shown in parenthesis as in "(Master)." Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off 165 MODX M Operation Manual Var Return (Variation Return) Rev Return (Reverb Return) Sets the output level (Return Level) of the signals processed by the Variation Effect or Reverb Effect. Settings: 0–127 Var to Rev (Variation To Reverb) Sets the send level of the signals processed by the Variation Effect. Settings: 0–127 Master EQ (Master EQ Switch) Sets the Master EQ on or off. Settings: Off, On Var Pan (Variation Pan) Rev Pan (Reverb Pan) Sets the stereo location of the signals processed by the Variation Effect or the Reverb Effect. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 Envelope Follower Opens the settings screen for the Envelope Follower. • Part (Input Source) Shows the input source for the selected Envelope Follower. Settings: Master, AD, Part 1–16 • Gain (Envelope Follower Gain) Sets the input gain on the input source set for the Part. Settings: −24.0dB–0.0dB–+24.0dB • Attack (Envelope Follower Attack) Sets the attack time for the envelope follower. Settings: 1ms–40ms • Release (Envelope Follower Release) Sets the release time for the envelope follower. Settings: 10ms–680ms • Input Level Shows the Input level for the signals input from the Input source of the Part you have selected. • Envelope Follower Output Shows the output level of the Envelope Follower. • Edit Opens the Control Assign screen for the selected Part. 166 MODX M Operation Manual Variation Sets the Variation Effect. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Variation Variation Switch Sets the Variation Effect on or off. Settings: Off, On Category (Variation Category) Type (Variation Type) Sets the category and type of the Variation Effect. Settings: Refer to the Effect types Preset (Variation Preset Number) Selects one of the Preset effect parameters for each Effect Type. Settings: Refer to the Data List Side Chain (Variation Side Chain Part) Modulator (Variation Modulator Part) Sets the Part for the Side Chain (or the Modulator depending on the effect type) for the Variation Effect. This parameter is not available when Master is set to the Modulator Part. In that case, the parameter value will be shown in parenthesis as in "(Master)." Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Effect Parameter The Effect Parameters differ depending on the effect type. Settings: Refer to the Effect parameters 167 MODX M Operation Manual Reverb Sets the Reverb Effect. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Reverb Reverb Switch Sets the Reverb Effect on or off. Settings: Off, On Category (Reverb Category) Type (Reverb Type) Sets the category and type of the Reverb Effect. Settings: Refer to the Effect types Preset (Reverb Preset Number) Selects one of the Preset effect parameters for each Effect Type. Settings: Refer to the Data List Effect Parameter The Effect Parameters differ depending on the effect type. Settings: Refer to the Effect parameters 168 MODX M Operation Manual Master FX Sets the Master Effect. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Master FX Master Effect Switch Sets the Master Effect on or off. Settings: Off, On Category (Master Effect Category) Type (Master Effect Type) Sets the category and type of the Master Effect. Settings: Refer to the Effect parameters Preset (Master Effect Preset Number) Selects one of the Preset effect parameters for each Effect Type. Settings: Refer to the Data List Side Chain (Master Effect Side Chain Part) Modulator (Master Effect Modulator Part) Sets the Side Chain (or the Modulator depending on the effect type) for the Master Effects. This parameter is not available when Master is set to the Modulator Part. In that case, the parameter value will be shown in parenthesis as in "(Master)." Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Effect Parameter The Effect Parameters differ depending on the effect type. Settings: Refer to the Effect parameters 169 MODX M Operation Manual Master EQ Sets the Master EQ. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Master EQ Master EQ (Master EQ Switch) Sets the Master EQ on or off. Settings: Off, On Low Gain (Master EQ Low Gain) Sets the signal level of the Low band. Settings: −12dB – +0dB – +12dB Lo Mid Gain (Master EQ Low Mid Gain) Sets the signal level of the Lo Mid band. Settings: −12dB – +0dB – +12dB Mid Gain (Master EQ Mid Gain) Sets the signal level of the Mid band. Settings: −12dB – +0dB – +12dB Hi Mid Gain (Master EQ High Mid Gain) Sets the signal level of the Hi Mid band. Settings: −12dB – +0dB – +12dB High Gain (Master EQ High Gain) Sets the signal level of the High band. Settings: −12dB – +0dB – +12dB Low Freq (Master EQ Low Frequency) Sets the frequency of the Low band. Settings: 32Hz – 2.0kHz 170 MODX M Operation Manual Lo Mid Freq (Master EQ Low Mid Frequency) Sets the frequency of the Lo Mid band. Settings: 100Hz – 10kHz Mid Freq (Master EQ Mid Frequency) Sets the frequency of the Mid band. Settings: 100Hz – 10kHz Hi Mid Freq (Master EQ High Mid Frequency) Sets the frequency of the Hi Mid band. Settings: 100Hz – 10kHz High Freq (Master EQ High Frequency) Sets the frequency of the High band. Settings: 500Hz – 16kHz Low Q (Master EQ Low Q) Sets the bandwidth of the Low band. This parameter is available only when Low Shape (Master EQ Low Shape) is set to Peak. Settings: 0.1–12.0 Lo Mid Q (Master EQ Low Mid Q) Sets the bandwidth of the Lo Mid band. Settings: 0.1–12.0 Mid Q (Master EQ Mid Q) Sets the bandwidth of the Mid band. Settings: 0.1–12.0 Hi Mid Q (Master EQ High Mid Q) Sets the bandwidth of the Hi Mid band. Settings: 0.1–12.0 High Q (Master EQ High Q) Sets the bandwidth of the High band. This parameter is available only when High Shape (Master EQ High Shape) is set to Peak. Settings: 0.1–12.0 Low Shape (Master EQ Low Shape) High Shape (Master EQ High Shape) Sets whether to use Low and High as shelving type (a type that boosts or cuts signals below or above a specific frequency) or peaking type (a type that boosts or cuts signals in a specific frequency band). Settings: Shelf, Peak 171 MODX M Operation Manual Audio In Mixing On the Mixing screen, you can mix the A/D Part (signals from the A/D INPUT jacks) and the Digital Part (signals from the USB [TO HOST] terminal). *The signal from the USB [TO HOST] terminal is the audio set to Digital L/R in the device port. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Audio In → Mixing [SHIFT] + [A/D INPUT ON/OFF] Input Mode (A/D Part Input Mode) Input Mode (Digital Part Input Mode) Determines the processing method for the input signals at the left and right channels. Settings: L Mono, R Mono, L+R Mono, Stereo L Mono: Uses only the left channel. R Mono: Uses only the right channel. L+R Mono: Mixes the left and right channels and processes in mono. Stereo: Processes the stereo input in stereo. NOTE If the sound is input only from the [L/MONO] jack, it is processed in mono. Volume (A/D Part Volume) Volume (Digital Part Volume) Sets the volume of the A/D Part or Digital Part. Settings: 0–127 Pan (A/D Part Pan) Pan (Digital Part Pan) Sets the Pan position (in the stereo field) for the A/D Part or Digital Part. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 172 MODX M Operation Manual Dry Level (A/D Part Dry Level) Dry Level (Digital Part Dry Level) Sets the dry level (or the level of the signals not processed by the System Effect) of the A/D Part or Digital Part. This parameter is available only when Output Select is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 Var Send (A/D Part Variation Send) Var Send (Digital Part Variation Send) Sets the level of the signals sent from the A/D Part or Digital Part to the Variation Effect. This parameter is available only when Output Select is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 Rev Send (A/D Part Reverb Send) Rev Send (Digital Part Reverb Send) Sets the level of the signals sent from the A/D Part or Digital Part to the Reverb Effect. This parameter is available only when Output Select is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 Output Select (A/D Part Output Select) Output Select (Digital Part Output Select) Sets the output destination for the audio signals from the A/D Part or Digital Part. Settings: MainL&R, (AsgnL&R), USB Stereo, (AsgnL), (AsgnR), USB mono, Off MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and OUTPUT [R] jacks. USB Stereo: Outputs in stereo (channels 1 and 2, to channels 7 and 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal USB mono: Outputs in mono (channels 1 to 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal Off: No output of the audio signal for the Part. NOTE The settings for data compatibility with MONTAGE M are shown below. They are considered Off when set. • AsgnL&R • USB Stereo: USB9&10 – USB29&30 • USB mono: USB9 – USB30 • AsgnL • AsgnR 173 MODX M Operation Manual Routing On the Routing screen, you can set the effect routing of the A/D Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Audio In → Routing (1) (2) (1) A/D Part Insertion FX A Switch (2) A/D Part Insertion FX B Switch A/D In Digital In Switches the view between A/D In and Digital In. When Digital In is selected, only the Digital Part Reverb Send, Digital Part Variation Send, and Digital Part Output Select are available. A/D Part Insertion FX A Switch A/D Part Insertion FX B Switch Turns Insertion Effect A and Insertion Effect B on or off. Settings: Off, On Type (A/D Part Insertion Effect A Type) Type (A/D Part Insertion Effect B Type) Sets the Effect Type. Settings: Refer to the Effect types Preset (A/D Part Insertion Effect A Preset) Preset (A/D Part Insertion Effect B Preset) Selects one of the Preset effect parameters for each Effect Type. By selecting a Preset, you can change the way effects are applied. Settings: Refer to the Data List 174 MODX M Operation Manual Side Chain (A/D Part Insertion Effect A Side Chain) Side Chain (A/D Part Insertion Effect B Side Chain) Modulator (A/D Part Insertion Effect A Modulator) Modulator (A/D Part Insertion Effect B Modulator) Sets the Side Chain Part (or the Modulator depending on the effect type) for the Insertion Effect A or Insertion Effect B. This parameter is not available when the Part itself or Master is set to the Modulator. In that case, the parameter value will be shown in parenthesis as in "(Master)." Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Ins Connect (A/D Part Insertion Effect Connect Type) Sets the effect routing for Insertion Effect A and Insertion Effect B. The diagram changes accordingly when the settings are changed. Settings: Ins A → B, Ins B → A Dry Level (A/D Part Dry Level) Sets the dry level (or the level of the signals not processed by the System Effect) of the AD Part. This parameter is available only when Output Select is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 2-band EQ Opens the 2-band EQ 2-band EQ screen for the A/D Part. Rev Send (A/D Part Reverb Send) Rev Send (Digital Part Reverb Send) Sets the level of the signals (or bypass signals) sent from Insertion Effect A or Insertion Effect B to the Reverb Effect. This parameter is available only when Output Select is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 Var Send (A/D Part Variation Send) Var Send (Digital Part Variation Send) Sets the level of the signals (or bypass signals) sent from Insertion Effect A or Insertion Effect B to the Variation Effect. This parameter is available only when Output Select is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 Envelope Follower Opens the settings screen for Envelope Follower. Output Select (A/D Part Output Select) Output Select (Digital Part Output Select) Sets the output destination for the audio signals. Settings: MainL&R, (AsgnL&R), USB Stereo, (AsgnL), (AsgnR), USB mono, Off MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and OUTPUT [R] jacks. USB Stereo: Outputs in stereo (channels 1 and 2, to channels 7 and 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal USB mono: Outputs in mono (channels 1 to 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal Off: No output of the audio signal for the Part. NOTE The settings for data compatibility with MONTAGE M are shown below. They are considered Off when set. • AsgnL&R • USB Stereo: USB9&10 – USB29&30 • USB mono: USB9 – USB30 • AsgnL • AsgnR 175 MODX M Operation Manual Ins A, Ins B On the Ins A and Ins B screens, you can set the Insertion Effects. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Audio In → Ins A [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Audio In → Ins B Insertion FX Switch Enables the Insertion Effect. Settings: Off, On Category (Insertion Effect A Category) Category (Insertion Effect B Category) Type (Insertion Effect A Type) Type (Insertion Effect B Type) Sets the category and type of the Insertion Effect. Settings: Refer to the Effect types Preset (Insertion Effect A Preset) Preset (Insertion Effect B Preset) Selects one of the Preset effect parameters for each Effect Type. By selecting a Preset, you can change the way effects are applied. Settings: Refer to the Data List Side Chain (Insertion Effect A Side Chain Part) Side Chain (Insertion Effect B Side Chain Part) Modulator (Insertion Effect A Modulator Part) Modulator (Insertion Effect B Modulator Part) Sets the Side Chain Part (or the Modulator depending on the effect type) for the Insertion Effect A or Insertion Effect B. This parameter is not available when the Part itself or Master is set to the Modulator. In that case, the parameter value will be shown in parenthesis as in "(Master)." Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Effect Parameter The Effect Parameters differ depending on the effect type. Settings: Refer to the Effect parameters 176 MODX M Operation Manual 2-band EQ On the 2-band EQ screen, you can set the Part EQ. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Audio In → 2-band EQ EQ1 Type (A/D Part 2-band EQ 1 Type) EQ2 Type (A/D Part 2-band EQ 2 Type) Selects the desired EQ type. Settings: Thru, LPF, HPF, Low Shelf, Hi Shelf, Peak/Dip Thru: Passes the signals with no effects being applied. LPF: Cuts the signals above the cutoff frequency. HPF: Cuts the signals below the cutoff frequency. Low Shelf: Cuts or boosts the signals below the specified frequency setting. Hi Shelf: Cuts or boosts the signals above the specified frequency setting. Peak/Dip: Cuts or boosts the signals at the specified frequency setting. EQ 1 Freq (A/D Part 2-band EQ 1 Frequency) EQ 2 Freq (A/D Part 2-band EQ 2 Frequency) Sets the frequency to be cut or boosted. This parameter is not available when the EQ Type is set to Thru. Settings: 63.0Hz–18.0kHz EQ 1 Gain (A/D Part 2-band EQ 1 Gain) EQ 2 Gain (A/D Part 2-band EQ 2 Gain) Sets the signal level of the frequency band set in EQ1 Freq or EQ2 Freq. This parameter is not available when the EQ Type is set to Thru, LPF, or HPF. Settings: −12.0dB – +0.0dB – +12.0dB EQ 1 Q (A/D Part 2-band EQ 1 Q) EQ 2 Q (A/D Part 2-band EQ 2 Q) Sets the bandwidth for cutting or boosting the volume of the frequencies set with EQ1 Freq or EQ2 Freq. This parameter is available only when the EQ Type is set to Peak/Dip. Settings: 0.1–12.0 Output Level (A/D Part 2-band EQ Output Level) Sets the output gain of the 2-band EQ. Settings: −12.0dB – +0.0dB – +12.0dB 177 MODX M Operation Manual Arp/MS Arp Common On the Arp Common screen, you can set the Arpeggio parameters for the entire Performance. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arp/MS → Arp Common Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Sets the Arpeggio for the Performance on or off. This switch is linked to the [ARP] buttons on the top panel. Settings: Off, On Sync Quantize (Arpeggio Sync Quantize Value) Adjusts the timing for starting the next Arpeggio phrase while the first Arpeggio is being played back, when playing back Arpeggio phrases in multiple Parts. When set to Off, the Arpeggio is played back when the Part is played on the keyboard. Settings: Off, 60 (thirty-second note), 80 (sixteenth note triplet), 120 (sixteenth note), 160 (eighth note triplet), 240 (eighth note), 320 (quarter note triplet), 480 (quarter note) (Numbers indicated here are clock values) Swing (Swing Offset) Sets the swing value of the Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for the Performance. This is specified as an offset value to Part Swing. Settings: −120–+ 0–+120 Unit (Common Unit Multiply) Sets the percentage for stretching or compressing the Arpeggio playback time for the entire Performance. This parameter affects Parts for which Part Unit (Arpeggio Unit Multiply) is set to Common. The subdivision of the beat and the tempo will change when you stretch or compress the playback time, so you can create a completely new feel for the originally selected Arpeggio. Settings: 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 133%, 150%, 200%, 266%, 300%, 400% 200%: The playback time is doubled, and the tempo is halved 100%: The playback time is kept unchanged 50%: The playback time is halved, and the tempo is doubled 178 MODX M Operation Manual Qntz Strength (Arpeggio Quantize Strength Offset) Sets the strength of the quantize setting that is applied to the Arpeggio for the Performance. This is specified as an offset value to the Qntz Strength (Arpeggio Quantize Strength) of each Part. Settings: −100–+0–+100 Gate Time (Arpeggio Gate Time Rate Offset) Sets the Arpeggio Gate Time Rate for the Performance. This is specified as an offset value to the Gate Time (Arpeggio Gate Time Rate) of each Part. Settings: −100–+0–+100 Velocity (Arpeggio Velocity Rate Offset) Sets the Arpeggio Velocity Rate for the Performance. This is specified as an offset value to the Velocity (Arpeggio Velocity Rate) of each Part. Settings: −100–+0–+100 Octave Shift (Arpeggio Octave Shift Offset) Shifts the pitch of the Arpeggio for the Performance in octaves. This is specified as an offset value to the Octave Shift (Arpeggio Octave Shift) of each Part. Settings: −20–+0–+20 Octave Range (Arpeggio Octave Range Offset) Shifts the range of the Arpeggio for the Performance in octaves. This is specified as an offset value to the Octave Range (Arpeggio Octave Range) of each Part. Settings: −6–+0–+6 Arp Select (Arpeggio Select) Selects the Arpeggio. Settings: 1–8 179 MODX M Operation Manual Arp Overview (Arpeggio Overview) On the Arp Overview screen, you can set the Arpeggio types from the list of all Parts. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arp/MS → Arp Overview (When a selected Part is Common) [SHIFT] + [ARP] Part 1–8 Part 9–16 Switches the view for Parts. Settings: Part 1–8, Part 9–16 Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Sets the Arpeggio for the Performance on or off. This switch is linked to the [ARP] buttons on the top panel. Settings: Off, On Group (Arpeggio Group) Sets the Arpeggio Group for using the same Arpeggio on multiple Parts. The Parts set in the same Group will have the same Arpeggio settings. Arp Select (Arpeggio Select) Selects the Arpeggio. Settings: 1–8 Sw (Part Arpeggio Switch) Sets the Arpeggio of each Part on or off. Settings: Off, On 180 MODX M Operation Manual „ When View is set to Category Category (Arpeggio Category) Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category) Name (Arpeggio Name) Settings: Refer to the Data List „ When View is set to Number Bank (Arpeggio Bank) Number (Arpeggio Number) Name (Arpeggio Name) Settings: Refer to the Data List „ When View is set to Range Name (Arpeggio Name) Settings: Refer to the Data List Velocity Limit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit) Sets the velocity range (lowest and highest values) for Arpeggio playback. When this is set so that the higher value is first and the lower value is second (for example, 93 to 34), the Arpeggio is played only for velocities of 1 to 34 and 93 to 127. Settings: 1–127 Note Limit (Arpeggio Note Limit) Sets the note range (the lowest and the highest notes) for Arpeggio playback. When the first note specified is higher than the second (for example, C5 to C4), the notes in the ranges C−2 to C4 and C5 to G8 will be played. Settings: C−2–G8 181 MODX M Operation Manual MS Common (Motion Sequencer Common) On the MS Common screen, you can set the Motion Sequencer parameters used for the entire Performance. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arp/MS → MS Common (When a selected Part is Common) [SHIFT] + [MSEQ] Common Swing (Swing Offset) Sets the swing value of the Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for the Performance. This is specified as an offset value to the Part Swing. Settings: −120–+0–+120 Common Unit (Common Unit Multiply) Sets the percentage for stretching or compressing the Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance. This parameter affects Lanes for which Unit is set to Common. The subdivision of the beat and the tempo will change when you stretch or compress playback time, so you can create a completely new feel for the Motion Sequence you have originally selected. Settings: 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 133%, 150%, 200%, 266%, 300%, 400% 200%: The playback time is doubled, and the tempo is halved 100%: The playback time is kept unchanged 50%: The playback time is halved, and the tempo is doubled Common Amplitude (Motion Sequencer Amplitude Performance Offset) Sets the Motion Sequencer Amplitude (or how much the Sequence changes) for the entire Performance. This parameter value offsets the Amplitude of the Lanes within the Part if MS FX (Lane FX Receive) is set to On. This is specified as an offset value to the Part Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude) of each Part. Settings: −127–+0–+127 Common Shape (Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape Performance Offset) Sets the Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape (or the shape of the step curve) for the Performance. This parameter value offsets the parameters for the Lanes within the Part if MS FX (Lane FX Receive) is set to On for the lane and Control is set to On. This is specified as an offset value to the Part Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape) of each Part. Settings: −100–+0–+100 182 MODX M Operation Manual Common Smooth (Motion Sequencer Smoothness Performance Offset) Sets the Motion Sequence Smoothness (or the smoothness of the changes in the sequence over time) for the entire Performance. This parameter value offsets the Smoothness of the Lanes within the Part if MS FX (Lane FX Receive) is set to On for the Lane. This is specified as an offset value to the Part Motion Seq Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness) of each Part. Settings: −127–+0–+127 Common Random (Motion Sequencer Randomness Performance Offset) Sets the Motion Sequencer Randomness (or the randomness of the changes in the step value of the sequence) for the entire Performance. This parameter value offsets the Randomness of the Lanes within the Performance if MS FX (Lane FX Receive) is set to On for the Lane. This is specified as an offset value to the Part Motion Seq Random (Part Motion Sequencer Randomness) of each Part. Settings: −127–+0–+127 View Lane (Motion Seq View Lane) Sets the Motion Seq Lane that is shown when the View Mode of the Home screen is set to Motion Seq. Settings: Super Knob, 1–4 AD MS Random (A/D Part Motion Sequencer Randomness) Sets the randomness of the changes in A/D Part Motion Sequencer Step Value. Settings: 0–127 MS Select (Motion Sequence Select) Changes the Motion Sequence selection. Settings: 1–8 183 MODX M Operation Manual MS Overview (Motion Sequencer Overview) On the MS Overview screen, you can set the Motion Sequencer from the list of all Parts. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arp/MS → MS Overview MS Master (Motion Seq Master Switch) Sets the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on or off. This switch is linked to the [MSEQ] buttons on the top panel. Settings: Off, On Active (Active Motion Sequencer) Shows the number of Lane switches set to On. The number shown on the right side of the slash (/) indicates the maximum number of Lanes you can simultaneously set to On. MS Select (Motion Sequence Select) Changes the Motion Sequence selection. Settings: 1–8 PartSw (Motion Sequencer Part Switch) Sets the Motion Sequencer on or off for each Part. Settings: Off, On Lane Switch Sets each Lane on or off. You can use up to four Motion Sequencer lanes in one Part, or up to eight lanes in an entire Performance. Settings: Off, On 184 MODX M Operation Manual Lane On the Lane screen, you can set the parameters for each Motion Sequencer Lane. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arp/MS → Lane Motion Seq Master Sw (Motion Sequencer Master Switch) Sets the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on or off. Settings: Off, On Motion Seq Part Sw (Motion Sequencer Part Switch) Sets the Motion Sequencer of the Part on or off. Settings: Off, On Lane (Lane Select) Shows the parameters for the selected Lane. Settings: 1–4 LaneSw (Lane Switch) Sets each Lane on or off. You can use up to four Motion Sequencer lanes in one Part, or up to eight lanes in an entire Performance. When set to Off, the parameters for that lane will not be shown. Settings: Off, On MS FX (Lane FX Receive) Sets the selected Lane to receive the signals from the knobs for changing the Motion Sequencer parameters. Settings: Off, On Trigger (Lane Trigger Receive) Sets the selected Lane to receive the signals from the [MSEQ TRIGGER] button. When set to On, the Motion Sequence will not be played back unless you press the [MSEQ TRIGGER] button. Settings: Off, On Sequence Select (Motion Sequence Select) Changes the Motion Sequence selection. Settings: 1–8 Target Sequence Shows the selected Lanes and sequences. 185 MODX M Operation Manual „ Sync/Speed Tabs Sync (Lane Sync) Sets the playback of the Motion Sequence set to the Destinationin the Control Assign screen to synchronize to the Performance tempo or beat. Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat, Lane1 (when Lane2–4 are selected) Off: Plays back the Lane Motion Sequencer alone Tempo: Plays back the Lane Motion Sequencer at the Performance tempo. Beat: Plays back the Motion Sequencer in sync with the beat Lane1: Plays back the Lane Motion Sequencer in sync with Lane 1 • When Sync is set to Off Speed (Lane Speed) Sets the playback speed for the Motion Sequence. This parameter is available when Sync is set to Off. Settings: 0–127 Delay Time (A/D Part Motion Seq Lane Key On Delay Time Length) Sets the delay time for starting the playback of the Motion Sequence. Settings: 0–127 Fade In Time (A/D Part Motion Seq Lane Fade In Time Length) Sets the time for the Motion Sequence to reach maximum amplitude. Settings: 0–127 • When Sync is set to something other than Off Unit (A/D Part Motion Seq Lane Unit Multiply) Sets the percentage for stretching or compressing the Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Lane. This parameter is available when Sync is set to Tempo or Beat. Settings: 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 133%, 150%, 200%, 266%, 300%, 400%, 600%, 800%, 1200%, 1600%, 2400%, 3200%, 6400%, Common 200%: The playback time is doubled, and the tempo is halved 100%: The playback time is kept unchanged 50%: The playback time is halved, and the tempo is doubled Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to all Parts is applied Delay Steps (A/D Part Motion Seq Lane Key On Delay Step Length) Sets the delay time for starting the playback of the Motion Sequence when Sync is set to Tempo or Beat. Settings: 0–32 Fade In Steps (A/D Part Motion Seq Lane Fade In Step Length) Sets the time to reach the maximum amplitude for the Motion Sequence when Sync is set to Tempo, Beat, or Lane1. Settings: 0–32 Lane Vel Limit (Lane Velocity Limit) Sets the velocity range (lowest and highest values) for playing back the Motion Sequence of the selected Lane. This parameter is available when Sync is set to Off, Tempo, or Beat. When the Velocity Limit is set to a range from the highest value to the lowest value, the Motion Sequence will be played back in two velocity ranges: from the maximum to the highest value, and from the lowest value to the minimum. Settings: 1–127 Edit Sequence The Motion Sequence Edit screen will open. Motion Seq Step n Value Shows the step curve for the selected sequence. 186 MODX M Operation Manual „ Loop/Length Tabs Key On Reset (Lane Key On Reset) Resets the Motion Sequence playback when you press any key on the keyboard. This parameter is available when Sync is set to Off, Tempo, or Beat. This parameter is not available when Trigger is set to On. Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On Each-On: Each time you play any note, the sequence will be reset and the playback starts from the beginning 1st-On: Playback starts from the beginning at the first note you play. The sequence will not be reset when a second note is played while the first note is being played. Loop (Lane Loop) Sets the Motion Sequence to loop playback (in repeats) or one-shot playback. This parameter is available when Sync is set to Off, Tempo, or Beat. Settings: Off, On Loop Start (Lane Loop Start) Specifies the starting point for the loop playback of the Motion Sequence. Settings: 1–16 (should be below the Length setting) Length (Motion Seq Length) Sets the number of steps in the Motion Sequence. Settings: 1–16 (should be above the Loop Start setting) MS Grid (Motion Sequencer Grid) Sets the length of a step in the Motion Sequence. Settings: 60, 80, 120, 160, 240, 320, 480 „ Motion Sequence Edit Opens the setting screen for the Motion Sequence. You can create a sequence of up to 16 steps. Loop Start (Lane Loop Start) Specifies the starting point for the loop playback of the Motion Sequence. Settings: 1–16 (should be below the Length setting) Length (Motion Sequence Length) Sets the Motion Sequence length. Settings: 1–16 (should be above the Loop Start setting) 187 MODX M Operation Manual MS Grid (Motion Sequencer Grid) Sets the length of a step in the Motion Sequence. Settings: 60, 80, 120, 160, 240, 320, 480 Sequence Select (Motion Sequence Select) Changes the Motion Sequence type selection. Settings: 1–8 Lane Select Changes the Lane selection. Settings: 1–4 Polarity (Motion Sequence Polarity) Sets the polarity of the Motion Sequence. Settings: Unipolar, Bipolar Unipolar: Only positive values are used for the parameter change Bipolar: Both positive and negative values are used for the parameter change Amplitude (Motion Sequence Amplitude) Sets the degree of changes in the Motion Sequence. Settings: 0–127 Smooth (Motion Sequence Smoothness) Sets the smoothness of the changes in the Motion Sequence over time. Settings: 0–127 Job Calls up the Job menu. • Store Sequence Saves (stores) the edited Motion Sequence. • Load Sequence Loads the Motion Sequence. • Copy Sequence Copies the Motion Sequence. Motion Sequence Step Value Sets the value for each step in the Motion Sequence. You can use Control sliders 1 to 8 to change the values for Steps 1 to 8 and Steps 9 to 16, depending on the cursor position. Settings: 0–127 Motion Sequence Step Type Sets the type and direction of each step in the Motion Sequence. Settings: A, B, Reverse A, Reverse B Pulse A (Motion Sequence Step Curve Type A) Pulse B (Motion Sequence Step Curve Type B) Selects a parameter change curve for Pulse A and Pulse B. Use the Motion Sequence Step Type to select which of the curve types to use for each step. The vertical axis represents the time while the horizontal axis represents the step value. Settings: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold, Harmonic, Steps (When a preset bank is selected) Init Curve 1–32 (When a user bank is selected) Curve within Library 1–24 (When loading a Library file) 188 MODX M Operation Manual Prm 1 (Motion Sequence Step Curve Parameter 1) Prm 2 (Motion Sequence Step Curve Parameter 2) Adjusts the shape of the step curve in the Motion Sequence. Also, the range for the parameter value differs depending on the Curve Type. This setting is not available depending on the Curve Type. Control (Motion Sequence Step Curve Shape Control Switch) Enables or disables the use of the knobs for controlling the step curve shape of the Motion Sequence. Shown only when MS FX (Lane FX Receive) is set to On. This setting is not available depending on the Curve Type. Settings: Off, On 189 MODX M Operation Manual Control Control Assign On the Control Assign screen, you can set the Controllers for the Part. By assigning a parameter (Destination) to a controller (Source), you can control the sound in a large variety of ways. You can use physical controllers such as the Pitch Bend wheel and knobs as well as the Motion Sequencer and Envelope Follower. Up to 32 controllers can be assigned simultaneously to a Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Control → Control Assign Tap Edit Super Knob on Motion Control → Super Knob Auto Select Switches the Auto Select setting of the Display Filter on or off. When set to On, moving the controller you wish to set to Source automatically sets the controller to the Display Filter. Settings: Off, On Display Filter Selects the controller for showing the settings on the screen. When you select Super Knob, all settings for Knobs 1 to 8 having the Super Knob Link set to On will be shown. Settings: PitchBend, ModWheel, Ch. AT, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1–8, Super Knob, AsgnSw 1, AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst, All Display Name (Assignable Knob Name) This allows you to enter a new name for Knobs 1 to 8. This parameter is not shown when Source is set to something other than AsgnKnob 1–8. Edit Pitch Bend General/Pitch → Pitch will open. This parameter is not shown when Source is set to something other than PitchBend. Edit Motion Sequencer Opens Arp/MS → Lane. This parameter is not shown when Source is set to something other than MS Lane 1–4. Edit Envelope Follower Opens the settings screen for Envelope Follower. This parameter is not shown when Source is set to something other than EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, or EnvFollowMst. 190 MODX M Operation Manual Destination Sets the parameter to the Destination. Tap [+] to add a Destination. When Source is set to AsgnKnob 1–8, Part1–16 Assign1–8 is added to the settings. In that case, Curve Type and Curve Ratio are not available. Source Sets the controller for controlling the parameters set to the Destination. When Destination is set to Part1–16 Assign1–8, only AsgnKnob 1–8 will be available. Other controllers cannot be used. Settings: PitchBend, ModWheel, AfterTouch, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1–8, AsgnSw 1, AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst Destination to Name Copies the parameters set to Destination to Display Name. This parameter is not shown when Source is set to something other than AsgnKnob 1–8. Delete Deletes the selected Destination. Destination (Part Assignable Knob Destination) Sets the parameter to show when you try to set Part1–16 Assign1–8 to the Destination and multiple Destinations are already assigned to Part Assign. Parameter (Part Assignable Knob Parameter) Sets the Part parameter to the Destination. Settings: Refer to the Data List The parameters shown below appear only when Destination 1–32 is set to Part1–16 Assign1–8. Also, only the shortcut buttons are available on the screens when Part Knobs 1–8 cannot be found in Destination. Edit (Part No.) Control Assign Opens the Control Assign screen for the selected Part. Curve Type Sets the change curve of the parameter set to Destination. The horizontal axis represents the controller value set in Source while the vertical axis represents the parameter value. Settings: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold, Harmonic, Steps (When a preset bank is selected) Init Curve 1–32 (When a user bank is selected) Curve within Library 1–24 (When loading a Library file) Polarity (Curve Polarity) Sets the polarity of the curve set in Curve Type. Settings: Uni, Bi Uni: Parameter changes occur only within the positive range or the negative range according to the curve shape Bi: Parameter changes occur both in positive and negative ranges according to the curve shape Ratio (Curve Ratio) Sets the ratio of the parameter values. Settings: −128–+0–+127 Param 1 (Curve Parameter 1) Param 2 (Curve Parameter 2) Adjusts the curve shape. This setting is not available depending on the Curve Type. Edit User Curve Opens the setting screen for User Curve. 191 MODX M Operation Manual Ribbon Settings Sets the Ribbon controller. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Control → Ribbon Settings Ribbon Grid Mode Sets the grid mode for the Ribbon controller. Settings: Continuous, 5 step, 3 step NOTE Set to Continuous if you wish to use the Ribbon Controller setting you have set on the Control Assign screen. „ Continuous mode Ribbon Mode (Ribbon Controller Mode) Sets the way the Ribbon Controller functions. Settings: Hold, Reset Hold: Retains the value of the position at which you release your finger from the Ribbon Controller. Reset: Automatically resets the value to the mid position when you release your finger from the Ribbon Controller. „ 5 step mode, 3 step mode Control Part Selects the Part to be controlled with the Ribbon Controller. Settings: Common, Part 1–16 Control Destination Settings: Refer to the Control Box Destination in the Data List Step Value 1–5 Settings: Depends on the Destination 192 MODX M Operation Manual Control Number Sets the Control Change number for the entire Performance. You can assign specific MIDI Control Change numbers to the Knobs on the top panel and controllers on the external device. NOTE As for controllers not included on this instrument, you can use an external sequencer or external MIDI controllers. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Control → Control Number Ribbon Ctrl (Ribbon Controller Control Number) Sets the Control Change number generated by the operation of the Ribbon Controller. When this instrument receives a MIDI Control Change message of the number set with this parameter from the external device, the message is treated the same as the operation of the built-in Ribbon Controller. Settings: Off, 1–95 Breath Ctrl (Breath Controller Control Number) Sets the Control Change number for the Breath Controller to be received from the external device. When this instrument receives a MIDI Control Change message of the number set with this parameter from the external device, the message is treated the same as the operation of the Breath Controller. Settings: Off, 1–95 Foot Ctrl 1 (Foot Controller 1 Control Number) Foot Ctrl 2 (Foot Controller 2 Control Number) Sets the Control Change number generated by the operation of the Foot Controller connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack. When this instrument receives a MIDI Control Change message of the number set with this parameter from the external device, the message is treated the same as the operation of the Foot Controller. Settings: Off, 1–95, Super Knob Assign Sw 1 (Assignable Switch 1 Control Number) Assign Sw 2 (Assignable Switch 2 Control Number) Sets the Control Change number generated by the operation of the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons. When this instrument receives a MIDI Control Change message of the number set with this parameter from the external device, the message is treated the same as the operation of the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons. Settings: Off, 1–95 193 MODX M Operation Manual MS Trigger (Motion Sequencer Trigger Switch Control Number) Sets the Control Change number generated by the operation of the [MSEQ TRIGGER] button. When this instrument receives a MIDI Control Change message of the number set with this parameter from the external device, the message is treated the same as the operation of the [MSEQ TRIGGER] button. Settings: Off, 1–95 MIDI Settings Opens the MIDI settings screen. The same screen can be opened from [UTILITY] → Settings → MIDI I/O. Assign Knob (Assignable Knob Control Number) Sets the Control Change number generated by the operation of Knobs 1 to 8. When this instrument receives a MIDI Control Change message of the number set with this parameter from the external device, the message is treated the same as the operation of Knobs 1 to 8. Settings: Off, 1–95 FS Assign (Foot Switch Assign Control Number) Shows the Control Change number generated by the operation of the footswitch connected to the FOOT SWITCH [ASSIGNABLE] jack. When this instrument receives a MIDI Control Change message of the number set with this parameter from the external device, the message is treated the same as the operation of the footswitch. Scene CC (Scene Control Change Number) Shows the Control Change number generated by the operation of the SCENE buttons. When this instrument receives a MIDI Control Change message of the number set with this parameter from the external device, the message is treated the same as the operation of the SCENE buttons. Super Knob CC (Super Knob Control Change Number) Shows the Control Change number generated by the operation of the Super Knob. When this instrument receives a MIDI Control Change message of the number set with this parameter from the external device, the message is treated the same as the operation of the Super Knob. NOTE • When Scene CC and Super Knob CC are set to Off, System Exclusive (SysEx) is used for handling MIDI messages. • FS Assign, Scene CC, and Super Knob CC are used for the entire instrument. If desired, change these settings from the Utility MIDI I/O screen. 194 MODX M Operation Manual Control Settings Sets the controller mode. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Control → Control Settings [SHIFT] + [ASSIGN 1] [SHIFT] + [ASSIGN 2] Slider Direction Part 1–8 Sets the direction of the Control sliders 1 to 8 when the slider Mode is set to PART. Settings: Normal (up from the bottom), Reverse (down from the top) Assignable Switch 1 Mode Assignable Switch 2 Mode Sets the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons for the Latch or Momentary setting. Settings: Latch, Momentary Latch: Sets to On when you press the button and sets to Off when you press the button again. Momentary: Sets to On while you are holding down the button and sets to Off when you release the button. 195 MODX M Operation Manual Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit Screens A Normal Part (AWM2) consists of up to 128 elements. Part Edit (AWM2) includes Part Common Edit (for setting parameters for the entire Part) and Element Edit (for setting parameters for each Element in the Part). General/Pitch Part Settings On the Part Settings screen, you can set general parameters (such as the Part names and tone generation system) for the Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Part Settings Main Category (Part Main Category) Sub Category (Part Sub Category) Sets the Main category and Sub category of the selected Part. Settings: Refer to the Data List Part Name You can save the Part you are editing under a new name, You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Volume Sets the volume of the selected Part. Settings: 0–127 Pan Adjusts the Pan position (in the stereo field) of the selected Part. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 196 MODX M Operation Manual Dry Level Sets the Dry Level of the selected Part. This parameter is available only when Part Output is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 Var Send (Variation Send) Sets the Variation Send of the selected Part. This parameter is available only when Part Output is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 Rev Send (Reverb Send) Sets the Reverb Send of the selected Part. This parameter is available only when Part Output is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 Part Output (Part Output Select) Sets the output destination for the audio signals of the selected Part. Settings: MainL&R, (AsgnL&R), USB Stereo, (AsgnL), (AsgnR), USB mono, Off MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and OUTPUT [R] jacks. USB Stereo: Outputs in stereo (channels 1 and 2, to channels 7 and 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal USB mono: Outputs in mono (channels 1 to 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal Off: No output of the audio signal for the Part. NOTE The settings for data compatibility with MONTAGE M are shown below. They are considered Off when set. • AsgnL&R • USB Stereo: USB9&10 – USB29&30 • USB mono: USB9 – USB30 • AsgnL • AsgnR Mono/Poly Sets the tone generation mode of the current Part. Mono is for playing single notes, and Poly is for playing multiple simultaneous notes. When using the Mono setting for playing the keyboard in Legato, you can create a smooth transition of sounds from one note to another. Settings: Mono, Poly Key Assign (Key Assign Mode) Sets how sound is produced when the internal tone generator receives Note On messages of the same sound twice (or more) in a row. The Multi setting is recommended for most cases. However, the Multi setting uses up many notes in the maximum polyphony, so it is recommended to change to Single if sounds in other Parts are dropped or not played properly. Settings: Single, Multi Single: Stops the first note and then plays the same note again. This is convenient for repeating the same note on the same channel Multi: Plays the second note over the first note. The Multi setting makes rolls sound natural, especially crash cymbals or other percussion instruments having a long decay Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only) Sets the Part to be played only with the Arpeggio. Any Part set to On will be played by the Note On messages sent from the Arpeggio. Settings: Off, On Element Pan (Element Pan Switch) Sets the Pan to On or Off from the Element Edit. When set to Off, the Pan in the Element Edit will be set to C (center). Settings: Off, On 197 MODX M Operation Manual TG Note Limit (Note Limit) Sets the note range (lowest and highest notes) for the Part. When the first note of Note Limit is set higher than the second (for example, C5 to C4), the notes in the ranges C−2 to C4 and C5 to G8 will be played. Settings: C−2–G8 TG Vel Limit (Velocity Limit) Sets the velocity range (lowest and highest values) for the Part. When this is set so that the higher value is first and the lower value is second (for example, 93 to 34), the notes are played only for velocities of 1 to 34 and 93 to 127. Settings: 1–127 Velocity Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) Increases or decreases the velocity value that is sent to the internal tone generator. Settings: 0–127 When Velocity Depth = 64 and Velocity Offset = 32 When Velocity Depth = 64 and Velocity Offset = 64 When Velocity Depth = 64 and Velocity Offset = 96 127 0 127 64 127 64 127 0 127 64 127 0 (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) 127 0 127 64 127 64 127 0 127 64 127 0 (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) 127 0 127 64 127 64 127 0 127 64 127 0 (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) (2) Velocity with which you play a note Velocity Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) Sets how the level of the velocity value (sent to the internal tone generator) responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: 0–127 When Velocity Depth = 64 127 0 127 64 (1) Depth = 127 Depth = 64 Depth = 32 Depth = 0 (2) (1) Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) (2) Velocity with which you play a note 198 MODX M Operation Manual Zone Settings On the Zone Settings screen, you can set the parameters for the Zone function. This function allows you to divide the entire keyboard into a maximum of eight sections (Zones) and independently assign a separate channel to each Zone. This way, you only need one keyboard to play the sounds of multiple keyboards. You can play multiple Parts on an external multi-timbral sound module or play both the internal tone generator and any connected external sound modules. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Zone Settings Keyboard Sw (Keyboard Control Switch) You can set which Parts will play simultaneously by turning each Part's Keyboard Sw (Keyboard Control Switch) on or off. When you select a Part with Common or Keyboard Sw set to On and play the keyboard, the Parts with Keyboard Sw set to On will play simultaneously. If the Keyboard Sw for the Part is set to Off, when you play the keyboard with that Part selected, those sounds will be played. Settings: Off, On Zone Vel Limit (Zone Velocity Limit) Sets the velocity range (lowest and highest values) for the Zone. When this is set so that the higher value is first and the lower value is second (for example, 93 to 34), the notes are played only for velocities of 1 to 34 and 93 to 127. Settings: 1–127 Zone Note Limit Sets the note range (lowest and highest notes) for the Zone. When the first note of Note Limit is set higher than the second (for example, C5 to C4), the notes in the ranges C−2 to C4 and C5 to G8 will be played. Settings: C−2–G8 Octave Shift Shifts the pitch of the zone in octaves. Settings: −3–+0 (standard)–+3 199 MODX M Operation Manual Transpose Shifts the pitch of the zone in semitones. Settings: −11–+0 (standard)–+11 Part Mode Switches the Part Mode. Settings: Internal, External Internal: Mode that uses the built-in sound engine of the instrument External : Uses the external sound generator. Any Part set to External does not receive MIDI messages from the external device Tx/Rx Ch (Transmit/Receive Channel) Sets the channel for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages when the Part Mode is set to Internal. Settings: Ch1–Ch16, Off Transmit Ch Sets the channel for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages for the Zone when the Part Mode is set to External. Settings: Ch1–Ch16 MIDI I/O Ch (MIDI Input/Output Channel) Shows the channel for controlling the Part set to Common and the Part with the Keyboard Sw set to On. This setting is common to the entire instrument. The setting can be changed on the Utility MIDI Settings screen. When using Tx/Rx Ch and Transmit Ch, do not use the same channel specified in MIDI I/O Ch. If the same channel is specified, the setting in MIDI I/O Ch will take priority. Settings: Ch1–Ch16 MIDI Settings Opens Settings → MIDI I/O on the Utility screen. MIDI Send When this parameter is set to On, the MIDI Bank MSB/LSB, MIDI Pgm Num, MIDI Volume, and MIDI Pan settings are transmitted to the external device whenever those parameters are changed. However, the setting is not transmitted when the corresponding transmit switch is set to Off. This setting is common to all Performances and cannot be set individually for each Performance. This parameter is available only when Part Mode is set to External. Settings: Off, On Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select) The transmit switch for sending MIDI Bank MSB and MIDI Bank LSB to the external device. This parameter is available only when Part Mode is set to External. Settings: Off, On MIDI Bank MSB MIDI Bank LSB Selects the bank for transmitting the Performance selection. This parameter is not available when Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select) is set to Off. This parameter is available only when Part Mode is set to External. Settings: 000–127 Pgm Change (Transmit Program Change) This is the transmit switch for sending Program Change messages to the external device. This parameter is available only when Part Mode is set to External. Settings: Off, On 200 MODX M Operation Manual MIDI Pgm Num (MIDI Program Number) Selects the Program Change number for transmitting the Performance selection. This parameter is not available when Pgm Change (Transmit Program Change) is set to Off. This parameter is available only when Part Mode is set to External. Settings: 001–128 Vol/Exp (Transmit Volume/Expression) This is the transmit switch for sending the volume setting to the external device. This parameter is available only when Part Mode is set to External. Settings: Off, On MIDI Volume Sets the volume for transmitting the Performance selection. This parameter is available only when Part Mode is set to External. Settings: 0–127 Pan (Transmit Pan) This is the transmit switch for sending the Pan setting to the external device. This parameter is available only when Part Mode is set to External. Settings: Off, On MIDI Pan Sets the Pan for transmitting the Performance selection. This parameter is not available when Pan (Transmit Pan) is set to Off. Settings: L64–C (Center)–R63 Edit Tx/Rx Switch Mod/Control → Tx/Rx Switch is displayed. 201 MODX M Operation Manual Element Settings Sets the maximum number of elements to use. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Element Settings Ex Elem Sw (Extended Element Switch) Enables the extension of Element capacity. When set to Off, only up to eight elements are available. Settings: Off, On Element Count Sets the maximum number of elements to use. Settings: 8–128 202 MODX M Operation Manual Pitch On the Pitch screen, you can set the pitch for the Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Pitch Master Sw (Portamento Master Switch) Portamento is a function for creating a smooth transition between two notes. Sets Portamento on or off for Parts having the Portamento Part Switch set to On. This switch is linked to the [PORTAMENTO] button on the top panel. Settings: Off, On Note Shift Adjusts the pitch in semitones. Settings: −48–+0–+48 Detune Adjusts the pitch of the selected Part in 0.1 Hz increments. By slightly shifting the pitch, you can detune the sound. Settings: −12.8Hz–+0.0Hz–+12.7Hz Pitch Control Group Parts assigned to the same group are given the same pitch. Mono/Poly Sets the tone generation mode of the current Part. Mono is for playing single notes, and Poly is for playing multiple simultaneous notes. When using the Mono setting for playing the keyboard in Legato, you can create a smooth transition of sounds from one note to another. Settings: Mono, Poly Pitch Bend  (Pitch Bend Range Lower) Pitch Bend  (Pitch Bend Range Upper) Sets the range of the changes created with the pitch bend wheel in semitones. Settings: −48–+0–+24 203 MODX M Operation Manual Edit Control Assign Opens the Control Assign screen with the Display Filter set to PitchBend. Portamento (Portamento Part Switch) Sets Portamento on or off for the Part. Settings: Off, On Mode (Portamento Mode) Sets the way Portamento is applied according to your keyboard performance. Settings: Fingered, Full-time Fingered : Portamento is applied only when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one) Full-time : Portamento is applied at all times Time (Portamento Time) Sets the time length (or speed) for the pitch transition of Portamento for the Part. Settings: 0–127 Time Mode (Portamento Time Mode) Sets how the pitch changes over time. Settings: Rate 1, Time 1, Rate 2, Time 2 Rate 1: Pitch changes at a specific rate. Time 1: Pitch changes at a specific time. Rate 2: Pitch changes at a specific rate within an octave. Time 2: Pitch changes at a specific time within an octave. Legato Slope (Portamento Legato Slope) Adjusts the attack of the legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one) when Mono/Poly is set to Mono. When set to Mono, the attack of the note may sound unnatural depending on the attack speed of the waveform assigned to the Part. By setting this parameter low for sounds with short attacks and high for sounds with long attacks, you can adjust the sound to have a natural attack. Settings: 0–7 Micro Tuning Name Sets the micro tuning (temperament) for the Part. For an explanation of each temperament, refer to General/Pitch → Pitch on the Common Edit screen. Settings: Equal Temperament, Pure Major, Pure Minor, Werckmeister, Kirnberger, Vallotti & Young, 1/4 shift, 1/4 tone, 1/8 tone, Indian, Arabic 1, Arabic 2, Arabic 3 Init Tuning 1–8 (When a user bank is selected) Library 1–1 – 24–8 (When loading a Library file) Root (Micro Tuning Root) Sets the root note for the micro tuning. This parameter is shown only when a Micro Tuning Name that requires a root note is selected. Settings: C–B Edit User Tuning Opens the User Micro Tuning settings window. 204 MODX M Operation Manual Filter/Amp Filter On the Filter screen, you can set the Filter Envelope Generator (FEG) for the Part. The FEG lets you set the degree (or level) of changes to the Cutoff Frequency and how those changes evolve over time, starting from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to the moment the sound decays. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Filter/Amp → Filter FEG Atk (FEG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the sound to change from the moment you press a key to when the Cutoff Frequency reaches the value set at Attack Level (FEG Attack Level). This is specified as an offset value to the Element FEG. Settings: −64–+0–+63 FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the Cutoff Frequency to change from the Attack Level (FEG Attack Level). You can control the crispness or the decay speed of the sound. This is specified as an offset value to the Element FEG. Settings: −64–+0–+63 FEG Sus (FEG Sustain Level) Sets the Cutoff Frequency level that follows the end of the FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time). This is specified as an offset value to the Element FEG. Settings: −64–+0–+63 FEG Rel (FEG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the Cutoff Frequency to fall to the Release Level (FEG Release Level) when you lift your finger from the key. This is specified as an offset value to the Element FEG. Settings: −64–+0–+63 205 MODX M Operation Manual Cutoff (Filter Cutoff Frequency) Changes the sound by setting the cutoff frequency of the filter. When the Low Pass Filter is selected, larger values here result in a brighter sound, and smaller values result in a darker sound. This is specified as an offset value to the cutoff frequency for the Element. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Resonance (Filter Resonance) Adds special characteristics to the sound by adjusting the signal level near the cutoff frequency. This is specified as an offset value to the Resonance (Filter Resonance) or Width (Filter Width). Settings: −64–+0–+63 FEG Depth Adjusts the depth range of the cutoff frequency controlled by the FEG for the Element. When it is set to 0, the settings in the Element will be used with no change. Settings: −64–+0–+63 206 MODX M Operation Manual Amp EG On the Amp EG screen, you can set the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) for the Part. By setting the Amp EG, you can set how the volume changes from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to when the sound decays. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Filter/Amp → Amp EG AEG Attack (AEG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to when it reaches the maximum. This is specified as an offset value to the Element AEG. Settings: −64–+0–+63 AEG Decay (AEG Decay Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to change after it has reached the maximum. This is specified as an offset value to the Element AEG. Settings: −64–+0–+63 AEG Sustain (AEG Sustain Level) Adjusts the volume that is maintained after the AEG Decay (AEG Decay Time). Settings: −64–+0–+63 AEG Release (AEG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the sound to decay after you have released the key. This is specified as an offset value to the Element AEG. Settings: −64–+0–+63 207 MODX M Operation Manual Effect Routing On the Routing screen, you can set the effect routing for the Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing (1) (1) VCM Rotary Speaker Switch Element (Element Select) Shows the name of the selected Element. When Ex Elem Sw (General/Pitch → Element Settings) is set to Off, or when there are less than eight elements, the numbers 1 to 8 are shown. Settings: 1–128 (up to the Element Count setting) Connect (Element Connection Switch) Sets the Element to be output to Insertion Effect A or Insertion Effect B. Setting this to Thru bypasses the Insertion Effects. Settings: Thru, InsA, InsB 3-band EQ Opens the setting screen for the 3-band EQ. 208 MODX M Operation Manual Expression (Expression Type) Sets the position in the signal flow when using the Expression pedal. Settings: Normal, Pre FX Normal: Applied after the 2-band EQ Pre FX: Applied before the Insertion Effects. This setting is effective when used with non-linear (the sound changing significantly with the input level) effects such as Distortion Exp. Curve (Expression Curve) Sets the way the expression effect is applied with Exp. Curve when Expression Type is set to Pre FX. Settings: Normal, Organ Normal: Volume curve of normal characteristics Organ: Volume curve of the characteristics simulating a vintage organ VCM Rotary Speaker Switch Sets the VCM Rotary Speaker effect, which simulates the characteristics of a rotary speaker by utilizing VCM technology. This parameter is available only when the VCM Rotary Speaker Switch is set to Part 1. Settings: Off, On Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type) Sets the effect routing for Insertion Effect A and Insertion Effect B. The diagram changes accordingly when the settings are changed. Settings: Parallel, Ins A → B, Ins B → A Parallel: (for Normal Part (AWM2) and Drum Part): The output from Insertion Effect A and Insertion Effect B are individually sent to the Master Effect, Master EQ, Reverb, Variation, and Envelope Follower Ins A → B: The output from Insertion Effect A is sent to Insertion Effect B, and the output from Insertion Effect B is sent to the Master Effect, Master EQ, Reverb, Variation, and Envelope Follower. Ins B → A: The output from Insertion Effect B is sent to Insertion Effect A, and the output from Insertion Effect A is sent to the Master Effect, Master EQ, Reverb, Variation, and Envelope Follower. Parallel Ins A → B Ins B → A A B A B A B A (Insertion Effect A Switch) B (Insertion Effect B Switch) Turns Insertion Effect A or B on or off. Settings: Off, On Type (Insertion Effect Type) Sets the Effect Type. Settings: Refer to the Effect types Preset (Insertion Effect Preset) Selects one of the Preset effect parameters for each Effect Type. By selecting a Preset, you can change the way effects are applied. Settings: Refer to the Data List 209 MODX M Operation Manual Side Chain (Insertion Side Chain Part) Modulator (Insertion Modulator Part) Sets the Side Chain Part (or the Modulator depending on the effect type) for the Insertion Effect A or Insertion Effect B. This parameter is not available when the Part itself or Master is set to the Modulator. In that case, the parameter value will be shown in parenthesis as in "(Master)." Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Dry Level Sets the dry level (or the level of the signals not processed by the System Effect) of the selected Part. This parameter is available only when Part Output (Part Output Select) is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 2-band EQ Opens the setting screen for the 2-band EQ. Rev Send (Reverb Send) Sets the level of the signals (or bypass signals) sent from Insertion Effect A or Insertion Effect B to the Reverb Effect. This parameter is available only when Part Output (Part Output Select) is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 Var Send (Variation Send) Sets the level of the signals (or bypass signals) sent from Insertion Effect A or Insertion Effect B to the Variation Effect. This parameter is available only when Part Output (Part Output Select) is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 Envelope Follower Opens the settings screen for the Envelope Follower. Part Output (Part Output Select) Sets the output destination for the audio signals. Settings: MainL&R, (AsgnL&R), USB Stereo, (AsgnL), (AsgnR), USB mono, Off MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and OUTPUT [R] jacks. USB Stereo: Outputs in stereo (channels 1 and 2, to channels 7 and 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal USB mono: Outputs in mono (channels 1 to 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal Off: No output of the audio signal for the Part. NOTE The settings for data compatibility with MONTAGE M are shown below. They are considered Off when set. • AsgnL&R • USB Stereo: USB9&10 – USB29&30 • USB mono: USB9 – USB30 • AsgnL • AsgnR 210 MODX M Operation Manual Ins A, Ins B On the Ins A and Ins B screens, you can set the Insertion Effects. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Ins A [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Ins B The same as Audio In → Ins A, Ins B on the Common Edit screen. 211 MODX M Operation Manual 3-band EQ On the 3-band EQ screen, you can set the Part EQ. EQ can be set before the Insertion Effect. Part EQ Part EQ 3-band EQ Insertion A Insertion B 2-band EQ Part Operation PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → 3-band EQ EQ Low Gain (3band EQ Low Gain) Sets the signal level of the Low band. Settings: −12.00dB – +0.00dB – +12.00dB EQ Low Freq (3band EQ Low Frequency) Sets the frequency of the Low band. Settings: 50.1Hz–2.00kHz EQ Mid Gain (3band EQ Mid Gain) Sets the signal level of the Mid band. Settings: −12.00dB – +0.00dB – +12.00dB EQ Mid Freq (3band EQ Mid Frequency) Sets the frequency of the Mid band. Settings: 139.7Hz–10.1kHz EQ Mid Q (3band EQ Mid Q) Sets the bandwidth of the Mid band. Settings: 0.7–10.3 EQ Hi Gain (3band EQ High Gain) Sets the signal level of the High band. Settings: −12.00dB – +0.00dB – +12.00dB EQ Hi Freq (3band EQ High Frequency) Sets the frequency of the High band. Settings: 503.8Hz–14.0kHz 212 MODX M Operation Manual 2-band EQ On the 2-band EQ screen, you can set the Part EQ. EQ can be set after the Insertion Effect. Part EQ Part EQ 3-band EQ Insertion A Insertion B 2-band EQ Part Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → 2-band EQ EQ1 Type (2band EQ 1 Type) EQ2 Type (2band EQ 2 Type) Selects the desired EQ type. Settings: Thru, LPF, HPF, Low Shelf, Hi Shelf, Peak/Dip Thru: Passes the signals with no effects being applied. LPF: Cuts the signals above the cutoff frequency. HPF: Cuts the signals below the cutoff frequency. Low Shelf: Cuts or boosts the signals below the specified frequency setting. Hi Shelf: Cuts or boosts the signals above the specified frequency setting. Peak/Dip: Cuts or boosts the signals at the specified frequency setting. EQ 1 Gain (2band EQ 1 Gain) EQ 2 Gain (2band EQ 2 Gain) Sets the signal level of the frequency band set in EQ1 Type (2band EQ 1 Type) or EQ2 Type (2band EQ 2 Type). This parameter is not available when the EQ Type is set to Thru, LPF, or HPF. Settings: −12.0dB – +0.0dB – +12.0dB EQ 1 Freq (2band EQ 1 Frequency) EQ 2 Freq (2band EQ 2 Frequency) Sets the frequency to be cut or boosted. This parameter is not available when the EQ Type is set to Thru. Settings: 63.0Hz–18.0kHz 213 MODX M Operation Manual EQ 1 Q (2band EQ 1 Q) EQ 2 Q (2band EQ 2 Q) Sets the bandwidth for cutting or boosting the volume of the frequencies set with EQ1 Type (2band EQ 1 Type) or EQ2 Type (2band EQ 2 Type). This parameter is available only when the EQ Type is set to Peak/Dip. Settings: 0.1–12.0 Output Level (2band EQ Output Level) Sets the output gain of the 2-band EQ. Settings: −12.0dB – +0.0dB – +12.0dB Ins Assign On the Ins Assign screen, you can enable the Part 9 to 16 Insertion Effect. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Ins Assign Active (Active Part) This shows the number of Parts whose Insertion Effect switch is set to On. The number to the right of the slash (/) is the maximum number of Insertion Effects that can be turned On simultaneously. Part 9–16 Enables the Insertion Effect for Parts 9 to 16. Settings: Off, On NOTE The Insertion Effect is always enabled for Parts 1 to 8. 214 MODX M Operation Manual Arpeggio Common On the Common screen, you can set the Arpeggio for the entire Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arpeggio → Common Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch) Sets the Arpeggio for the Part on or off. Settings: Off, On Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Sets the Arpeggio for the Performance on or off. Settings: Off, On Sync Quantize (Arpeggio Sync Quantize Value) Adjusts the timing for starting the next Arpeggio phrase while the first Arpeggio is being played back, when playing back Arpeggio phrases in multiple Parts. When set to Off, the Arpeggio is played back when you play the Part on the keyboard. The value shown here is in clocks. Settings: Off, 60 (thirty-second note), 80 (sixteenth note triplet), 120 (sixteenth note), 160 (eighth note triplet), 240 (eighth note), 320 (quarter note triplet), 480 (quarter note) Arpeggio Group Sets the Arpeggio Group for using the same Arpeggio on multiple Parts. Indicator This Indicator is set to On for the Part that is in the same Arpeggio Group as the selected Part. 215 MODX M Operation Manual Hold (Arpeggio Hold) Enables or disables the Hold function, which continues to repeatedly play back the Arpeggio even after you lift your finger. Settings: Sync-Off, Off, On Sync-Off: Repeats Arpeggio playback in the background while your fingers release the keys and resumes playback when you press any key on the keyboard Off : Plays back the Arpeggio only while any key is being held On: When you press a key, the Arpeggio will repeat even after you lift your finger Change Timing (Arpeggio Change Timing) Sets the timing for changing the Arpeggio type while another Arpeggio phrase is still being played back. You can select Real-time for switching to a new Arpeggio phrase immediately or Measure for switching to a new Arpeggio phrase at the top of the next measure. Settings: Real-time, Measure Key Mode (Arpeggio Key Mode) Sets the way Arpeggio is played back. Settings: Sort, Thru, Direct, Sort+Drct, Thru+Drct Sort: Plays back the same Arpeggio regardless of the order of keys played Thru: Plays back the Arpeggio differently depending on the order of keys played Direct: Does not play back the Arpeggio. Only your keyboard performance will be played. However, if the Arpeggio data includes Control Change (CC) data such as Pan or Brightness, these effects be reflected. This is effective when the Arpeggio type includes Control Change data or when an Arpeggio in the Control category is selected Sort+Drct: Plays back the Arpeggio according to the Sort setting, as well as the notes played on the keyboard Thru+Drct: Plays back the Arpeggio according to the Thru setting, as well as the notes played on the keyboard Loop (Arpeggio Loop) Selects loop (repeat) playback while holding the key on the keyboard, or one-shot playback for the Arpeggio every time you press a key. Settings: Off, On Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only) Sets the Part to be played only with the Arpeggio. The Part set to On will be played by Note On messages sent for the Arpeggio. Settings: Off, On Swing Changes the timing of even-numbered beats (backbeats) counted from the value specified in Quantize Value to add a swing feel to the Arpeggio playback. This setting is useful for creating desired rhythms for playing swing, shuffle, and bounce feels. Settings: −120–+0–+120 +1 and higher: Moved behind the beat -1 and lower: Moved ahead of the beat 0: Does not change the even-numbered beats or add any swing feel Unit (Arpeggio Unit Multiply) Sets the percentage for stretching or compressing the Arpeggio playback time. The subdivision of the beat and the tempo will change when you stretch or compress the playback time, so you can create a completely new feel for the originally selected Arpeggio. Settings: 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 133%, 150%, 200%, 266%, 300%, 400%, Common 200%: The playback time is doubled, and the tempo is halved 100%: The playback time is kept unchanged 50%: The playback time is halved, and the tempo is doubled Common: The value set in the Unit common to all Parts is applied 216 MODX M Operation Manual Quantize Value (Arpeggio Quantize Value) Sets the reference note for using quantize and swing. The value shown here is in clocks. Settings: Off, 60 (thirty-second note), 80 (sixteenth note triplet), 120 (sixteenth note), 160 (eighth note triplet), 240 (eighth note), 320 (quarter note triplet), 480 (quarter note) Qntz Strength (Arpeggio Quantize Strength) Sets the strength of the Quantize Value (Arpeggio Quantize Value) setting (or how close the notes are to the reference note set in Quantize Value). A setting of 100% shifts the timing completely to that set in Quantize Value, while a setting of 0% results in no quantization. Settings: 0%–100% Gate Time Rate (Arpeggio Gate Time Rate) Sets the Gate Time (or time length for playing the notes) for Arpeggio playback. If the Gate Time is set to a value of 0 as a result, the setting will be changed to a value of 1. Settings: 0%–200% Velocity Rate (Arpeggio Velocity Rate) Sets the velocity rate of the Arpeggio playback. If the Velocity is set to the value of 0 as a result, the setting will be changed to a value of 1. When it is set to a value larger than 128, the setting will be changed to a value of 127. Settings: 0%–200% Arp Vel Limit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit) Sets the velocity range (lowest and highest values) for Arpeggio playback. When this is set so that the higher value is first and the lower value is second (for example, 93 to 34), the Arpeggio is played only for velocities of 1 to 34 and 93 to 127. Settings: 1–127 Arp Note Limit (Arpeggio Note Limit) Sets the note range (the lowest and the highest notes) for Arpeggio playback. When the first note specified is higher than the second (for example, C5 to C4), the notes in the ranges C−2 to C4 and C5 to G8 will be played. Settings: C−2–G8 Octave Shift (Arpeggio Output Octave Shift) Shifts the pitch of the Arpeggio in octaves. Settings: −10–+0–+10 Octave Range (Arpeggio Octave Range) Shifts the range of the Arpeggio in octaves. Settings: −3–+0–+3 Arp Select (Arpeggio Select) Selects the Arpeggio. Settings: 1–8 217 MODX M Operation Manual Individual On the Individual screen, you can set the Arpeggio type parameters for Arp Select (Arpeggio Select) 1–8. Tapping the Arpeggio Type setting calls up the context menu. Selecting Category Search opens the Arpeggio Category Search screen. Selecting Number allows you to specify the Arpeggio Type by number. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arpeggio → Individual (When a selected Part is something other than Common) [SHIFT] + [ARP] Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch) Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Sync Quantize (Arpeggio Sync Quantize Value) Arpeggio Group Indicator The same as the Common screen. Arp (Arpeggio Select) Switches the Arpeggio Select. Settings: 1–8 Category (Arpeggio Category) Shows the Category of the selected Arpeggio. Settings: Refer to the Data List Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category) Shows the Sub category of the selected Arpeggio. Settings: Refer to the Data List Name (Arpeggio Name) Shows the name of the selected Arpeggio. Settings: Refer to the Data List 218 MODX M Operation Manual Velocity (Arpeggio Velocity Rate) Sets the velocity rate of the Arpeggio playback. If the Velocity is set to the value of 0 as a result, the setting will be changed to a value of 1. When it is set to a value larger than 128, the setting will be changed to a value of 127. Settings: −100%–+0%–+100% Gate Time (Arpeggio Gate Time Rate) Sets the Gate Time (or time length for playing the notes) for Arpeggio playback. If the Gate Time is set to a value of 0 as a result, the setting will be changed to a value of 1. Settings: −100%–+0%–+100% Advanced On the Advanced screen, you can set the Arpeggio parameters. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arpeggio → Advanced Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch) Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Sync Quantize (Arpeggio Sync Quantize Value) Arpeggio Group Indicator The same as the Common screen. Accent Vel Threshold (Arpeggio Accent Velocity Threshold) Sets the velocity level for triggering an Accent Phrase. Accent Phrases are sequence phrases that have been programmed to certain types of Arpeggio patterns to be played back only when the keys are played at a fast velocity. When you press a key at a velocity greater than the set value, the Accent Phrase will be played back. If you press a key but it the Accent Phrase doesn't play back, try setting it a little lower and then pressing the key again. Settings: Off, 1–127 NOTE For more information on the Arpeggio types that support Accent Phrases, refer to the Data List. 219 MODX M Operation Manual Accent Start Quantize (Arpeggio Accent Start Quantize) Sets the Accent Phrase to be triggered when a key is pressed at the velocity value larger than the Accent Vel Threshold (Arpeggio Accent Velocity Threshold) (set to On) or triggered at the timing set in the selected Arpeggio type (set to Off). Settings: Off, On Random SFX (Arpeggio Random SFX) Enables the Random SFX function. The Random SFX function triggers special sounds included in some Arpeggio types. There are various types of special sounds you can use according to the Arpeggio Type. For example, you can use this function to add guitar fret noises when you release your finger from the key. Settings: Off, On NOTE For more information on the Arpeggio types that support this function, refer to the Data List. Random SFX Velocity Offset (Arpeggio Random SFX Velocity Offset) Sets the velocity value for triggering special sounds for the Random SFX function. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Random SFX Key On Ctrl (Arpeggio Random SFX Key On Control) Sets special sounds to be triggered by the velocity level for pressing keys or by the velocity level automatically set. Settings: Off, On Velocity Mode (Arpeggio Velocity Mode) Sets the velocity for playing back the Arpeggio. Settings: Original, Thru Original: Follows the velocity level set in the Arpeggio Type. Thru: Follows the velocity level of the keystroke Trigger Mode (Arpeggio Trigger Mode) Switches the Arpeggio playback method. Settings: Gate, Toggle Gate: Starts the Arpeggio playback by pressing a key, and stops it by releasing the key Toggle: Alternates starting and stopping the Arpeggio playback by pressing a key Arp Select (Arpeggio Select) Switches the Arpeggio Select. Settings: 1–8 220 MODX M Operation Manual Motion Seq Common On the Common screen, you can set the Motion Sequencer parameters for the entire Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Motion Seq → Common (When a selected Part is something other than Common) [SHIFT] + [MSEQ] Common Swing (Common Swing Offset) Sets the swing value of the Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for the Performance. This is specified as an offset value to the Part Swing. Settings: −120–+0–+120 Common Unit (Common Unit Multiply) Sets the percentage for stretching or compressing the Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance. This parameter affects Lanes for which Unit (Lane Unit Multiply) is set to Common. The subdivision of the beat and the tempo will change when you stretch or compress playback time, so you can create a completely new feel for the Motion Sequence you have originally selected. Settings: 50%–400% 200%: The playback time is doubled, and the tempo is halved 100%: The playback time is kept unchanged 50%: The playback time is halved, and the tempo is doubled Common Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude Performance Offset) Sets the Motion Sequencer Amplitude (or how much the Sequence changes) for the entire Performance. This parameter value offsets the Amplitude of the Lanes within the Part if MS FX (Lane FX Receive) is set to On. This is specified as an offset value to the Part Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude) of each Part. Settings: −127–+0–+127 221 MODX M Operation Manual Common Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape Performance Offset) Sets the Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape (or the shape of the step curve) for the Performance. This parameter value offsets the parameters for the Lanes within the Part if MS FX (Lane FX Receive) is set to On for the lane and Control (Motion Sequence Step Curve Shape Control Switch) is set to On. This is specified as an offset value to the Part Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape) of each Part. Settings: −100–+0–+100 Common Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness Performance Offset) Sets the Motion Sequence Smoothness (or the smoothness of the changes in the sequence over time) for the entire Performance. This parameter value offsets the Smoothness of the Lanes within the Part if MS FX (Lane FX Receive) is set to On for the Lane. This is specified as an offset value to the Part Motion Seq Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness) of each Part. Settings: −127–+0–+127 Common Random (Common Motion Sequencer Randomness Performance Offset) Sets the Motion Sequencer Randomness (or the randomness of the changes in the step value of the sequence) for the entire Performance. This parameter value offsets the Randomness of the Lanes within the Performance if MS FX (Lane FX Receive) is set to On for the Lane. This is specified as an offset value to the Part Motion Seq Random (Part Motion Sequencer Randomness) of each Part. Settings: −127–+0–+127 Part Swing (Part Swing) Changes the timing of the even-numbered beats (backbeats) counted from the value specified in MS Grid to add a swing feel to the Motion Sequencer playback. This setting is useful for creating desired rhythms for playing swing, shuffle, and bounce feels. Settings: −120–+0–+120 +1 and higher: Moved behind the beat 0: Does not change the even-numbered beats or add any swing feel -1 and lower: Moved ahead of the beat Part Unit (Arpeggio Unit Multiply) Sets the percentage for stretching or compressing the Arpeggio playback time for the Part. The parameter setting is effective when the Unit (Lane Unit Multiply) of each Lane is set to Arp. Settings: 50%–400%, Common 200%: The playback time is doubled, and the tempo is halved 100%: The playback time is kept unchanged 50%: The playback time is halved, and the tempo is doubled Common: The value set in the Unit common to all Parts is applied Part Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude) Sets the Motion Sequencer Amplitude (or how much the Sequence changes) for the Part. This parameter value offsets the Amplitude of the Lanes within the Part if the MS FX (Lane FX Receive) is set to On for the lane. This is specified as an offset value to the Amplitude (Motion Sequence Amplitude) for each Lane. Settings: −127–+0–+127 Part Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape) Sets the Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape (or the shape of the step curve) for the Part. This parameter value offsets the parameters for the Lanes within the Part if MS FX (Lane FX Receive) is set to On for the lane and Control (Motion Sequence Step Curve Shape Control Switch) is set to On. This is specified as an offset value to the Prm (Motion Sequence Step Curve Parameter) for each Lane. Settings: −100–+0–+100 222 MODX M Operation Manual Part Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Sets the Motion Sequencer Smoothness for the Part. This parameter value offsets the Smoothness of the Lanes within the Part if MS FX (Lane FX Receive) is set to On for the Lane. This is specified as an offset value to the Smooth (Motion Sequence Smoothness) for each Lane. Settings: −127–+0–+127 Part Random (Part Motion Sequencer Randomness) Sets the Motion Sequencer Randomness for the Part. Sets randomness of the changes in the Step value of the sequence. Settings: 0–127 View Lane Sets the Lane to show when the View Mode of the Home screen is set to Motion Seq View. MS Select (Motion Sequence Select) Selects the Motion Sequence to playback. Settings: 1–8 223 MODX M Operation Manual Lane On the Lane screen, you can set the parameters for each Motion Sequencer Lane. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Motion Seq → Lane Motion Seq Master Sw (Motion Sequencer Master Switch) Sets the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on or off. Settings: Off, On Motion Seq Part Sw (Motion Sequencer Part Switch) Sets the Motion Sequencer of the Part on or off. Settings: Off, On Lane Select Selects a Lane. Settings: 1–4 LaneSw (Lane Switch) Sets each Lane on or off. You can use up to four Motion Sequencer lanes in one Part, or up to eight lanes in an entire Performance. When set to Off, the parameters for that lane will not be shown. Settings: Off, On MS FX (Lane FX Receive) Sets the selected Lane to receive the signals from the knobs for changing the Motion Sequencer parameters. Settings: Off, On Trigger (Lane Trigger Receive) Sets the selected Lane to receive the signals from the [MSEQ TRIGGER] button. When set to On, the Motion Sequence will not be played back unless you press the [MSEQ TRIGGER] button. Settings: Off, On 224 MODX M Operation Manual Sequence Select (Motion Sequence Select) Changes the Motion Sequence selection. Settings: 1–8 Target Sequence Indicates the Lane and the Sequence. Edit Sequence The Motion Sequence Edit screen will open. You can create a sequence of up to 16 steps. Motion Seq Step Value Sets the value for each step in the Motion Sequence. You can use Control sliders 1 to 8 to change the values for Steps 1 to 8 and Steps 9 to 16, depending on the cursor position. Settings: 0–127 „ Sync/Speed Tabs Sync (Lane Sync) Sets the playback of the Motion Sequence set to the Destination in the Control Assign screen to synchronize to the Performance tempo, beat, or arpeggio. Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat, Arp, Lane1 (when Lane2–4 are selected) Off: Plays back the Lane Motion Sequencer alone Tempo: Plays back the Lane Motion Sequencer at the Performance tempo. Beat: Plays back in sync with the beat. Arp: Plays back the Lane Motion Sequencer in sync with the top of the Arpeggio playback. Lane1: Plays back the Lane Motion Sequencer in sync with Lane 1 • When Sync is set to Off Speed (Lane Speed) Sets the playback speed for the Motion Sequence. This parameter is available when Sync (Lane Sync) is set to Off. Settings: 0–127 Delay Time (Lane Key On Delay Time Length) Sets the delay time for starting the playback of the Motion Sequence. Settings: 0–127 Fade In Time (Lane Fade In Time Length) Sets the time for the Motion Sequence to reach maximum amplitude. Settings: 0–127 225 MODX M Operation Manual • When Sync is set to something other than Off Unit (Lane Unit Multiply) Sets the percentage for stretching or compressing the Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Lane. This parameter is available when Sync (Lane Sync) is set to Tempo, Beat, or Arp. Settings: 50%–6400%, Common, Arp 200%: The playback time is doubled, and the tempo is halved 100%: The playback time is kept unchanged 50%: The playback time is halved, and the tempo is doubled Common: The value set in the Unit common to all Parts is applied Arp: The value set in the Unit of the Part Arpeggio is applied Delay Steps (Lane Key On Delay Step) Sets the delay time for starting the playback of the Motion Sequence when Sync (Lane Sync) is set to Tempo, Beat, or Arp. Settings: 0–32 Fade In Steps (Lane Fade In Step Length) Sets the time to reach the maximum amplitude for the Motion Sequence when Sync (Lane Sync) is set to Tempo, Beat, Arp, or Lane1. Settings: 0–32 Lane Vel Limit (Lane Velocity Limit) Sets the velocity range (lowest and highest values) for playing back the Motion Sequence of the selected Lane. This parameter is available when Sync (Lane Sync) is set to Off, Tempo, Beat, or Arp. When the Velocity Limit is set to a range from the highest value to the lowest value, the Motion Sequence will be played back in two velocity ranges: from the maximum to the highest value, and from the lowest value to the minimum. Settings: 1–127 „ Loop/Length Tabs Key On Reset (Lane Key On Reset) Resets the Motion Sequence playback when you press any key on the keyboard. This parameter is available when Sync (Lane Sync) is set to Off, Tempo, or Beat. This parameter is not available when Trigger is set to On. Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On Each-On: Each time you play any note, the sequence will be reset and the playback starts from the beginning 1st-On: Playback starts from the beginning at the first note you play. When the second note is played while the first note is held, playback will not be reset Loop (Lane Loop) Sets the Motion Sequence to loop playback (in repeats) or one-shot playback. This parameter is available when Sync (Lane Sync) is set to Off, Tempo, Beat, or Arp. Settings: Off, On Loop Start (Motion Sequence Loop Start) Sets the step for starting playback the second time or later when repeating Motion Sequence playback. Settings: 1–Length (Motion Sequence Length) Length (Motion Sequence Length) Sets the number of steps in the Motion Sequence. Settings: Loop Start (Motion Sequence Loop Start)–16 MS Grid (Motion Sequencer Grid) Sets the length of a step in the Motion Sequence. Settings: 60, 80, 120, 160, 240, 320, 480 226 MODX M Operation Manual Mod/Control Control Assign On the Control Assign screen, you can set the Controllers for the Part. By assigning a parameter (Destination) to a controller (Source), you can control the sound in a large variety of ways. You can use physical controllers such as the Pitch Bend wheel and knobs as well as the Motion Sequencer and Envelope Follower. Up to 32 controllers can be assigned simultaneously to a Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Mod/Control → Control Assign When Display Filter is set to Super Knob, tapping [+] shows the message in the upper area of the display and automatically adds the Control Assign settings for the Common Edit. NOTE When there are no assignable knobs available, [+] will not be shown. Auto Select Switches the Auto Select setting of the Display Filter on or off. When set to On, moving the controller you wish to set to Source automatically sets the controller to the Display Filter. Settings: Off, On Display Filter Selects the controller for showing the settings on the screen. When you select Super Knob, all settings having the Super Knob Link set to On will be shown. Settings: PitchBend, ModWheel, Ch. AT, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1–8, Super Knob, AsgnSw 1, AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst, All NOTE If the controller set to Display Filter is used by other Parts, the corresponding PART buttons will flash. 227 MODX M Operation Manual Edit Pitch Bend This calls up the Pitch settings screen. General/Pitch → Pitch will open. This parameter is not shown when Source is set to something other than PitchBend. Display Name (Assignable Knob Name) This allows you to enter a new name for Knobs 1 to 8. This parameter is not shown when Source is set to something other than AsgnKnob 1–8. Edit Motion Sequencer Opens Motion Seq → Lane for the selected Part. You can create a sequence of up to 16 steps. This parameter is not shown when Source is set to something other than MS Lane 1–4. Edit Envelope Follower Opens the settings screen for the Envelope Follower. This parameter is not shown when Source is set to something other than EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, or EnvFollowMst. Page Selects the next page when there are more than four Destinations. The next page does not appear when the Destinations are four or fewer. Settings: 1–8 Destination Sets the parameter to the Destination. Tap [+] to add a Destination. Source Sets the controller for controlling the parameters set to the Destination. Settings: PitchBend, ModWheel, Ch. AT, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1–8, AsgnSw 1, AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst Element Sw (Element Switch) 1–128 This parameter is shown only when the selected Destination is related to Elements. You can set the controller setting for each Element on or off. When General/Pitch → Element Settings Ex Elem Sw is set to On, you can select a different group of eight displayed switch numbers. However, the actual range of numbers you can use in the switch depends on the value set in the Element Count on the General/Pitch → Element Settings screen. (Example: If the Element Count is set to 30, the Groups that can be selected are 25–32). Settings: (Each switch) Off, On, (Displayed switch numbers changed) 1–8, 9–16, ..., 121–128 228 MODX M Operation Manual Curve Type Sets the change curve of the parameter set to Destination. The horizontal axis represents the controller value set in Source while the vertical axis represents the parameter value set in Destination. Settings: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold, Harmonic, Steps (When a preset bank is selected) Init Curve 1–32 (When a user bank is selected) Curve within Library 1–24 (When loading a Library file) Standard Sigmoid Threshold Bell Dogleg FM AM M Discrete Saw Smooth Saw Triangle Square Trapezoid Tilt Sine Bounce Harmonic Steps Resonance Sequence Hold Polarity (Curve Polarity) Sets the polarity of the curve set in Curve Type. Settings: Uni, Bi Uni: Parameter changes occur only within the positive range or the negative range according to the curve shape Bi: Parameter changes occur both in positive and negative ranges according to the curve shape Ratio (Curve Ratio) Sets the ratio of the parameter values. Settings: −128–+0–+127 Param 1 (Curve Parameter 1) Param 2 (Curve Parameter 2) Adjusts the curve shape. This setting is not available depending on the curve type. Destination to Name Copies the parameters set to Destination to Display Name. This parameter is not shown when Source is set to something other than AsgnKnob 1–8. Edit User Curve The User Curve Edit screen will open. Edit Common Control Assign Opens Control → Control Assign on the Common Edit screen. Delete Deletes the selected Destination. 229 MODX M Operation Manual After Touch Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Mod/Control → After Touch Destination Sets the parameter for the Destination. Tap [+] to add a Destination. Source Cannot be changed from this screen. This parameter is fixed to Poly AT. Element Sw (Element Switch) 1–128 Curve Type Polarity (Curve Polarity) Ratio (Curve Ratio) Edit User Curve Delete The same as Mod/Control → Control Assign. 230 MODX M Operation Manual Tx/Rx Switch On the Tx/Rx Switch screen, you can set the switch for transmitting or receiving MIDI messages (such as Control Change) on or off. NOTE When CC (Control Change) is set to Off, the parameters related to Control Change messages cannot be set. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Mod/Control → Tx/Rx Switch Transmit Sw (Transmit Switch) Shows the transmit switch. This parameter is available only when Part Mode is set to External or when Keyboard Sw is set to Off. Receive Sw (Receive Switch) Shows the receive switch. Keyboard Sw (Keyboard Control Switch) Sets the Parts to be played simultaneously. When you select a Part with Common or Keyboard Sw set to On and play the keyboard, the Parts with Keyboard Sw set to On will play simultaneously. If the Keyboard Sw for the Part is set to Off, when you play the keyboard with that Part selected, those sounds will be played. Settings: Off, On Tx/Rx Ch (Transmit/Receive Channel) Sets the channel for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages when Part Mode is set to Internal. Settings: Ch1–Ch16, Off Transmit Ch. Sets the channel for transmitting MIDI messages when Part Mode is set to External. Settings: Ch1–Ch16 MIDI I/O Ch. (MIDI In-Out Channel) Shows the channel for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages. 231 MODX M Operation Manual Zone Settings This calls up the Zone settings screen. The same as General/Pitch → Zone Settings. PC (Program Change) Sets the transmission and reception of Program Change messages on or off. Settings: Off, On BankSelect (Bank Select) Sets the transmission and reception of Bank Select MSB and LSB messages on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On Pitch Bend Sets the transmission and reception of MIDI Pitch Bend messages on or off. Settings: Off, On CAT (Channel After Touch) Sets the transmission and reception of Channel Aftertouch on or off. Settings: Off, On PAT (Polyphonic After Touch) Sets the transmission and reception of Polyphonic Aftertouch on or off. Settings: Off, On CC (Control Change) Sets the transmission and reception of Control Change messages on or off. Settings: Off, On Vol/Exp (Volume/Expression) Sets the transmission and reception of the Volume setting on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On Pan Sets the transmission and reception of the Pan setting on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On MW (Modulation Wheel) Sets the transmission and reception of MIDI Modulation wheel messages on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On Sustain Sets the transmission and reception of MIDI Sustain and Sostenuto messages on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On FC1 (Foot Controller 1) FC2 (Foot Controller 2) Sets the transmission and reception of MIDI messages for the separately sold foot controllers on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On 232 MODX M Operation Manual FS (Foot Switch) Sets the transmission and reception of MIDI messages for the separately sold foot switch on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On A. Sw 1 (Assignable Function Switch 1) A. Sw 2 (Assignable Function Switch 2) Sets the transmission and reception of MIDI messages for the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On MS Trigger (Motion Sequencer Trigger) Sets the transmission and reception of MIDI messages for the [MSEQ TRIGGER] button on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On RB (Ribbon Controller) Sets the transmission and reception of MIDI Ribbon Controller messages on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On BC (Breath Controller) Sets the transmission and reception of MIDI Breath Controller messages on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On Porta Sw (Portamento Switch) Sets the transmission and reception of MIDI messages for the [PORTAMENTO] button on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On Porta Time (Portamento Time) Sets the transmission and reception of MIDI messages for the PORTAMENTO [TIME] knob on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On A. Knob 1–8 (Assignable Knob) Sets the transmission and reception of MIDI messages for Knobs 1 to 8 on or off. This parameter is not available when CC (Control Change) is set to Off. Settings: Off, On 233 MODX M Operation Manual Control Settings Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Mod/Control → Control Settings Slider Direction Sets the direction of the Control sliders 1 to 8 for this Part when the slider Mode is set to ELEM/OP/OSC. When set to Reverse, the volume controls on the screen will change to organ sliders. The organ sliders will be shown when you select a Part and set the View Mode to Part Info. Settings: Normal (up from the bottom), Reverse (down from the top) 234 MODX M Operation Manual Part LFO On the Part LFO screen, you can set the Part LFO. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Mod/Control → Part LFO LFO Wave Selects the LFO Wave and sets the type of cyclical changes to the LFOs. Settings: Triangle, Triangle+, Saw Up, Saw Down, Squ1/4, Squ1/3, Square, Squ2/3, Squ3/4, Trapezoid, S/H1, S/H2, User Edit User LFO The User LFO Edit screen will open. You can create an LFO waveform of up to 16 steps. • Cycle Sets the number of LFO steps. Settings: 2 steps, 3 steps, 4 steps, 6 steps, 8 steps, 12 steps, 16 steps • Slope Sets the changes to the slope of the waveform currently shown on the screen. Settings: Off (no slope), Up, Down, Up&Down 235 MODX M Operation Manual • User LFO Step Value Sets the value for each step. Settings: −64–+0–+63 • Template Selects the template for the LFO waveform. Tempo Sync (LFO Tempo Sync) Sets the speed of the LFO Wave changes to synchronize to Arpeggio or Song playback. Settings: Off (not synchronized), On (synchronized) • When set to Off Speed (LFO Speed) Sets the speed of LFO Wave changes. This parameter is not available when Tempo Sync (LFO Tempo Sync) is set to On. Settings: 0–63 Random Speed (Part LFO Random Speed Depth) Changes the LFO Speed randomly. This parameter is not available when Tempo Sync (LFO Tempo Sync) is set to On. Settings: 0–127 • When set to On Tempo Speed (LFO Tempo Speed) Sets the speed of LFO Wave changes by using musical note values. Settings: 1/16 (sixteenth notes), 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8 (eighth notes), 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot. (dotted eighth notes), 1/4 (quarter notes), 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2 (half notes), Whole Tri. (whole-note triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 × 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 5 quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 16 (sixteen quarter-notes to the beat), 1/4 × 32 (thirty-two quarter-notes to the beat), 1/4 × 64 (sixty- four quarter-notes to the beat) Delay (LFO Delay Time) Sets the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into effect. The larger the value, the longer the delay time for the LFO to come into effect. Settings: 0–127 236 MODX M Operation Manual Fade In (LFO Fade In Time) Sets the time length for the LFO effect to fade in after you have released the key and the delay time set in Delay (LFO Delay Time) has elapsed. The larger the value, the longer it takes for the LFO effect to reach the maximum. Settings: 0–127 0: The LFO changes to the maximum value without any fade-ins. When the value is small Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time When the value is large Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time Hold (LFO Hold Time) Sets the time for maintaining the LFO effect after the maximum level has been reached. Settings: 0–126, Hold Hold: Does not fade out Hold Maximum Key On Time 237 MODX M Operation Manual Fade Out (LFO Fade Out time) Sets the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade out after the hold time set in Hold (LFO Hold Time) has elapsed. The larger the value, the longer it takes for the LFO effect to fade out. Settings: 0–127 When the value is small Fade-Out Maximum Hold Key On Time When the value is large Fade-Out Maximum Hold Key On Time Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset) Resets the oscillation of the LFO when a key is pressed. Settings: Off, Each-on, 1st-on When set to Off Does not reset the oscillation of the LFO. Pressing a key starts the LFO wave at whatever phase the LFO happens to be at that moment. Key On Time When set to Each-on Resets the oscillation of LFO every time a key is pressed and starts the waveform at the phase specified by the Phase parameter. Key On (first note) Key On (second note) Time When set to 1st-on Resets the oscillation of LFO every time a key is pressed and starts the waveform at the phase specified by the Phase parameter. When the second note is played while the first note is held, playback will not be reset. Key On (first note) Key On (second note) Time 238 MODX M Operation Manual Loop (LFO Loop Switch) Sets the LFO Wave to loop (repeat) playback or one-shot playback. Settings: Off, On Phase (LFO Phase) You can set the initial phase for the time the LFO Wave is reset. Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 270° Phase Time Level 0° 90° 120° 240° 180° 270° Element Phase Offset (LFO Element Phrase Offset) Sets the offset value to Phase (LFO Phase) for each Element. Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 270° Element (Display Element) You can select a different number for the group of four elements corresponding to Element Phase Offset and Element Depth Ratio when General/Pitch → Element Settings Ex Elem Sw is On. However, the actual range of numbers you can use in the switch depends on the value set in the Element Count on the General/Pitch → Element Settings screen (Example: If the Element Count is set to 30, the Groups that can be selected are 29–32). Settings: 1–4, 5–8, ..., 125–128 Element Phase Offset (LFO Element Phase Offset) Sets the offset value to Phase (LFO Phase) for each Element. You can set the initial phase for each Element when LFO Wave is reset. When the Ex Elem Sw on the General/Pitch → Element Settings screen is set to On, you can change the element number by changing the Element (Display Element). Up to the value set in General/Pitch → Element Settings Element Count is shown. Element Depth Ratio (LFO Element Depth Ratio) Adjusts the Depth for each Element. Set this parameter to Off to turn off the LFO. This parameter is shown only when the selected Destination is related to Elements. When General/Pitch → Element Settings Ex Elem Sw is set to On, the adjusted Depth element number can be changed with Element (Display Element). Up to the value set in General/Pitch → Element Settings Element Count is shown. Settings: Off, 0–127 Destination (LFO Destination) Sets the function to be controlled by the LFO Wave. Settings: Insertion Effect A Parameter 1–24, Insertion Effect B Parameter 1–24, Level, Pitch, Cutoff, Resonance, Pan, E.LFO Speed Depth (LFO Depth) Sets the depth of LFO Wave control for each Destination. Settings: 0–127 239 MODX M Operation Manual Part Edit (AWM2) Element Edit Screens A Normal Part (AWM2) consists of up to 128 elements. Part Edit (AWM2) includes Part Common Edit (for setting parameters for the entire Part) and Element Edit (for setting parameters for each Element in the Part). Osc/Tune On the Osc/Tune screen, you can set the Oscillator for the Element. Here, you can select the Waveform used as the basis for the sound and set the key range and velocity range of the Element. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Element selection → Osc/Tune Element Switch Sets the selected Element on or off. Settings: Off, On Bank (Waveform Bank) Number (Waveform Number) Category (Waveform Category) Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category) Waveform Name Shows the name of the Waveform selected for the Element. Bank indicates the type of Waveform (Preset, User, and Library) assigned to the Element. Settings: Refer to the Data List 240 MODX M Operation Manual XA Control XA (Expanded Articulation) is a function for creating realistic sounds like those on acoustic instruments as well as creating new synth sounds. You can create such sounds by setting the XA Control to specify the way the Element is played. Settings: Normal, Legato, Key Off, Cycle, Random, A.Sw Off, A.Sw1 On, A.Sw2 On Normal: Played as a normal Element. Legato: Played when Mono/Poly is set to Mono. When you play in Legato, the Element set to Legato will be played instead of the Element set to Normal Key Off: Played when a finger is lifted off from the key Cycle: Played when there are a series of Elements set in Cycle Random: Plays the Elements randomly when multiple Elements are set to Random A.Sw Off: Played when both [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are set to Off. A.Sw1 On: Played when the [ASSIGN 1] button is set to On. A.Sw2 On: Played when the [ASSIGN 2] button is set to On. Example of XA Control setting • Creating smooth legato Make the Element alternate between one element with XA Control set to Normal and another element with the XA Control set to Legato. • Creating the sound that is produced when you release a key Create an Element with XA Control set to Key Off. • Creating randomness for the same note Make the Element with XA Control set to Cycle and another one with XA Control set to Random. • Producing sounds unique to acoustic instruments, such harmonics and palm mute on the guitar, flutter-tonguing on the flute, and growl on the saxophone Set up an Element with XA Control set to A.Sw Off, A.Sw1 On, or A.Sw2 On, and control from the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons on the top panel. NOTE The [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons can be set to On or Off by sending the Control Change number set in Control → Control Number on the Common Edit screen from an external device. Elem Group (Element Group Number) This parameter is for sorting Elements having the same XA Control setting into groups. When XA Control of all Elements is set to Normal, this setting is not effective. Settings: 1–8 Elem Connect (Element Connection Switch) Sets the output of the Element to Insertion Effect A or Insertion Effect B. Setting it to Thru bypasses the Insertion Effects. Settings: Thru, InsA, InsB New Waveform Loads an audio file saved to USB flash drive as a Waveform. Edit Waveform appears when a Waveform is loaded. Edit Waveform The Waveform Edit screen will open. 241 MODX M Operation Manual Coarse (Coarse Tune) Shifts the pitch of the Element in semitones. Settings: −48–+0–+48 Fine (Fine Tune) Finely adjusts the pitch of the Element. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the pitch change responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: −64–+0–63 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the higher the pitch becomes 0: kept unchanged Negative value: The faster the Velocity, the lower the pitch becomes Fine/Key (Fine Tune Key Follow Sensitivity) Sets how the pitch change in the Fine Tuning responds to the position of the key. Settings: −64–+0–63 Positive value: The pitch goes down when you press a key in the bass section, and the pitch goes up when you press a key in the treble section Negative value: The pitch goes up when you press a key in the bass section, and the pitch goes down when you press a key in the treble section Random (Random Pitch Depth) Changes the pitch of the Element randomly each time a key is pressed. Set the parameter to a larger value to create more pitch changes. When the value is set to 0, the pitch is kept unchanged. Settings: 0–127 Vel Cross Fade (Velocity Cross Fade) Sets the output level of the Oscillator to become lower as keystroke Velocity values outside the Velocity Limit become further from the value set in Velocity Limit. The larger the value, the more gradually the way the output level of the Oscillator decreases. When set to 0, no sound is produced if the Velocity is outside the Velocity Limit. Settings: 0–127 When Level/Vel is set to +0 Output Velocity Velocity Limit Low (1) (2) Output Velocity Velocity Limit Low Vel Cross Fade = 0 (1) When a larger value is used, the slope will be shifted to the left (2) When set to 0, no sound is produced if the Velocity is outside the Velocity Limit 242 MODX M Operation Manual Key On Delay Tempo Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch) Sets the timing of the Key On Delay to synchronize with the tempo. Settings: Off, On Key On Delay Length (Key On Delay Time Length) Sets the delay time from when the moment the key is pressed to when sound is produced. This parameter is not available when Key On Delay Tempo Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch) is set to On. Settings: 0–127 Length (Key On Delay Note Length) You can set the timing for Key On Delay by using musical note values. This parameter is available when Key On Delay Tempo Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch) is set to On. Settings: 1/16 (sixteenth notes), 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8 (eighth notes), 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot. (dotted eighth notes), 1/4 (quarter notes), 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2 (half notes), Whole Tri. (whole-note triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 × 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 5 (quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter notes to the beat) Velocity Limit Sets the velocity range (lowest and highest values) for playing the Element wave. When this is set so that the higher value is first and the lower value is second (for example, 93 to 34), the Element sounds only for velocities of 1 to 34 and 93 to 127. Settings: 1–127 Note Limit Sets the note range (lowest and highest notes) for the Element. When the first note specified is higher than the second (for example, C5 to C4), the Element is played in the ranges C2 to C4 and C5 to G8. Settings: C−2–G8 Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Sets the reference key (note) for Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity). The key set with the note number here is played at the normal pitch regardless of the Pitch/Key setting. Settings: C−2–G8 243 MODX M Operation Manual Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity) Sets the difference in pitch between two adjacent keys. The reference note is specified by Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key). This parameter is useful for playing unpitched sounds, such as special effects, or for playing a percussion instrument as a Normal Part, or for any other cases where the pitch difference does not have to be in semitones. Settings: −200%–+0%–+200% +100% (normal setting): Pitch difference between the two keys next to each other is set to a semitone 0%: No pitch difference between the two keys, and all keys are played at the pitch set in Center Key Negative value: Sets an opposite pitch response such that lower notes result in higher pitch, and higher notes result in lower pitch. Pitch/Key and Center Key (2) (1) (3) (4) (5) + – High +100% +150% +50% Low (1) Key (2) Amount of change in pitch (3) Center Key (4) The pitch difference between adjacent keys becomes larger (5) The pitch difference between adjacent keys becomes smaller 244 MODX M Operation Manual Waveform Edit Opens the Waveform Edit screen. Here, you can set the various Key Banks that make up a Waveform. „ Key Banks A Key Bank is digital data comprised of a short audio segment, such as vocals or other sounds, loaded into the instrument. It has the same characteristics as a .wav file; however, to avoid confusion a different name is used to distinguish it from the Waveform. „ Key Banks and Waveforms Key Banks are always saved as a part of a Waveform. A Waveform can contain multiple Key Banks, allowing you to save dozens of Key Banks in a single Waveform. However, if all of the Key Banks sound simultaneously, it would become unmanageable, so you can set the range of keys (Note Limit) and velocity range (Velocity Limit) that will sound for each Key Bank. By setting up multiple Key Banks, you can play various Key Bank sounds depending on the section of the keyboard you use and the strength of your keystroke. Example of Key Bank and Waveform setup Velocity Waveform Key Bank 1 Key Number (Note Number) 40 127 D ♯ 2 A ♯ 2 G ♯ 3 F4 Key Bank 2 Key Bank 4 Key Bank 3 Key Bank 5 „ Parts and waveforms Waveforms can be incorporated into Parts and played on the keyboard. You can assign one waveform per element to a part using Part Edit (AWM2), Element Edit, Drum Part Edit (AWM2) and Key Edit. 245 MODX M Operation Manual Waveform Shows the name of the selected Waveform. Category (Waveform Category) Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category) Sets the Main category and Sub category of the selected Waveform. Settings: Refer to the Data List Name (Waveform Name) You can save the Waveform you are editing under a new name, You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Total Shows the number of Key Banks in the waveform and the total size of the data capacity. Keybank (Keybank Number) Shows the Key Bank number. Size (Keybank Size) Shows the total size of data capacity. Channel (Keybank Channel) Shows whether the Key Bank is stereo or mono. Velocity Limit Sets the velocity range (lowest and highest values) for playing the Key Bank. Settings: 1–127 Note Limit Sets the note range (lowest and highest notes) for playing the Key Bank. Settings: 1–127 Center Note Sets the key (pitch) of the original waveform data. Settings: C−2–G8 Volume Sets the volume of the Key Bank. Settings: 0–255 Pan Sets the Pan position (in the stereo field) of the Key Bank. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 Tune Coarse (Coarse Tune) Shifts the pitch of the Key Bank in semitones. Settings: −64–+63 Tune Fine (Fine Tune) For fine pitch adjustment of the Key Bank. Settings: −64–+63 Delete Keybank Deletes the Key Bank. Add Keybank Adds a Key Bank to the waveform. 246 MODX M Operation Manual Pitch EG The Pitch EG screen lets you set the Envelope Generator for the Oscillator. By setting the PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator) time and level (the amount of pitch change), you can set how the sound changes from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to when the sound decays to silence. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Element selection → Pitch EG Hold Time (PEG Hold Time) Sets the length of time it takes for keeping the pitch at Hold Level (PEG Hold Level) starting from the moment you press a key on the keyboard. Settings: 0–127 Attack Time (PEG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the pitch to change from the end of the Hold Time (PEG Hold Time) to the Attack Level (PEG Attack Level). Settings: 0–127 Decay1 Time (PEG Decay 1 Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the pitch to change from the Attack Level (PEG Attack Level) to the Decay1 Level (PEG Decay 1 Level). Settings: 0–127 Decay2 Time (PEG Decay 2 Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the pitch to change from the Decay1 Level (PEG Decay 1 Level) to the Decay2 Level (PEG Decay 2 Level). Settings: 0–127 Release Time (PEG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the pitch to change from the moment you have released the key until it reaches the Release Level (PEG Release Level). Settings: 0–127 247 MODX M Operation Manual Hold Level (PEG Hold Level) Sets the pitch for the moment you press the key. Settings: −128–+0–+127 Attack Level (PEG Attack Level) Sets the change in pitch from the Hold Level or the moment you press a key. Settings: −128–+0–+127 Decay1 Level (PEG Decay 1 Level) Sets the next pitch value to change from the Attack Level (PEG Attack Level). Settings: −128–+0–+127 Decay2 Level (PEG Decay 2 Level) Sets the next pitch value to change from the Decay1 Level (PEG Decay 1 Level). Settings: −128–+0–+127 Release Level (PEG Release Level) Sets the final pitch to reach after you have released the key. Settings: −128–+0–+127 Center Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Sets the reference key (note) for Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity). With the note (key) set here, the resulting sound of the pitch change set in PEG is played. Settings: C−2–G8 Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) Sets how the speed of the pitch change in PEG responds to key position. The change speed in PEG is used for the specified key in Center Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key). Settings: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: The lower the key played, the slower the change in the PEG; the higher the key played, the faster the change in the PEG. 0: No PEG changes regardless of the key position Negative value: The higher the key pressed, the slower the pitch changes of the PEG. Center Key and Time/key (2) (1) (3) High Fast Slow +63 +30 −40 Low Time (6) Time (6) Time (6) Time (6) (4) (5) Low key High key (1) Key (2) The speed of the pitch change in PEG (3) Center Key (4) When Time/Key is positive (5) When Time/Key is negative (6) Pitch 248 MODX M Operation Manual Time/Vel (PEG Time Velocity Sensitivity) Segment (PEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment) Sets how the time of the pitch change in PEG responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. First, set the time value in Segment , and then the velocity sensitivity value in Time/Vel. Settings: Time/Vel: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the faster the pitch changes in the PEG 0: No PEG changes regardless of the velocity setting. Negative value: The faster the Velocity, the slower the pitch changes in the PEG When the value is positive Fast Velocity (pitch change is fast) Slow Velocity (pitch change is slow) Time (1) Time (1) (1) Pitch Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy, Decay, Atk+Rls, All Attack: The Time/Vel value affects the Attack Time Atk+Dcy: The Time/Vel value affects the Attack Time and Decay1Time Decay: The Time/Vel value affects the Decay Time Atk+Rls: The Time/Vel value affects the Attack Time and Release Time All: The Time/Vel value affects the time-related settings in PEG PEG Depth Sets the amount of pitch change controlled by the PEG. The further the depth is from the value 0, the wider the pitch change range becomes. Settings: −64–+0–+63 0: kept unchanged Negative value: Pitch change is inverted. Depth/Vel (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity) Curve (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve) Sets how the depth range of the pitch change controlled by the PEG responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Also, with the Curve setting, you can set how the PEG Depth responds to the Velocity. The vertical axis represents velocity while the horizontal axis represents the depth range of the pitch change. Settings: Depth/Vel: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: Faster Velocity values widen the depth range of the pitch change controlled by the PEG, while slower values narrow the depth range 0: No PEG changes regardless of the velocity setting. Negative value: Faster Velocity values narrow the depth range of the pitch change controlled by the PEG, while slower values widen the depth range When the value is positive Fast Velocity (the depth range in pitch change is wider) Slow Velocity (the depth range in pitch change is narrower) Time (1) Time (1) (1) Pitch Depth Settings: Curve: 0–4 0 3 1 4 2 249 MODX M Operation Manual Filter Type On the Type screen, you can select a filter type for the Element. The available parameters differ depending on the filter type you have selected here. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Element selection → Filter → Type Filter Type Sets the filter for the Element. The filters available on this instrument are grouped into four types: LPF, HPF, BPF, and BEF. Settings: LPF24D, LPF24A, LPF18, LPF18s, LPF12+HPF12, LPF6+HPF12, HPF24D, HPF12, BPF12D, BPFw, BPF6, BEF12, BEF6, DualLPF, DualHPF, DualBPF, DualBEF, LPF12+BPF6, Thru • LPF (Low Pass Filter) Cuts the signals above the value set in Cutoff Frequency. This is very popular and useful for producing classic synthesizer sounds. The sound becomes brighter as you raise the Cutoff Frequency, since more signals are passed by the filter. The sound becomes darker as you lower the Cutoff Frequency, since signals are cut or blocked by the filter. You can produce a distinctive “peaky” sound by raising the Resonance or boosting the signal level near the Cutoff Frequency. Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Cutoff Frequency Resonance Frequency Cutoff Frequency Frequency Gain Gain LPF24D: A dynamic 4-pole (−24dB/oct) LPF with a characteristic digital sound. Compared to the LPF24A type, this filter can produce a more pronounced Resonance effect LPF24A: A digital dynamic LPF with characteristics similar to a 4-pole (−24dB/oct) analog synthesizer filter LPF18: 3-pole (−18dB/oct) LPF LPF18s: 3-pole (−18dB/oct) LPF. The frequency curve is gentler than the LPF18 250 MODX M Operation Manual • HPF (High Pass Filter) A Filter Type that only passes signals above the Cutoff Frequency. You can produce a distinctive “peaky” sound by raising the Resonance or boosting the signal level near the Cutoff Frequency. Resonance Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Frequency Cutoff Frequency Gain LPF12+HPF12: A combination of a 2-pole (−12dB/oct) LPF and HPF connected in serial. When this Filter Type is selected, HPF Cutoff (HPF Cutoff Frequency) and HPF Cutoff /Key (HPF Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity) can be set LPF6+HPF12: A combination of a −6dB/oct LPF and a −12dB/oct connected in serial. When this Filter Type is selected, H PF Cutoff (HPF Cutoff Frequency) and HPF Cutoff /Key (HPF Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity) can be set HPF24D: A dynamic −24dB/oct HPF with a characteristic digital sound. This filter can produce a pronounced Resonance effect. HPF12: A dynamic −12dB/oct HPF • BPF (Band Pass Filter) A Filter Type that only passes signals for a set Cutoff Frequency band and cuts all other signals. Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Frequency Center Frequency Gain BPF12D: The combination of a −12dB/oct HPF and LPF with a characteristic digital sound BPFw: The combination of a −12dB/oct HPF and LPF. Allow wider bandwidth settings BPF6: The combination of a −6dB/oct HPF and LPF BPF12D BPFw Width Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Frequency Frequency Frequency Resonance Resonance Gain Gain Gain BPF6 251 MODX M Operation Manual • BEF (Band Eliminate Filter) Has an opposite effect on the sound compared to the BPF (Band Pass Filter). A Filter Type that cuts off signals near the set Cutoff Frequency and passes signals in other frequency bands. Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Frequency Center Frequency Gain BEF12: −12dB/oct BEF BEF6: −6dB/oct BEF DualLPF: Two −12dB/oct LPF connected in parallel. Sets the distance between the Cutoff Frequencies for the two filters with Distance. The lower limit frequency is set on the screen, and the upper limit frequency is automatically determined in conjunction DualHPF: Two −12dB/oct HPF connected in parallel DualBPF: Two −6dB/oct BPF connected in parallel DualBEF: Two −6dB/oct BEF connected in serial LPF12+BPF6: A combination of a −12dB/oct LPF and −6dB/oct BPF connected in parallel. Sets the distance between the Cutoff Frequencies for the two filters with Distance. The lower limit frequency is set on the screen, and the upper limit frequency is automatically determined in conjunction DualLPF DualBEF Frequency Frequency Frequency Distance Distance Distance Gain Gain Gain Cutoff (Filter Cutoff Frequency) Sets the cutoff frequency. The frequency set here is used by the filter set in Type. Settings: 0–1023 Cutoff/Vel (Filter Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the higher the Cutoff Frequency value 0: Cutoff frequency does not respond to the Velocity. Negative value: The slower the Velocity, the higher the Cutoff Frequency value LPF12+BPF6 252 MODX M Operation Manual Resonance (Filter Resonance) Width (Filter Width) The parameter shown here varies depending on the Filter Type setting. Resonance is shown for LPF, HPF, BPF (excluding BPFw), or BEF, and Width is shown for BPFw. For Resonance, this parameter indicates the strength of resonance. This can be used in combination with the Cutoff parameter to add further character to the sound. For the BPFw, Width is used for adjusting the width of the frequencies passed by the filter. Settings: 0–127 Res/Vel (Filter Resonance Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the resonance level responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. This parameter may not be available depending on the Filter Type. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: The higher the Velocity, the greater the Resonance becomes 0: Resonance value does not change in response to Velocity. Negative value: The lower the Velocity, the greater the Resonance becomes Cutoff/Key (Filter Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity) Sets how the cutoff frequency level of the filter responds to the key position. The reference point is the Cutoff Frequency for the key set in Center Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key). Settings: −200%–0%–+200% Positive value: The lower the key played, the lower the Cutoff Frequency becomes; the higher the key played, the higher the Cutoff Frequency becomes Negative value: The lower the key played, the higher the Cutoff Frequency becomes; the higher the key played, the lower the Cutoff Frequency becomes Distance Sets the distance between the Cutoff Frequencies for the Dual Filter types and the LPF12+BPF6 filter. This parameter may not be available depending on the Filter Type. Settings: −128–+0–+127 HPF Cutoff (HPF Cutoff Frequency) Sets the center frequency for the functions that control the filter cutoff and how fast the FEG changes according to the key follow setting of the HPF. Increasing the value results in a higher Cutoff Frequency, and the low frequency signals are cut or blocked to make the sound brighter. Decreasing the value results in a lower Cutoff Frequency, allowing more bass components to pass through to make the sound richer and deeper. This parameter is not available when the Filter Type is set to LPF12+HPF12 or LPF6+HPF12. Settings: 0–1023 HPF Cutoff/Key (HPF Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity) Sets the level of the Cutoff Frequency of the HPF according to the position of the key. This parameter is not available when the Filter Type is set to LPF12+HPF12 or LPF6+HPF12. Settings: −200%–+0–+200% Positive value: The lower the key played, the lower the Cutoff Frequency becomes; the higher the key played, the higher the Cutoff Frequency becomes Negative value: The lower the key played, the higher the Cutoff Frequency becomes; the higher the key played, the lower the Cutoff Frequency becomes Gain (Filter Gain) Sets the Gain (signals sent to the Filter unit). Lowering the value decreases the volume of the Element. Settings: 0–255 253 MODX M Operation Manual Filter EG On the Filter EG screen, you can set the Filter Envelope Generator (FEG) for the Element. The FEG lets you set the degree (or level) of changes to the Cutoff Frequency and how those changes evolve over time, starting from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to the moment the sound decays. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Element selection → Filter → Filter EG Hold Time (FEG Hold Time) Sets the length of time it takes for maintaining the Cutoff Frequency at Hold Level (FEG Hold Level) starting from the moment you press a key on the keyboard. Settings: 0–127 Attack Time (FEG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the Cutoff Frequency to change from the end of Hold Time (FEG Hold Time) to the Attack Level (FEG Attack Level). Settings: 0–127 Decay 1 Time (FEG Decay 1 Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the Cutoff Frequency to change from the Attack Level (FEG Attack Level) to the Decay1 Level (FEG Decay 1 Level). Settings: 0–127 Decay 2 Time (FEG Decay 2 Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the Cutoff Frequency to change from the Decay 1 Level (FEG Decay 1 Level) to the Decay 2 Level (FEG Decay 2 Level). Settings: 0–127 Release Time (FEG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the Cutoff Frequency to change from the moment you release your finger from the key until it reaches the Release Level (FEG Release Level). Settings: 0–127 254 MODX M Operation Manual Hold Level (FEG Hold Level) Sets the Cutoff Frequency at the moment you press the key. Settings: −128–+0–+127 Attack Level (FEG Attack Level) Sets the Cutoff Frequency value to change after you press the key. Settings: −128–+0–+127 Decay 1 Level (FEG Decay 1 Level) Sets the next Cutoff Frequency value to change from the Attack Level (FEG Attack Level). Settings: −128–+0–+127 Decay 2 Level (FEG Decay 2 Level) Sets the Cutoff Frequency that is maintained while the key is held down. Settings: −128–+0–+127 Release Level (FEG Release Level) Sets the next Cutoff Frequency value after you release your finger from the key. Settings: −128–+0–+127 Center Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Sets the reference key (note) for Time/Key. With the key (note) set here, the speed of change in the cutoff frequency set in FEG is used as is. Settings: C−2–G8 Time/Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) Sets the degree to which the speed of change in the cutoff frequency caused by FEG increases or decreases depending on the pitch of the key. The change speed in FEG is used for the specified key in Center Key. Settings: −64–+63 Positive value: The lower the key played, the slower the change in Cutoff Frequency controlled by the FEG becomes; the higher the key played, the faster the change becomes 0: No changes to the FEG regardless of the key position Negative value: The lower the key played, the faster the change in Cutoff Frequency controlled by the FEG becomes; the higher the key played, the slower the change becomes Center Key and Time/key (2) (1) (3) High Fast Slow +63 +30 −40 Low Time (6) Time (6) Time (6) Time (6) (4) (5) Low key High key (1) Key (2) Speed of the Cutoff Frequency by the FEG (3) Center Key (4) When Time/Key is positive (5) When Time/Key is negative (6) Cutoff Frequency 255 MODX M Operation Manual Time/Vel (FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity) Segment (FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment) Sets how the Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. First, set the time value in Segment, and then the velocity sensitivity value in Time/Vel. Settings: Time/Vel: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the faster the change in the Cutoff Velocity by the FEG; the slower the Velocity, the slower the change 0: No changes regardless of the Velocity setting. Negative value: The faster the Velocity, the slower the change in the Cutoff Velocity by the FEG; the slower the Velocity, the faster the change When the value is positive Fast Velocity (fast change in Cutoff Frequency) Slow Velocity (slow change in Cutoff Frequency) Time (1) Time (1) (1) Cutoff Frequency Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy, Decay, Atk+Rls, All Attack: The Time/Vel value affects the Attack Time Atk+Dcy: The Time/Vel value affects the Attack Time and Decay1Time Decay: The Time/Vel value affects the Decay Time Atk+Rls: The Time/Vel value affects the Attack Time and Release Time All: The Time/Vel value affects the time-related settings in FEG FEG Depth Sets the depth range for the cutoff frequency change controlled by the FEG. The depth range of the Cutoff Frequency change becomes wider the further the setting is from a value of 0. Settings: −64–+0–+63 0: No changes for the Cutoff Frequency by the FEG Negative value: Cutoff frequency changes are reversed. Depth/Vel (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity) Curve (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve) Depth/Vel (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity) sets how the depth range of the Cutoff Frequency change controlled by the FEG responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. With the Curve (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve) setting, you can set how the FEG Depth responds to the Velocity. The vertical axis represents the velocity while the horizontal axis represents the depth range of the Cutoff Frequency change. Settings: Depth/Vel: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the wider the depth range in Cutoff Frequency change by the FEG; the slower the Velocity, the narrower the depth range 0: Cutoff frequency does not respond to the Velocity. Negative value: The faster the Velocity, the narrower the depth range in Cutoff Frequency change by the FEG; the slower the Velocity, the wider the depth range When the value is positive Fast Velocity (the depth range in Cutoff Frequency change is wider) Slow Velocity (the depth range in Cutoff Frequency change is narrower) Time (1) Time (1) (1) Depth range in Cutoff Frequency change Settings: Curve: 0–4 0 3 1 4 2 256 MODX M Operation Manual Scale On the Scale screen, you can set the filter scale for the Element. The Filter Scale function allows you to change the Cutoff Frequency of the filter depending on the pitch. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Element selection → Filter → Scale Break Point (Filter Cutoff Scaling Break Point) 1–4 Sets the note numbers of four points to be set to Cutoff Offset. Settings: C−2–G8 NOTE The note numbers for Break Point 1 to 4 will be automatically arranged in ascending order. Cutoff Offset (Filter Cutoff Scaling Offset) 1–4 Sets the value that increases or decreases the Cutoff on Break Point (Filter Cutoff Scaling Break Point) 1–4. Settings: −128–+0–+127 NOTE • When the offset value is set above or below the Cutoff value, the Cutoff Frequency never goes beyond the settings. • For any notes below Break Point 1, the value will be set to the Cutoff Frequency of 1. For any notes above Break Point 4, the value will be set to the Cutoff Frequency of 4. 257 MODX M Operation Manual Amplitude Level/Pan On the Level/Pan screen, you can set Level and Pan (position in the stereo field) for each Element. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Element selection → Amplitude → Level/Pan Level/Key (Level Key Follow Sensitivity) Sets how the volume of each Element responds to key position. The reference point is the volume specified in Center Key (AEG Time Key Follow Center Key). Settings: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: The lower the key played, the softer the volume becomes; the higher the played, the louder the volume becomes. Negative value: The lower the key played, the louder the volume becomes; the higher the played, the softer the volume becomes. Level (Element Level) Sets the output level (volume) for each Element. Settings: 0–127 258 MODX M Operation Manual Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity) Offset (Level Velocity Offset) Curve (Level Sensitivity Key Curve) Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity) sets how the volume of each Element responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Offset (Level Velocity Offset) adjusts all settings specified in Level/Vel. When the value exceeds 127, the velocity is set to 127. With the Curve (Level Sensitivity Key Curve) setting, you can set how the volume responds to the Velocity. The vertical axis represents the velocity while the horizontal axis represents the range for the volume changes. Settings: Level/Vel: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the louder the volume becomes Negative value: The slower the Velocity, the louder the volume becomes 0: No change regardless of the velocity setting. Settings: Offset: 0–127 Offset = 0 Offset = 64 Offset = 96 0 64 127 127 A B X Y C 0 64 127 127 A B X Y C 0 64 127 127 A B X Y C A: Level/Vel = 0 B: Level/Vel = 32 C: Level/Vel = 64 X: Velocity with which you play a note Y: Velocity value sent to the internal tone generator Settings: Curve: 0–4 0 3 1 4 2 Pan (Element Pan) Sets the Pan position (in the stereo field) for the Element. When there are right and left Pan settings for the Elements within a Part, it may be difficult to hear the result of the Pan setting. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 259 MODX M Operation Manual Alternate Pan (Alternate Pan Depth) Sets how the sound is panned alternately left and right for each key played. The value set in Pan (Element Pan) is the center position for the right and left movement of the Pan. Settings: L63–C (Center)–R63 Random Pan (Random Pan Depth) Sets how the sound is panned randomly left and right for each key played. The value set in Pan (Element Pan) is the center position in the stereo field. Settings: 0–127 Scaling Pan (Scaling Pan Depth) Sets how the position of the key you press affects the position of the Pan setting. The value set in Pan (Element Pan) is the position for C3. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: Pan position is scaled to the left for lower keys and to the right for higher keys. Negative value: Pan position is scaled to the right for lower keys and to the left for higher keys. 260 MODX M Operation Manual Amp EG On the Amp EG screen, you can set the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) for the Element. By setting the Amp EG, you can set how the volume changes from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to when the sound decays. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Element selection → Amplitude → Amp EG Attack Time (AEG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard until the time the volume reaches the value set at the Attack Level (AEG Attack Level). Settings: 0–127 Decay 1 Time (AEG Decay 1 Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to change from the Attack Level (AEG Attack Level) to the Decay 1 Level (AEG Decay 1 Level). Settings: 0–127 Decay 2 Time (AEG Decay 2 Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to change from the Decay 1 Level (AEG Decay 1 Level) to the Decay 2 Level (AEG Decay 2 Level). Settings: 0–127 Release Time (AEG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the sound to decay after you have released the key. Settings: 0–127 Initial Level (AEG Initial Level) Sets the volume for the moment you press the key. Settings: 0–127 Attack Level (AEG Attack Level) Sets the volume for changing after you have pressed a key. Settings: 0–127 261 MODX M Operation Manual Decay 1 Level (AEG Decay 1 Level) Sets the next volume value to change from the Attack Level (AEG Attack Level). Settings: 0–127 Decay 2 Level (AEG Decay 2 Level) Sets the volume that is maintained while the key is held down. Settings: 0–127 Center Key (AEG Time Key Follow Center Key) Sets the reference key (note) for Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity). With the note (key) set here, the resulting sound of the pitch change set in Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) is played. Settings: C−2–G8 Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) Sets how the speed of the volume changes in AEG responds to key position. The change speed in AEG is used for the specified key in Center Key (AEG Time Key Follow Center Key). Settings: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: The lower the key played, the slower the AEG volume changes; the higher the key played, the faster the AEG volume changes. 0: No AEG volume change regardless of the key position Negative value: The lower the key played, the faster the AEG volume changes; the higher the key played, the slower the AEG volume changes. Center Key and Time/key (2) (1) (3) High Fast Slow +63 +30 −40 Low Time (6) Time (6) Time (6) Time (6) (4) (5) Low key High key (1) Key (2) Speed of volume change in AEG (3) Center Key (4) When Time/Key is positive (5) When Time/Key is negative (6) AEG volume Release Adj (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Release Adjustment) Adjusts the sensitivity of the Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) to AEG Release. The lower the value, the lesser the sensitivity. Settings: 0–127 127: Same Time/Key as Decay 1 and Decay 2 0: The Time/Key does not affect the AEG Release 262 MODX M Operation Manual Time/Vel (AEG Time Velocity Sensitivity) Segment (AEG Time Velocity Segment) Sets the length of time it takes for volume changes in AEG to respond to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. First, set the time value in Segment, and then the velocity sensitivity value in Time/Vel. Settings: Time/Vel: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: The faster the velocity, the faster the AEG volume changes. 0: No changes regardless of the Velocity setting. Negative value: Fast velocity values result in slower AEG volume changes, while slow velocity values result in faster AEG volume changes. When the value is positive Fast velocity (fast volume change) Slow velocity (slow volume change) Time (1) Time (1) (1) Volume Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy, Decay, Atk+Rls, All Attack: The Time/Vel value affects the Attack Time Atk+Dcy: The Time/Vel value affects the Attack Time and Decay1Time Decay: The Time/Vel value affects the Decay Time Atk+Rls: The Time/Vel value affects the Attack Time and Release Time All: The Time/Vel value affects the time-related settings in AEG Half Damper (Half Damper Switch) By setting this switch On, you can connect a separately sold foot controller FC3A to the [SUSTAIN] jack on the rear panel and use the half-damper function for your keyboard performance. The Half-damper function gives you greater expressive control over sound decay, letting you use damper pedal operation just as you would on an acoustic piano—continuously and not just as an on/off switch. Settings: Off, On Time (Half Damper Time) Sets the time from the moment you have released a key while you are pressing the foot controller FC3A fully down to when the sound decays when the Half Damper (Half Damper Switch) is set to On. This parameter is not shown when set to Off. You can adjust the decay time from the Half Damper Time to the Release Time (AEG Release Time) by changing the amount you press on the pedal. When you release the pedal, the Release Time (AEG Release Time) is used for decaying sound. By setting the Release Time to a small value, and Half Damper Time to a large value, you can play a natural decaying sound, like on an acoustic piano. Settings: 0–127 263 MODX M Operation Manual Scale On the Scale screen, you can set the Amplitude Scale for the Element. This changes the volume according to the key position on the keyboard. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Element selection → Amplitude → Scale Break Point (Level Scaling Break Point) 1–4 Sets the note number for Level Offset (Level Scaling Offset) 1–4. Settings: C−2–G8 NOTE The note numbers for Break Point 1 to 4 will be automatically arranged in ascending order. Level Offset (Level Scaling Offset) 1–4 Sets the value that increases or decreases the Level on Break Point (Level Scaling Break Point) 1–4. Settings: −128–+0–+127 264 MODX M Operation Manual Element EQ On the Element EQ screen, you can set the equalizer for the Element. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Element selection → Element EQ EQ Type (Element EQ Type) Selects the desired EQ type. Settings: 2-band, P.EQ, Boost6, Boost12, Boost18, Thru 2-band: Shelving EQ that boosts or cuts the band of signals above or below a certain frequency (Low Freq or High Freq). P.EQ: Parametric EQ that boosts or cuts the signal level (Gain)) around the Center Frequency (Freq). Boost6: Boosts the level by 6 dB. Boost12: Boosts the level by 12 dB Boost18: Boosts the level by 18 dB Thru: Passes the signals with no effects being applied „ When EQ Type is set to 2-band – + 0 Gain Low Gain High Gain Low Freq High Freq Frequency EQ Low Gain (Element EQ Low Gain) Sets the signal level of the Low band. Settings: −12.00dB – +0.00dB – +12.00dB EQ Low Freq (Element EQ Low Frequency) Sets the frequency of the Low band. Settings: 50.1Hz–2.00kHz 265 MODX M Operation Manual EQ Hi Gain (Element EQ High Gain) Sets the signal level of the High band. Settings: −12.00dB – +0.00dB – +12.00dB EQ Hi Freq (Element EQ High Frequency) Sets the frequency of the High band. Settings: 503.8Hz–10.1kHz „ When EQ Type is set to P.EQ – + 0 Gain Gain Freq Q Frequency EQ Gain (Element EQ Gain) Sets the signal level for the frequency range set in EQ Freq (Element EQ Frequency). Settings: −12.00dB – +0.00dB – +12.00dB EQ Freq (Element EQ Frequency) Sets the frequency to be cut or boosted. Settings: 139.7Hz–12.9kHz EQ Q (Element EQ Q) By boosting or cutting the signal level of the frequency set in EQ Freq (Element EQ Frequency), you can create various frequency response curves. Settings: 0.7–10.3 266 MODX M Operation Manual Element LFO On the Element LFO screen, you can set the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) for the Element. The LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) for the Element generates signals in the low band, and you can use it for modulation (cyclical variation) of the pitch, filter, and amplitude. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Element selection → Element LFO LFO Wave Selects an LFO wave, By using the wave you have selected here, you can create various types of modulation. Settings: Saw, Triangle, Square Saw (Sawtooth wave) Triangle (Triangle wave) Square (Square wave) Extended LFO Switches between the old set of Speed (LFO Speed) settings (Off: 0–63) and a new set of settings with higher resolution (On: 0–415) for Speed (LFO Speed). To maintain compatibility of data created with the old settings, set this parameter to Off. Settings: Off, On Speed (LFO Speed) Sets the speed of LFO Wave changes. The larger the value of this parameter, the faster the speed becomes. Settings: 0–63 (Extended LFO set to Off), 0–415 (Extended LFO set to On) Delay (LFO Delay Time) Sets the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into effect. Settings: 0–127 267 MODX M Operation Manual Fade In (LFO Fade In Time) Sets the time length for the LFO effect to fade in after you have released the key and the delay time set in Delay (LFO Delay Time) has elapsed. The larger the value, the longer it takes for the LFO effect to reach the maximum. Settings: 0–127 0: The LFO changes to the maximum value without any fade-ins. When the value is small Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time When the value is large Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset) Resets the oscillation of the LFO when a key is pressed. Settings: Off, On Pitch Mod (LFO Pitch Modulation Depth) This parameter creates a vibrato effect (cyclical changes to the pitch) by using LFO waves. Setting the parameter to larger values results in greater change to the volume. Settings: 0–127 Filter Mod (LFO Filter Modulation Depth) This parameter creates a wah effect (cyclical changes to the filter cutoff frequency) by using LFO waves. Larger values result in greater range for cutoff frequency changes. Settings: 0–127 Amp Mod (LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth) This parameter creates a tremolo effect (cyclical changes in the volume) by using LFO waves. Setting the parameter to larger values results in greater change to the volume. Settings: 0–127 268 MODX M Operation Manual Drum Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit Screens The Drum Part (AWM2) consists of 73 drum keys. Drum Part Edit (AWM2) includes Part Common Edit (for setting parameters for the entire Part) and Key Edit (for setting parameters for individual drum keys). General/Pitch Part Settings Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Part Settings Main Category (Part Main Category) Sub Category (Part Sub Category) Sets the Main category and Sub category of the selected Part. Settings: Refer to the Data List Part Name You can save the Part you are editing under a new name, You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Volume Sets the volume of the selected Part. Settings: 0–127 Pan Adjusts the Pan position (in the stereo field) of the selected Part. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 269 MODX M Operation Manual Dry Level Sets the Dry Level of the selected Part. This parameter is available only when Part Output (Part Output Select) is set to MainL&R or Drum. Settings: 0–127 Var Send (Variation Send) Sets the Variation Send of the selected Part. This parameter is available only when Part Output (Part Output Select) is set to MainL&R or Drum. Settings: 0–127 Rev Send (Reverb Send) Sets the Reverb Send of the selected Part. This parameter is available only when Part Output (Part Output Select) is set to MainL&R or Drum. Settings: 0–127 Part Output (Part Output Select) Sets the output destination for the audio signals of the selected Part. Settings: MainL&R, (AsgnL&R), USB Stereo, (AsgnL), (AsgnR), USB mono, Off, Drum MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and OUTPUT [R] jacks. USB Stereo: Outputs in stereo (channels 1 and 2, to channels 7 and 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal USB mono: Outputs in mono (channels 1 to 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal Off: No output of the audio signal for the Part. Drum: You can set the output for each drum key. NOTE The settings for data compatibility with MONTAGE M are shown below. They are considered Off when set. • AsgnL&R • USB Stereo: USB9&10 – USB29&30 • USB mono: USB9 – USB30 • AsgnL • AsgnR Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only) Sets the Part to be played only with the Arpeggio. Any Part set to On will be played by the Note On messages sent from the Arpeggio. Settings: Off, On Element Pan (Element Pan Switch) Sets the Pan to On or Off from the Key Edit. When set to Off, the Pan in the Key Edit will be set to C (center). Settings: Off, On Velocity Limit Sets the velocity range (lowest and highest values) for the Part. Settings: 1–127 Note Limit Sets the note range (lowest and highest notes) for the Part. Settings: C−2–G8 270 MODX M Operation Manual Velocity Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) Increases or decreases the velocity value that is sent to the internal tone generator. Settings: 0–127 When Velocity Depth = 64 and Velocity Offset = 32 When Velocity Depth = 64 and Velocity Offset = 64 When Velocity Depth = 64 and Velocity Offset = 96 127 0 127 64 127 64 127 0 127 64 127 0 (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) 127 0 127 64 127 64 127 0 127 64 127 0 (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) 127 0 127 64 127 64 127 0 127 64 127 0 (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) (2) Velocity with which you play a note Velocity Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) Sets how the level of the velocity value (sent to the internal tone generator) responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: 0–127 When Velocity Depth = 64 127 0 127 64 (1) Depth = 127 Depth = 64 Depth = 32 Depth = 0 (2) (1) Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) (2) Velocity with which you play a note 271 MODX M Operation Manual Zone Settings The same as General/Pitch → Zone Settings on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Pitch On the Pitch screen, you can set the pitch for the Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Pitch Note Shift Adjusts the pitch in semitones. Settings: −48–+0–+48 Detune Adjusts the pitch of the selected Part in 0.1 Hz increments. By slightly shifting the pitch, you can detune the sound. Settings: −12.8Hz–+0.0Hz–+12.7Hz Pitch Control Group Parts assigned to the same group are given the same pitch. However, Portamento, Mono/Poly, and Micro Tuning are not available for the Drum Part. Pitch Bend  (Pitch Bend Range Lower) Pitch Bend  (Pitch Bend Range Upper) Sets the range of the changes created with the Pitch Bend wheel in semitones. Settings: −48–+0–+24 272 MODX M Operation Manual Filter/Amp Filter The same as Filter/Amp → Filter on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Amp EG The same as Filter/Amp → Amp EG on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 273 MODX M Operation Manual Effect Routing On the Routing screen, you can set the effect routing for the Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing The screen here is basically the same as the one opened from Effect → Routing on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen; however, the parameters added to Drum Part Edit (AWM2) are shown below. Drum Key (Drum Key Select) Shows the name of the selected Drum Key. Settings: C0–C6 Keyboard Select Sets the Keyboard select setting on or off. When this parameter is set to On, you can select the desired drum key for editing by pressing a key on the keyboard. Settings: Off, On Connect (Drum Key Connection Switch) Sets the Key to be output to Insertion Effect A (InsA) or Insertion Effect B (InsB), or bypasses the Insertion Effect (Thru). Settings: Thru, InsA, InsB 274 MODX M Operation Manual InsRev (Insertion to Reverb Send Level) InsVar (Insertion to Variation Send Level) Sets the level of the Drum Key signals sent to Insertion Effect A or Insertion Effect B to the Reverb or Variation Effect. This setting is applied to the entire Drum Part (all Drum Keys). This parameter is available only when Connect (Drum Key Connection Switch) is set to InsA or InsB, and Part Output (Part Output Select) is set to MainL&R or Drum. Settings: 0–127 KeyRev (Drum Key Reverb Send Level) KeyVar (Drum Key Variation Send Level) Sets the level of the drum key signals sent through Insertion Effect A or Insertion Effect B to the Reverb or Variation Effect. This parameter can be set to each drum key. This parameter is available only when Connect (Drum Key Connection Switch) is set to Thru, Part Output (Part Output Select) and is set to MainL&R, or when Part Output is set to Drum and Drum Key Out is set to MainL&R. Settings: 0–127 Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select) Sets the output destination for each Drum Key. This parameter is shown only when Part Output (Part Output Select) is set to Drum. Settings: MainL&R, (AsgnL&R), USB Stereo, (AsgnL), (AsgnR), USB mono MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and OUTPUT [R] jacks. USB Stereo: Outputs in stereo (channels 1 and 2, to channels 7 and 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal USB mono: Outputs in mono (channels 1 to 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal NOTE • The settings for data compatibility with MONTAGE M are shown below. They are considered Off when set. • AsgnL&R • USB Stereo: USB9&10 – USB29&30 • USB mono: USB9 – USB30 • AsgnL • AsgnR • Connect (Drum Key Connection Switch) is set to InsA/InsB, this parameter is fixed to MainL&R. 275 MODX M Operation Manual Ins A, Ins B On the Ins A and Ins B screens, you can set the Insertion Effects. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Ins A [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Ins B The same as Audio In → Ins A, Ins B on the Common Edit screen. 3-band EQ The same as Effect → 3-band EQ on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 2-band EQ The same as Effect → 2-band EQ on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Ins Assign The same as Effect → Ins Assign on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 276 MODX M Operation Manual Arpeggio Common The same as Arpeggio → Common on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Individual The same as Arpeggio → Individual on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Advanced The screen here is basically the same as the one opened from Arpeggio → Advanced on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen; however, the parameter shown below has been added. Fixed SD/BD (Arpeggio Fixed SD/BD) When this parameter is set to On, Arpeggio playback uses C1 for the bass drum and D1 for the snare drum. Most drum kits assign the bass drum to C1 and the snare drum to D1, but some drum kits may assign different notes. Therefore, depending on the combination of the selected drum kit and Arpeggio Type, it may sound unnatural. Turning this parameter on may resolve this unnatural sound. Settings: Off, On 277 MODX M Operation Manual Motion Seq Common The same as Motion Seq → Common on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Lane The same as Motion Seq → Lane on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 278 MODX M Operation Manual Mod/Control Control Assign Other than the Destination setting, the same as Mod/Control → Control Assign on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. For the list of Destination settings, refer to the Control List on the Data List. Tx/Rx Switch The same as Mod/Control → Tx/Rx Switch on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Control Settings The same as Mod/Control → Control Settings on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 279 MODX M Operation Manual Drum Part Edit (AWM2) Key Edit screen The Drum Part (AWM2) consists of 73 drum keys. Drum Part Edit (AWM2) includes Part Common Edit (for setting parameters for the entire Part) and Key Edit (for setting parameters for individual drum keys). Osc/Tune On the Osc/Tune screen, you can set the Oscillator for each key within the Drum Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Key selection → Osc/Tune Drum Key Switch Sets the selected Drum Key to use. Settings: Off, On Bank (Waveform Bank) Number (Waveform Number) Category (Waveform Category) Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category) Waveform Name Shows the name of the Waveform selected for the Drum Key. Bank indicates the type of Waveform (Preset, User, and Library) assigned to the Element. Settings: Refer to the Data List 280 MODX M Operation Manual Assign Mode (Key Assign Mode) Sets how sound is produced when the internal tone generator receives Note On messages of the same sound twice (or more) in a row. The Multi setting makes rolls sound natural, especially crash cymbals or other percussion instruments having a long decay. Settings: Single, Multi Single: Stops the first note and then plays the same note again. Multi: Plays the second note over the first note Connect (Drum Key Connection) Sets the Key to be output to Insertion Effect A (InsA) or Insertion Effect B (InsB), or bypasses the Insertion Effect (Thru). This parameter is the same as Effect → Routing Connect (Drum Key Connection Switch) on the Drum Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Settings: Thru, InsA, InsB New Waveform Loads an audio file saved to USB flash drive as a Waveform. Edit Waveform appears when a Waveform is loaded. Edit Waveform The Waveform Edit screen will open. Coarse (Coarse Tune) Shifts the pitch of the waveform assigned to the Drum Key. Settings: −48–+0–+48 Fine (Fine Tune) Finely adjusts the pitch of the wave assigned to the Drum Key. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the pitch change responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: −64–+0–63 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the higher the pitch becomes 0: kept unchanged Negative value: The faster the Velocity, the lower the pitch becomes Rcv Note Off (Receive Note Off) Sets the drum key to receive MIDI note-off messages. Set this to On for percussion instrument sounds to make them last without decay. Settings: Off, On On: The sound stops when release the key Off: The sound decays after you release the key Group (Alternate Group) This setting helps you to prevent improper or unnatural combinations of drum keys to be played together. For example, you can assign open and closed hi-hats to the same Group so that you can avoid them being played together. For drum keys that can be played naturally with any combination, set this parameter to Off. Settings: Off, 1–127 281 MODX M Operation Manual KeyRev (Drum Key Reverb Send Level) KeyVar (Drum Key Variation Send Level) Sets the level of the drum key signals sent through Insertion Effect A or Insertion Effect B to the Reverb or Variation Effect. This parameter can be set to each drum key. This parameter is not available depending on the Connect (Drum Key Connection Switch), Part Output (Part Output Select), and Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select) settings. Settings: 0–127 Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select) Sets the output destination for the Drum Key. This parameter is not available depending on the Connect (Drum Key Connection Switch) and Part Output (Part Output Select) settings. Settings: MainL&R, (AsgnL&R), USB Stereo, (AsgnL), (AsgnR), USB Mono MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and OUTPUT [R] jacks. USB Stereo: Outputs in stereo (channels 1 and 2, to channels 7 and 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal USB Mono: Outputs in mono (channels 1 to 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal NOTE The settings for data compatibility with MONTAGE M are shown below. They are considered Off when set. • AsgnL&R • USB Stereo: USB9&10 – USB29&30 • USB mono: USB9 – USB30 • AsgnL • AsgnR Keyboard Select Sets the Keyboard select setting on or off. When this parameter is set to On, you can select the desired drum key for editing by pressing a key on the keyboard. Settings: Off, On 282 MODX M Operation Manual Filter Sets the filter for the Drum Part. You can change the tone quality by using a low pass filter and high pass filter on each drum key. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Key selection → Filter Cutoff (LPF Cutoff Frequency) Sets the cutoff frequency for the low pass filter. Settings: 0–1023 Cutoff/Vel (LPF Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity) Sets the velocity sensitivity to the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter. For positive values of this parameter, the stronger (higher velocity) you play the key, the higher the cutoff frequency becomes. For negative values of this parameter, the stronger you play the key, the lower the cutoff frequency becomes. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Resonance (LPF Resonance) Sets the level of the resonance effect on the low pass filter. Settings: 0–127 HPF Cutoff (HPF Cutoff Frequency) Sets the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter. Settings: 0–1023 283 MODX M Operation Manual Level/Pan Sets the Level and Pan (position in the stereo field) for each Drum Key. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Key selection → Level/Pan Attack Time (AEG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard until the time the volume reaches the value set at the Level (Drum Key Level). Settings: 0–127 Decay 1 Time (AEG Decay 1 Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to change from the Level (Drum Key Level) to the Decay 1 Level (AEG Decay 1 Level). Settings: 0–127 Decay 2 Time (AEG Decay 2 Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to decay after reaching the volume set in Decay 1 Level (AEG Decay 1 Level). Settings: 0–126, Hold Decay 1 Level (AEG Decay 1 Level) Sets the next volume value to change from the Level (Drum Key Level). Settings: 0–127 Level (Drum Key Level) Sets the output level for the Drum Key. This parameter lets you adjust the level balance among the drum keys. Settings: 0–127 When Decay2 Time = 0–126 When Decay2 Time = hold Time Level Drum Key Level Attack Time Decay 1 Time Decay 2 Time Decay 1 Level Key on Time Level Drum Key Level Attack Time Decay 1 Time Decay 2 Time Decay 1 Level Key on 284 MODX M Operation Manual Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how Level (Volume) responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: −64– +0–+63 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the louder the volume becomes 0: No change regardless of the velocity setting. Negative value: The slower the Velocity, the louder the volume becomes Pan Sets the Pan (location in the sound field) of the drum key. You can adjust the position in the stereo field for the Drum Part (Drum Kit). Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 Alternate Pan (Alternate Pan Depth) Sets how the sound is panned alternately left and right for each key played. The value set in Pan is the center position for the right and left movement of the Pan. Settings: L63–C (Center)–R63 Random Pan (Random Pan Depth) Sets how the sound is panned randomly left and right for each key played. The value set in Pan is the center position in the stereo field. Settings: 0–127 285 MODX M Operation Manual Element EQ The same as Element EQ on the Part Edit (AWM2) Element Edit screen. 286 MODX M Operation Manual Part Edit (FM-X) Part Common Edit Screens The Normal Part (FM-X) consists of eight Operators. Part Edit (FM-X) includes Part Common Edit (for setting parameters for the entire Part) and Operator Edit (for setting parameters for individual operators). General/Pitch Part Settings On the Part Settings screen, you can set general parameters (such as the Part names and tone generation system) for the Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Part Settings The screen here is the same as the one opened from General/Pitch → Part Settings on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen; however, the parameter shown below has been added. Random Pan (Random Pan Depth) Sets how the sound is panned randomly left and right for each key played. The value set in Pan is the center position in the stereo field. Settings: 0–127 Alternate Pan (Alternate Pan Depth) Sets how the sound is panned alternately left and right for each key played. The value set in Pan is the center position for the right and left movement of the Pan. Settings: L63–C (Center)–R63 Scaling Pan (Scaling Pan Depth) Sets how the position of the key you press affects the position of the Pan setting. Note Number C3 is the reference point for panning, and the position at this time is the value set in Pan. By setting this parameter to a positive value, Pan is set to the left for lower keys, and to the right for higher keys. When this parameter is set to a value of 0, there will be no changes to the Pan setting. When the parameter is set to a negative value, the pan is set to the left for lower keys, and to the right for higher keys. Settings: −64–+0–+63 287 MODX M Operation Manual KeyOnDly Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync) Sets the timing of the Key On Delay to synchronize with the tempo. Settings: Off, On Delay Length (Key On Delay Time Length) Sets the delay time from when the moment the key is pressed to when sound is produced. This parameter is not available when KeyOnDly Sync is set to On. Settings: 0–127 Delay Length (Key On Delay Note Length) This parameter is available when KeyOnDly Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync) is set to On. You can set the timing for Key On Delay by using musical note values. Settings: 1/16 (sixteenth notes), 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8 (eighth notes), 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot. (dotted eighth notes), 1/4 (quarter notes), 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2 (half notes), Whole Tri. (whole-note triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 × 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 5 (quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter notes to the beat) 288 MODX M Operation Manual Zone Settings The same as General/Pitch → Zone Settings on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. FM-X Settings On the FM-X Settings screen, you can set the FM Color parameters provided as a convenient editing tool for the FM-X sounds as well as the Algorithm (or how the Operators are arranged). Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → FM-X Settings FM Attack Controls the Attack Time of the EG that changes the depth of the frequency modulation over time. Settings: −99–+0–+99 FM Decay Controls the Decay Time of the EG that changes the depth of the frequency modulation over time. Settings: −99–+0–+99 FM Sustain Controls the Sustain Level of the EG that changes the depth of the frequency modulation over time. Settings: −99–+0–+99 FM Release Controls the Release Time of the EG that changes the depth of the frequency modulation over time. Settings: −99–+0–+99 Algorithm (Algorithm Number) Changes the Algorithm. Settings: Refer to the Data List Feedback (Feedback Level) Feedback causes the Operator to modulate itself by sending some of the output signals back. Here with this parameter, you can set the degree of such modulation. Settings: 0–7 289 MODX M Operation Manual FM Depth Changes the depth of the frequency modulation. Settings: −99–+0–+99 FM Harmonics Changes the frequency of the harmonic overtones of FM synthesis. Settings: −99–+0–+99 FM Texture Changes the texture of FM synthesis. Settings: −99–+0–+99 Algorithm Search Opens the Algorithm Search screen. • Chain Filters the available algorithms based on the maximum length of the operators connected in series. • Carrier Filters the available algorithms based on number of carriers. Filter Offset Cutoff (Filter Cutoff Frequency) Changes the sound by setting the cutoff frequency of the filter. When the Low Pass Filter is selected, larger values here result in a brighter sound, and smaller values result in a darker sound. This parameter is specified as an offset value to the filter cutoff frequency. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Filter Offset Resonance (Filter Offset Resonance/Width) Adds special characteristics to the sound by adjusting the signal level near the cutoff frequency. This is specified as an offset value to the filter resonance. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Filter Offset FEG Depth Sets the depth range for the cutoff frequency change controlled by the FEG. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Filter Type The Filter Type screen will open. Filter EG The Filter EG screen will open. 290 MODX M Operation Manual Pitch The screen here is the same as the one opened from General/Pitch → Pitch on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen, except that Legato Slope (Portamento Legato Slope) is disabled. PEG/Scale On the PEG/Scale screen, you can set the pitch envelope generator and scale for the Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → PEG/Scale Attack Time (PEG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the pitch to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard until the time the pitch reaches the value set at Attack Level (PEG Attack Level). Settings: 0–99 Decay1 Time (PEG Decay 1 Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the pitch to change from the Attack Level (PEG Attack Level) to the Decay1 Level (PEG Decay 1 Level). Settings: 0–99 Decay2 Time (PEG Decay 2 Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the pitch to change from the Decay1 Level (PEG Decay 1 Level) to the Decay2 Level (PEG Decay 2 Level). Settings: 0–99 Release Time (PEG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the pitch to change from the moment you have released the key until it reaches the Release Level (PEG Release Level). Settings: 0–99 Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Sets the reference key for Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity). Settings: C−2–G8 291 MODX M Operation Manual Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity) Sets the difference in pitch between two adjacent keys. The note set in Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) is used as the reference. Settings: −200%–+0%–+200% +100% (default): Pitch difference between the two keys next to each other is set to a semitone 0%: No pitch difference between the two keys, and all keys are played at the pitch set in Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Negative value: Sets an opposite pitch response such that lower notes result in higher pitch, and higher notes result in lower pitch. Initial Level (PEG Initial Level) Sets the pitch for the moment you press the key. Settings: −50–+0–+50 Attack Level (PEG Attack Level) Sets the pitch to change from Initial Level (PEG Initial Level) after you have pressed a key. Settings: −50–+0–+50 Decay1 Level (PEG Decay 1 Level) Sets the next pitch value to change from the Attack Level (PEG Attack Level). Settings: −50–+0–+50 Decay2 Level (PEG Decay 2 Level) Sets the next pitch value to change from the Decay1 Level (PEG Decay 1 Level). Settings: −50–+0–+50 Release Level (PEG Release Level) Sets the final pitch to reach after you have released the key. Settings: −50–+0–+50 PEG Depth Sets the amount of pitch change controlled by the PEG. Settings: 8 oct, 2 oct, 1 oct, 0.5 oct NOTE When this parameter is set to 8 oct, you can specify the smallest value to the Pitch EG level to create a pitch change of −4 octaves by sending the pitch value 0 to the internal tone generator, and by specifying the largest value to create a pitch change of +4 octaves. Depth/Vel (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the time of the pitch change in PEG responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: 0–7 Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) Sets how the speed of the pitch change in PEG responds to key position. Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key): The speed change in PEG is used for the specified key fixed to C3. Settings: 0–7 Positive value: The lower the key played, the slower the change in the PEG; the higher the key played, the faster the change in the PEG. 0: No PEG changes regardless of the key position Random Pitch (Random Pitch Depth) Changes the pitch of the Element randomly each time the key is pressed. Settings: 0–127 Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the pitch responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the higher the pitch becomes 0: kept unchanged Negative value: The faster the Velocity, the lower the pitch becomes 292 MODX M Operation Manual Filter/Amp Filter Type The same as Filter → Type on the Part Edit (AWM2) Element Edit screen. Filter EG The same as Filter → Filter EG on the Part Edit (AWM2) Element Edit screen. Filter Scale The same as Filter → Scale on the Part Edit (AWM2) Element Edit screen. Amp EG The same as Filter/Amp → Amp EG on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 293 MODX M Operation Manual Effect Routing The screen here is almost the same as the one opened from Effect → Routing on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen, with the exceptions listed below. • No output setting for each Element • Cannot select Parallel for Ins Connect Ins A, Ins B The same as Audio In → Ins A, Ins B on the Common Edit screen. 3-band EQ The same as Effect → 3-band EQ on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 2-band EQ The same as Effect → 2-band EQ on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Ins Assign The same as Effect → Ins Assign on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 294 MODX M Operation Manual Arpeggio Common The same as Arpeggio → Common on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Individual The same as Arpeggio → Individual on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Advanced The same as Arpeggio → Advanced on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 295 MODX M Operation Manual Motion Seq Common The same as Motion Seq → Common on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Lane The same as Motion Seq → Lane on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 296 MODX M Operation Manual Mod/Control Control Assign Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Mod/Control → Control Assign Other than the Destination setting, the same as Mod/Control → Control Assign on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. For a list of settings, refer to the Data List. Use the parameters shown below, instead of ElementSw and others. Operator Sw 1–8 (Operator Switch) You can set the controller setting for each Operator on or off. This parameter is shown only when the selected Destination is related to Operators. Settings: Off, On Sw/Rate Switches the view between Operator Sw and Operator Rate. This parameter is shown only when the Destination is set to OP Freq or OP AEG Offset. Settings: Off, On Operator Rate 1–8 Sets the sensitivity of the controller selected for the Destination. This parameter is shown only when the Destination is set to OP Freq or OP AEG Offset. Settings: −7–+0–+7 297 MODX M Operation Manual After Touch Other than the Destination setting, the same as Mod/Control → After Touch on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Tx/Rx Switch The same as Mod/Control → Tx/Rx Switch on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Control Settings The same as Mod/Control → Control Settings on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Part LFO On the Part LFO screen, you can set the Part LFO. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Mod/Control → Part LFO LFO Wave Selects the LFO Wave and sets the type of cyclical changes to the LFOs. Settings: Triangle, Triangle+, Saw Up, Saw Down, Squ1/4, Squ1/3, Square, Squ2/3, Squ3/4, Trapezoid, S/H1, S/H2, User Edit User LFO The User LFO Edit screen will open. You can create an LFO waveform of up to 16 steps. 298 MODX M Operation Manual Tempo Sync (LFO Tempo Sync) Sets the speed of the LFO Wave changes to synchronize to Arpeggio or Song playback. Settings: Off (not synchronized), On (synchronized) • When set to Off Speed (LFO Speed) Sets the speed of LFO Wave changes. This parameter is not available when Tempo Sync (LFO Tempo Sync) is set to On. Settings: 0–63 Random Speed (Part LFO Random Speed Depth) Changes the LFO Speed randomly. This parameter is not available when Tempo Sync (LFO Tempo Sync) is set to On. Settings: 0–127 • When set to On Tempo Speed (LFO Tempo Speed) Sets the speed of LFO Wave changes by using musical note values. Settings: 1/16 (sixteenth notes), 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8 (eighth notes), 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot. (dotted eighth notes), 1/4 (quarter notes), 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2 (half notes), Whole Tri. (whole-note triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 × 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 5 (quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 × 16 (sixteen quarter-notes to the beat), 1/4 × 32 (thirty-two quarter-notes to the beat), 1/4 × 64 (sixty- four quarter-notes to the beat) Delay (LFO Delay Time) Sets the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into effect. The larger the value, the longer the delay time for the LFO to come into effect. Settings: 0–127 Fade In (LFO Fade In Time) Sets the time length for the LFO effect to fade in after you have released the key and the delay time set in Delay (LFO Delay Time) has elapsed. The larger the value, the longer it takes for the LFO effect to reach the maximum. Settings: 0–127 0: The LFO changes to the maximum value without any fade-ins. When the value is small Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time When the value is large Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time 299 MODX M Operation Manual Hold (LFO Hold Time) Sets the time for maintaining the LFO effect after the maximum level has been reached. Settings: 0–126, Hold Hold: Does not fade out Hold Maximum Key On Time Fade Out (LFO Fade Out time) Sets the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade out after the hold time set in Hold (LFO Hold Time) has elapsed. The larger the value, the longer it takes for the LFO effect to fade out. Settings: 0–127 When the value is small Fade-Out Maximum Hold Key On Time When the value is large Fade-Out Maximum Hold Key On Time 300 MODX M Operation Manual Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset) Resets the oscillation of the LFO when a key is pressed. Settings: Off, Each-on, 1st-on When set to Off Does not reset the oscillation of the LFO. Pressing a key starts the LFO wave at whatever phase the LFO happens to be at that moment. Key On Time When set to Each-on Resets the oscillation of LFO every time a key is pressed and starts the waveform at the phase specified by the Phase parameter. Key On (first note) Key On (second note) Time When set to 1st-on Resets the oscillation of LFO every time a key is pressed and starts the waveform at the phase specified by the Phase parameter. When the second note is played while the first note is held, playback will not be reset. Key On (first note) Key On (second note) Time Loop (LFO Loop Switch) Sets the LFO Wave to loop (repeat) playback or one-shot playback. Settings: Off, On Phase (LFO Phase) You can set the initial phase for the time the LFO Wave is reset. Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 270° Phase Time Level 0° 90° 120° 240° 180° 270° Destination (LFO Destination) Sets the function to be controlled by the LFO Wave. Settings: Insertion Effect A Parameter1–24, Insertion Effect B Parameter1–24 (depending on the Insertion Effect) Depth (LFO Depth) Sets the depth of LFO Wave control for each Destination. Settings: 0–127 301 MODX M Operation Manual 2nd LFO Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Mod/Control → 2nd LFO LFO Wave (2nd LFO Wave) Selects the 2nd LFO. Settings: Triangle, Saw Down, Saw Up, Square, Sine, S/H NOTE The Amplitude Modulation phase is shifted with Sine. Extended LFO (2nd LFO Extended LFO) Switches between the old set of Speed (2nd LFO Speed) settings (Off: 0–99) and a new set of settings with higher resolution (On: 0–415) for Speed (LFO Speed). To maintain compatibility of data created with the old settings, set this parameter to Off. Settings: Off, On Speed (2nd LFO Speed) Sets the speed of LFO Wave (2nd LFO Wave) changes. Settings: 0–99 (When Extended LFO is set to Off), 0–415 (When Extended LFO is set to On) Phase (2nd LFO Phase) You can set the initial phase for the time the LFO Wave (2nd LFO Wave) is reset. Settings: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° Delay (2nd LFO Delay Time) Sets the time length for the 2nd LFO effect to fade in after you have released the key and the delay time set in Delay has elapsed. Settings: 0–99 Key On Reset (2nd LFO Key On Reset) Resets the oscillation of the 2nd LFO when a key is pressed. Settings: Off, On 302 MODX M Operation Manual Pitch Modulation Depth (2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth) This parameter creates a vibrato effect (cyclical changes to the pitch) by using the LFO Wave (2nd LFO Wave) and lets you specify the depth of filter modulation by the LFO. Settings: 0–99 Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio 1~8 (2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth Offset) Sets the depth of the modulation by LFO signals set in Pitch Modulation Depth (2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth). Settings: 0–7 Amplitude Modulation Depth (2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth) This parameter creates cyclical changes in the volume by using the LFO Wave (2nd LFO Wave) and lets you specify the depth of filter modulation by the LFO. Settings: 0–99 Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio 1~8 (2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth Offset) Sets the depth of the modulation by LFO signals set in Amplitude Modulation Depth (2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth). Settings: 0–7 Filter Modulation Depth (2nd LFO Filter Modulation Depth) This parameter creates cyclical changes to the filter cutoff frequency by using the LFO Wave (2nd LFO Wave) and lets you specify the depth of filter modulation by the LFO. Settings: 0–99 303 MODX M Operation Manual Part Edit (FM-X) Operator Edit Screens The Normal Part (FM-X) consists of eight Operators. Part Edit (FM-X) includes Part Common Edit (for setting parameters for the entire Part) and Operator Edit (for setting parameters for individual operators). Form/Freq On the Form/Freq screen, you can set the waveform and frequency of the Operator. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Operator selection → Form/Freq Attack Time (PEG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the pitch to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard until the time the pitch reaches the value set at Attack Level (PEG Attack Level). Settings: 0–99 Decay Time (PEG Decay Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the pitch to change from the value set at the Attack Level (PEG Attack Level) to the moment the PEG changes to the value 0. Settings: 0–99 Initial Level (PEG Initial Level) Sets the pitch for the moment you press the key. Settings: −50–+0–+50 304 MODX M Operation Manual Attack Level (PEG Attack Level) Sets the pitch to change from Initial Level (PEG Initial Level) after you have pressed a key. Settings: −50–+0–+50 Time Level +50 −50 Attack Time Decay Time Attack Level Initial Level Spectral (Spectral Form) Sets the waveform for the selected Operator. Settings: Sine, All 1, All 2, Odd 1, Odd 2, Res 1, Res 2 Sine: Sine wave with no harmonic overtones All 1: Wave with harmonic overtones in a wide Spectral range All 2: Wave with harmonic overtones in a narrow Spectral range Odd 1: Wave containing odd harmonics in a wide Spectral range Odd 2: Wave containing odd harmonics in a narrow Spectral range Res 1: Wave having a peak on a particular harmonic in a wide Spectral range Res 2: Wave having a peak on a particular harmonic in a narrow Spectral range Skirt (Spectral Skirt) Sets the width of the transition band (skirt). The smaller the value, the narrower the skirt becomes to boost a particular harmonic. This parameter is not available when the Spectral (Spectral Form) is set to Sine. Settings: 0–7 305 MODX M Operation Manual Resonance (Spectral Resonance) Sets the sensitivity of the resonance effect in Spectral. The center frequency will be shifted to higher-order harmonics, so you can create the resonance effect or add special characteristics to the sound. This parameter is available only when Spectral (Spectral Form) is set to Res 1 or Res 2. Settings: 0–99 Sine is a simple waveform containing only the fundamental wave with no harmonics, while other waveforms contain harmonic overtones. Therefore, when you have set Form to a wave other than Sine, the parameters related to the harmonics and its “peak” values (formants) will be available. Below are some specific parameters for controlling each wave explained in Spectral. Level Level Level Level Skirt Skirt Skirt Skirt Center Frequency (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) Center Frequency (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) Center Frequency (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) Center Frequency (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) You can increase the number of harmonic overtones by setting a larger Skirt value to expand the spectrum range. Level Level Skirt Resonance of Center Frequency Resonance of Center Frequency Skirt Center Frequency (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) Center Frequency (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Setting a larger Resonance value will shift the center frequency to higher-order harmonics. Resonance is set to 0: Shifts to the first harmonic. Resonance is set to 99: Shifts to the 100th harmonic. 306 MODX M Operation Manual Key On Reset (Oscillator Key On Reset) Resets the oscillation of the Oscillator when a key is pressed. Settings: Off, On Off: If you play a key without resetting the oscillator, the signal waveform will start regardless of the phase at that moment Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the pitch responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. This parameter is available only when Freq Mode (Oscillator Frequency Mode) is set to Fixed. Settings: −7–+0–+7 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the higher the pitch becomes 0: kept unchanged Negative value: The faster the Velocity, the lower the pitch becomes Freq Mode (Oscillator Frequency Mode) Sets the output pitch of the Operator. Settings: Ratio, Fixed Ratio: Sets the output pitch according to the key Fixed: Sets the pitch to the Coarse or Fine setting, regardless of the pitch of the key being pressed Coarse (Coarse Tune) Adjusts the output pitch of each Operator. Settings: When Freq Mode is set to Ratio: 0–31, When Freq Mode is set to Fixed: 0–21 Fine (Fine Tune) Finely adjusts the output pitch of each Operator. Settings: When Freq Mode is set to Ratio: 0–99, When Freq Mode is set to Fixed: 0–127 Detune Sets the output pitch of each Operator slightly higher or lower. When the same value is set to Coarse (Coarse Tune) or Fine (Fine Tune), the Operator with the Detune setting will have slight pitch differences. As a result, you can create a warmer sound or chorusing effect. Settings: −15–+0–+15 Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity) Sets the difference in pitch between two adjacent keys. This parameter is available only when Freq Mode (Oscillator Frequency Mode) is set to Fixed. Settings: 0–99 0: No pitch difference between the two adjacent keys and all keys are played at the pitch set in Coarse or Fine 99: Pitch difference between two adjacent keys is set to a semitone 307 MODX M Operation Manual Level On the Level screen, you can set the general parameters for the Operator. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Operator selection → Level Hold Time (AEG Hold Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the value to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard until the time the value reaches the Rel (Hold) Level (AEG Release (Hold) Level). Settings: 0–99 Attack Time (AEG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the value to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard until the time the value reaches the Attack Level (AEG Attack Level). Settings: 0–99 Decay 1 Time (AEG Decay 1 Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the value to change from the Attack Level (AEG Attack Level) to the Decay 1 Level (AEG Decay 1 Level). Settings: 0–99 Decay 2 Time (AEG Decay 2 Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the value to change from the Decay 1 Level (AEG Decay 1 Level) to the Decay 2 Level (AEG Decay 2 Level). Settings: 0–99 Release Time (AEG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the value to change from the moment you have released the key until the time the value reaches the Rel (Hold) Level (AEG Release (Hold) Level). Settings: 0–99 Attack Level (AEG Attack Level) Sets the value to be changed to after pressing a key. Settings: 0–99 308 MODX M Operation Manual Decay 1 Level (AEG Decay 1 Level) Sets the next value to change from the Attack Level (AEG Attack Level). Settings: 0–99 Decay 2 Level (AEG Decay 2 Level) Sets the value that is maintained while the key is held down. Settings: 0–99 Rel (Hold) Level (AEG Release (Hold) Level) Sets the final value to reach after you have released the key. Settings: 0–99 Level Hold Time Attack Time Decay 1 Time Decay 2 Time Release Time Time Rel (Hold) Level Rel (Hold) Level Decay 1 Level Decay 2 Level Key On Key Off Attack Level Level (Operator Level) Sets the output level for the Operator. Settings: 0–99 Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the Level responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: −7–+0–+7 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the louder the volume becomes 0: No change regardless of the velocity setting. Negative value: The slower the Velocity, the louder the volume becomes Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) Sets how the speed of the level change in AEG responds to key position. Settings: 0–7 Positive value: The lower the key played, the slower the AEG volume changes; the higher the key played, the faster the AEG volume changes. 0: No AEG volume change regardless of the key position Break Point (Level Scaling Break Point) Sets the note number for the Break Point of amplitude scaling. Settings: A−1–C8 Lvl/Key Lo (Level Scaling Low Depth) Lvl/Key Hi (Level Scaling High Depth) Sets the steepness of the change curve. Settings: 0–99 309 MODX M Operation Manual Curve Lo (Level Scaling Low Curve) Curve Hi (Level Scaling High Curve) Sets the change curve for amplitude scaling. Settings: −Linear, −Exp, +Exp, +Linear The keyboard is divided in two at the Break Point. Set Curve Lo for the steepness of the curve on the left side, and Lvl/ Key Lo for the steepness of the curve on the right side. Similarly, set Curve Hi to select the curve for the right side, and Lvl/Key Hi to the steepness of the curve. Low Depth Break Point Output Level Low Curve High Curve Key High Depth Output Level − + +exp +exp +linear +linear −exp −exp −linear −linear The key at the Break Point is the same as the output level set in the Level (Operator Level). With the keys on the left side of the Break Point, the output level is corrected to the curve set in Curve Lo and Lvl/Key Lo. With the keys on the right side of the Break Point, the output level is corrected to the curve set in Curve Hi and Lvl/Key Hi. The output level of Exp curves changes exponentially, while the output level of Linear curves changes linearly. In either case, the farther away from the Break Point, the larger the changes to the output level. 310 MODX M Operation Manual Part Edit (AN-X) Part Common Edit Screens The Normal Part (AN-X) consists of three Oscillators and Noise. The Part Edit (AN-X) includes Part Common Edit for setting parameters for the entire Part, Oscillator Edit for setting parameters for each Oscillator, and Noise Edit for editing Noise. General/Pitch Part Settings The same as General/Pitch → Part Settings on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Zone Settings The same as General/Pitch → Zone Settings on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. AN-X Settings On the AN-X Settings screen, you can set the parameters that are specific to the AN-X sound engine. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → AN-X Settings Unison Creates thickness by layering multiple sounds. Settings: Off, 2, 4 Unison Detune Sets how the pitch of the layered sound is to be shifted. Settings: 0–15 Unison Spread Sets how the layered sounds are spread in the stereo field. Settings: 0–15 311 MODX M Operation Manual OSC Reset Specifies how to reset the Oscillator. Settings: Off, Phase, Tune, Full Off: Does not reset. Phase: Resets the phase of OSC 1–3 at key-on. Tune: Makes the pitch of OSC 1–3 uniform. Full: Enables both Phase and Tune simultaneously Amplitude Osc 1 Osc 2 Osc 3 Key On OSC Reset = Off or Tune OSC Reset = Off or Phase Amplitude Osc 1 Osc 2 Osc 3 Key On OSC Reset = Phase or Full OSC Reset = Tune or Full Osc 1 Osc 3 Osc 2 Pitch t Osc 1, 2, 3 Pitch t Voltage Drift Specifies the pitch of the Oscillator and variation of Filter Cutoff. These variations are also affected by Ageing. Settings: 0–127 0: No variation 64: Standard 127: Maximum variation Ageing Adjusts the frequency response as well as OSC Pitch, Filter Cutoff, and EG Time according to the virtual age of the instrument model. Settings: −100 (old) – +100 (new) „ Voltage Drift and Ageing (1) 21 0 43 64 85 107 128 Voltage Drift Ageing = −100 (Retro) Ageing = 0 (Default) Ageing = 100 (Modern) (1) Variations in Cutoff or Pitch 312 MODX M Operation Manual Filter Offset Cutoff (Filter Cutoff Frequency) Changes the sound by setting the cutoff frequency of the filter. When the Low Pass Filter is selected, larger values here result in a brighter sound, and smaller values result in a darker sound. This parameter is specified as an offset value to the filter cutoff frequency. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Filter Offset Resonance (Filter Offset Resonance/Width) Adds special characteristics to the sound by adjusting the signal level near the cutoff frequency. This is specified as an offset value to the filter resonance. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Filter Offset FEG Depth Sets the depth range for the cutoff frequency change controlled by the FEG. Settings: −64–+0–+63 Filter Type The Filter Type screen will open. Filter EG The Filter EG screen will open. AEG Offset Attack (AEG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to when it reaches the maximum. Sets the offset value to Attack (Amplitude EG Attack Time). Settings: −64–+0–+63 AEG Offset Decay (AEG Decay Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to change after it has reached the maximum. Sets the offset value to Decay (Amplitude EG Decay Time). Settings: −64–+0–+63 AEG Offset Sustain (AEG Sustain Level) Sets the volume that is maintained after the decay time. Sets the offset value to Sustain (Amplitude EG Sustain Level). Settings: −64–+0–+63 AEG Offset Release (AEG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the sound to decay after you have released the key. Sets the offset value to Release (Amplitude EG Release Time). Settings: −64–+0–+63 Amp EG The Amp EG screen will open. 313 MODX M Operation Manual Pitch The screen here is the same as the one opened from General/Pitch → Pitch on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen, except that Legato Slope (Portamento Legato Slope) is disabled. Pitch EG On the Pitch EG screen, you can set the Pitch Envelope Generator. You can use it to set how the sound changes over time, starting from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to when the sound decays. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Pitch EG Attack (Pitch EG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the EG to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard until it reaches the maximum. Settings: 0–255 Decay (Pitch EG Decay Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the EG to change from the maximum to the Sustain (Pitch EG Sustain Level). Settings: 0–255 Sustain (Pitch EG Sustain Level) Sets the Sustain Level. Settings: 0–511 Release (Pitch EG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the EG to reach a value of 0 after you have released the key. Settings: 0–255 Time/Vel (Pitch EG Time Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the velocity changes the EG over time. Larger the value the faster the changes of EG over time when the keys are played with fast velocity. Settings: −255–+0–+255 314 MODX M Operation Manual PEG Depth - Osc 1–3 (Oscillator 1–3 Pitch EG Depth) Sets the maximum amount of pitch change for the EG (in cents). The further the depth is from the value 0, the wider the pitch change range becomes. Settings: −4800 cent – +0 – +4800 cent 0: kept unchanged Negative value: Pitch change is inverted. PEG Depth/Vel - Osc 1–3 (Oscillator 1–3 Pitch EG Depth Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the depth range of the pitch change controlled by the PEG responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: −255–+0–+255 Positive value: Faster Velocity values widen the depth range of the pitch change controlled by the PEG, while slower values narrow the depth range 0: No PEG changes regardless of the velocity setting. Negative value: Faster Velocity values narrow the depth range of the pitch change controlled by the PEG, while slower values widen the depth range When the value is positive Fast Velocity (the depth range in pitch change is wider) Slow Velocity (the depth range in pitch change is narrower) Time (1) Time (1) (1) Pitch Depth 315 MODX M Operation Manual Pitch LFO On the Pitch LFO screen, you can set the Pitch LFO. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Pitch LFO Wave (Pitch LFO Wave) Selects the LFO Wave and sets the type of cyclical changes to the LFOs. Settings: Saw, Square, Triangle, Sine, Random Key On Reset (Pitch LFO Key On Reset) Resets the phase of the LFO when a key is pressed. Settings: Off, On Time Key on Time Key on On Off Speed (Pitch LFO Speed) Sets the speed of LFO wave changes. Settings: 0–415 Delay (Pitch LFO Decay Time) Sets the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into effect. Settings: 0–127 316 MODX M Operation Manual Fade In (Pitch LFO Fade In Time) Sets the time length for the LFO effect to fade in after you have released the key and the delay time set in Delay has elapsed. The larger the value, the longer it takes for the LFO effect to reach the maximum. Settings: 0–214 0: The LFO changes to the maximum value without any fade-ins. When the value is small Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time When the value is large Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time Phase (Pitch LFO Phase) Sets the phase for resetting the wave when a key is pressed. Settings: 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 135, 150, 180, 210, 225, 240, 270, 300, 315, 330(°) Phase of the wave Phase Time Level 0° 90° 120° 240° 180° 270° Pitch LFO Depth - Osc 1–3 (Oscillator 1–3 Pitch LFO Depth) Sets the depth range of pitch change controlled by the LFO. The further the depth is from the value 0, the wider the pitch change range becomes. Settings: −4800 cent – +0 – +4800 cent 0: kept unchanged Negative value: Pitch change is inverted. 317 MODX M Operation Manual Modifier Modifier is a function block for adding distortion to the signal output from the OSC block and for adding harmonics to the sound. Amp Effects Motion Sequencer Envelope Follower Pitch EG Pitch LFO OSC EG OSC LFO Modifier EG Modifier LFO Filter EG Filter LFO Amp EG Amp LFO Part LFO Oscillators Modifier Filters Output Wave Folder Wave Folder is an effect created by folding waveforms according to the specified value. This effect lets you create smooth changes from delicate distortion to sonic destruction. With the AN-X sound engine, you can use this effect on each note independently. Various controllers including EG, LFO, Velocity, and Polyphonic Aftertouch are available for controlling this effect in real- time. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Modifier → Wave Folder 318 MODX M Operation Manual Wave Folder (Modifier Wave Folder) Specifies the degree of wave folding. Settings: 0–255 Folder/Vel (Modifier Wave Folder Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the Wave Folder responds to Velocity. Settings: −255–+0–+255 Texture (Modifier Wave Folder Texture) Changes the texture of the Wave Folder. Settings: 0–255 Folder Type (Modifier Wave Folder Type) Changes the Wave Folder type. Settings: Soft, Hard Modifier EG Settings The Modifier EG screen will open. Modifier LFO Settings The Modifier LFO screen will open. 319 MODX M Operation Manual Modifier EG On the Modifier EG screen, you can set the Envelope Generator for the Modifier. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Modifier → Modifier EG Attack (Modifier EG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the EG to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard until it reaches the maximum. Settings: 0–255 Decay (Modifier EG Decay Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the EG to change from the maximum to the Sustain (Modifier EG Sustain Level). Settings: 0–255 Sustain (Modifier EG Sustain Level) Sets the Sustain Level. Settings: 0–511 Release (Modifier EG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the EG to reach a value of 0 after you have released the key. Settings: 0–255 Time/Vel (Modifier EG Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the velocity changes the EG over time. Larger the value the faster the changes of EG over time when the keys are played with fast velocity. Settings: −255–+0–+255 EG Depth (Modifier Wave Folder EG Depth) Sets how the Wave Folder responds to Modifier EG. Settings: −127–+0–+127 320 MODX M Operation Manual Modifier LFO On the Modifier LFO screen, you can set the Modifier LFO. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Modifier → Modifier LFO Wave (Modifier LFO Wave) Selects the LFO Wave and sets the type of cyclical changes to the LFOs. Settings: Saw, Square, Triangle, Sine, Random Key On Reset (Modifier LFO Key On Reset) Resets the phase of the LFO when a key is pressed. Settings: Off, On Time Key on Time Key on On Off Speed (Modifier LFO Speed) Sets the speed of LFO wave changes. Settings: 0–415 Delay (Modifier LFO Decay Time) Sets the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into effect. Settings: 0–127 321 MODX M Operation Manual Fade In (Modifier LFO Fade In Time) Sets the time length for the LFO effect to fade in after you have released the key and the delay time set in Delay has elapsed. The larger the value, the longer it takes for the LFO effect to reach the maximum. Settings: 0–214 0: The LFO changes to the maximum value without any fade-ins. When the value is small Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time When the value is large Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time Phase (Modifier LFO Phase) Sets the phase for resetting the wave when a key is pressed. Settings: 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 135, 150, 180, 210, 225, 240, 270, 300, 315, 330(°) Phase of the wave Phase Time Level 0° 90° 120° 240° 180° 270° LFO Depth (Modifier Wave Folder LFO Depth) Sets how the Wave Folder responds to Modifier LFO. The further the depth is from the value 0, the wider the pitch change range becomes. Settings: −127–+0–+127 0: kept unchanged Negative value: Pitch change is inverted. 322 MODX M Operation Manual Filter/Amp Mixing On the Mixing screen, you can set the output of each Oscillator while checking the signal flow diagram for the AN-X part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Filter/Amp → Mixing FM 3 → 1 (Oscillator 1 FM Level) FM 3 → 2 (Oscillator 2 FM Level) Sets how OSC3 modulates OSC1 and OSC2 by using frequency modulation (FM). Settings: 0–255 Osc 1 (Oscillator 1) Osc 2 (Oscillator 2) Osc 3 (Oscillator 3) Opens the OSC/Tune screen for Oscillator Edit. Noise The Noise screen appears. Useful for creating various SFX sounds by using filters such as VCF and HPF on the noise signals. Ring 3 → 1 (Oscillator 1 Ring Level) Ring 3 → 2 (Oscillator 2 Ring Level) Sets how the OSC3 modulates OSC1 and OSC2 by using Ring Modulation. Settings: 0–255 1 (Oscillator 1 Out Level) 2 (Oscillator 2 Out Level) 3 (Oscillator 3 Out Level) Noise (Noise Out Level) 1, 2, and 3 are for setting the Oscillator volume. Noise is for adjusting the level of the signal output from the Noise Unit. You can control the level balance with other signals such as OSC 1, OSC 2, and Ring Modulator. Settings: 0–511 323 MODX M Operation Manual Connect 1 (Oscillator 1 Out Select) Connect 2 (Oscillator 2 Out Select) Connect 3 (Oscillator 3 Out Select) Noise Connect (Noise Out Select) Sets the output destination for the Oscillators and Noise. Settings: Filter, Amp Modifier Modifier → Wave Folder is displayed. Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter/Amp → Filter Type is displayed. Amplifier Filter/Amp → Amp EG is displayed. Filter Type On the Filter Type screen, you can select the filter type. The available parameters differ depending on the filter type you have selected here. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Filter/Amp → Filter Type Filter 1 Type Filter 2 Type Sets the filter. The filters available for the AN-X are grouped into three types: LPF, HPF, and BPF. Settings: Thru, LPF24, LPF18, LPF12, LPF6, HPF24, HPF18, HPF12, HPF6, BPF12, BPF6 324 MODX M Operation Manual • LPF Cuts the signals above the value set in Cutoff Frequency. This is very popular and useful for producing classic synthesizer sounds. The sound becomes brighter as you raise the Cutoff Frequency, since more signals are passed by the filter. The sound becomes darker as you lower the Cutoff Frequency, since signals are cut or blocked by the filter. You can produce a distinctive “peaky” sound by raising the Resonance or boosting the signal level near the Cutoff Frequency. Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Cutoff Frequency Resonance Frequency Cutoff Frequency Frequency Gain Gain LPF24: −24 dB/oct LPF18: −18 dB/oc LPF12: −12 dB/oct LPF6: −6 dB/oct • HPF A Filter Type that only passes signals above the Cutoff Frequency. You can produce a distinctive “peaky” sound by raising the Resonance or boosting the signal level near the Cutoff Frequency. Resonance Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Frequency Cutoff Frequency Gain HPF24: −24 dB/oct HPF18: −18 dB/oct HPF12: −12 dB/oct HPF6: −6dB/oct • BPF A Filter Type that only passes signals for a specific frequency band (Cutoff Frequency) and cuts all other signals. Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Frequency Center Frequency Gain BPF12: −12dB/oct BPF6: −6dB/oct 325 MODX M Operation Manual Cutoff (Filter Cutoff) Sets the cutoff frequency. The frequency set here is used by the filter set in Filter Type. Settings: 0–1023 Resonance (Filter Resonance) Sets the size of the Resonance. This parameter may not be available depending on the Filter Type. Settings: 0–255 Cutoff/Vel (Filter Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: −255–+0–+255 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the higher the Cutoff Frequency value becomes 0: Cutoff frequency does not respond to the Velocity. Negative value: The slower the Velocity, the higher the Cutoff Frequency value becomes Resonance/Vel (Filter Resonance Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the resonance level responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. This parameter may not be available depending on the Filter Type. Settings: −255–+0–+255 Positive value: The higher the Velocity, the greater the Resonance becomes Negative value: The lower the Velocity, the greater the Resonance becomes 0: Resonance value does not change in response to Velocity. Cutoff/Key (Filter Cutoff Key Follow) Sets how the cutoff frequency level of the filter responds to the key position. When the value is set to 1oct, both the pitch and the cutoff frequency change at the same rate. Settings: Off, 1/3oct, 1/2oct, 2/3oct, 1oct, 2oct Filter 1 Drive (Filter 1 Saturator Drive) Filter 2 Drive (Filter 2 Saturator Drive) Sets the amount of distortion controlled by the Saturator section of the filter. Settings: 0.0 dB–60.0 dB (in units of 0.75 dB) Filter 1 Drive/Vel (Filter 1 Saturator Drive Velocity Sensitivity) Filter 2 Drive/Vel (Filter 2 Saturator Drive Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the Drive responds to Velocity. Settings: −255–+0–+255 F1 Out Level (Filter 1 Out Level) F2 Out Level (Filter 2 Out Level) Sets the output level for the Filter. Settings: −12.000 – +0.000 – +12.000 (dB) (in units of 0.375 dB) 326 MODX M Operation Manual Filter EG On the Filter EG screen, you can set the Filter Envelope Generator (FEG). The FEG lets you set the degree (or level) of changes to the Cutoff Frequency and how those changes evolve over time, starting from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to the moment the sound decays. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Filter/Amp → Filter EG Attack (Filter Cutoff EG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the EG to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard until it reaches the maximum. Settings: 0–255 Decay (Filter Cutoff EG Decay Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the EG to change from the maximum to the Sustain (Filter Cutoff EG Sustain Level). Settings: 0–255 Sustain (Filter Cutoff EG Sustain Level) Sets the Sustain Level. Settings: 0–511 Release (Filter Cutoff EG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the EG to reach a value of 0 after you have released the key. Settings: 0–255 Time/Vel (Filter Cutoff EG Time Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: −255–+0–+255 Positive value: The faster the velocity the faster the FEG changes 0: No changes regardless of the Velocity setting. Negative value: Fast velocity values result in slower FEG changes, while slow velocity values result in faster FEG changes. 327 MODX M Operation Manual FEG Depth - Filter 1–2 (Filter 1–2 Cutoff EG Depth) Sets the depth range for the cutoff frequency change controlled by the FEG in 50 cent units. The depth range of the Cutoff Frequency change becomes wider the further the setting is from a value of 0. Settings: −9600 – +0 – +9600 (cent) 0: No changes to the cutoff frequency by the FEG Negative value: Cutoff frequency changes are reversed. FEG Depth/Vel - Filter 1–2 (Filter 1–2 Cutoff EG Depth Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the Cutoff Frequency controlled by the FEG responds to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: −255–+0–+255 Positive value: The faster the Velocity, the wider the depth range in Cutoff Frequency change by the FEG; the slower the Velocity, the narrower the depth range 0: Cutoff frequency does not respond to the Velocity. Negative value: The faster the Velocity, the narrower the depth range in Cutoff Frequency change by the FEG; the slower the Velocity, the wider the depth range Filter LFO On the Filter LFO screen, you can set the Filter LFO. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Filter/Amp → Filter LFO Wave (Filter Common Cutoff LFO Wave) Selects an LFO wave. By using the wave you have selected here, you can create various types of modulation. Settings: Saw, Square, Triangle, Sine, Random 328 MODX M Operation Manual Key On Reset (Filter Common Cutoff LFO Key On Reset) Resets the oscillation of the LFO when a key is pressed. Settings: Off, On Time Key on Time Key on On Off Speed (Filter Common Cutoff LFO Speed) Sets the speed of LFO wave changes. Settings: 0–415 Delay (Filter Common Cutoff LFO Decay Time) Sets the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into effect. The larger the value, the longer the delay time for the LFO to come into effect. Settings: 0–127 Fade In (Filter Common Cutoff LFO Fade In Time) Sets the time length for the LFO effect to fade in after you have released the key and the delay time set in Delay has elapsed. The larger the value, the longer it takes for the LFO effect to reach the maximum. Settings: 0–214 0: The LFO changes to the maximum value without any fade-ins. When the value is small Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time When the value is large Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time 329 MODX M Operation Manual Phase (Modifier LFO Phase) You can set the initial phase for the time the LFO wave is reset. Settings: 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 135, 150, 180, 210, 225, 240, 270, 300, 315, 330(°) Phase of the wave Phase Time Level 0° 90° 120° 240° 180° 270° Filter LFO Depth - Filter 1–2 (Filter Cutoff LFO Depth) Sets the depth of the LFO Wave control for Filter 1 and Filter 2 in 50 cent units. Settings: −9600 – +0 – +9600 (cent) Amp EG On the Amp EG screen, you can set the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator). By setting the Amp EG, you can set how the volume changes from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to when the sound decays. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Filter/Amp → Amp EG Attack (Amplitude EG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to when the Level (Amplitude Level) is reached. Settings: 0–255 330 MODX M Operation Manual Decay (Amplitude EG Decay Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the volume to change from the Level (Amplitude Level) to the Sustain (Amplitude EG Sustain Level). Settings: 0–255 Sustain (Amplitude EG Sustain Level) Sets the volume that is maintained while the key is held down. Settings: 0–511 Release (Amplitude EG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes after you have release the key to when the sound decays. Settings: 0–255 Time/Vel (Amplitude EG Time Velocity Sensitivity) Sets the length of time it takes for volume changes in AEG to respond to Velocity or the strength of the keystroke. Settings: −255–+0–+255 Positive value: The faster the velocity, the faster the AEG volume changes. 0: No changes regardless of the Velocity setting. Negative value: Fast velocity values result in slower AEG volume changes, while slow velocity values result in faster AEG volume changes. Level (Amplitude Level) Sets the volume level of Amplitude. Settings: 0–511 Level/Vel (Amplitude Level Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the Amplitude level responds to Velocity. Settings: −255–+0–+255 Level/Key (Amplitude Level Key Follow) Sets how the Amp Level responds to pitch. When Amplitude Level Key is set to 127, the Amp Level goes down 6 dB as the pitch goes up one octave. Settings: 0–127 Drive (Amplitude Saturator Drive) Sets the amount of distortion controlled by the Saturator of the Amplitude section. Settings: 0.0 dB–60.0 dB (in units of 0.75 dB) 331 MODX M Operation Manual Amp LFO On the Amp LFO screen, you can set the Amplitude LFO. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Filter/Amp → Amp LFO Wave (Amplitude LFO Wave) Selects an LFO wave. By using the wave you have selected here, you can create various types of modulation. Settings: Saw, Square, Triangle, Sine, Random Key On Reset (Amplitude LFO Key On Reset) Resets the oscillation of the LFO when a key is pressed. Settings: Off, On Time Key on Time Key on On Off Speed (Amplitude LFO Speed) Sets the speed of LFO wave changes. Settings: 0–415 Delay (Amplitude LFO Decay Time) Sets the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into effect. The larger the value, the longer the delay time for the LFO to come into effect. Settings: 0–127 332 MODX M Operation Manual Fade In (Amplitude LFO Fade In Time) Sets the time length for the LFO effect to fade in after you have released the key and the delay time set in Delay has elapsed. The larger the value, the longer it takes for the LFO effect to reach the maximum. Settings: 0–214 0: The LFO changes to the maximum value without any fade-ins. When the value is small Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time When the value is large Fade In Maximum Delay Key On Time Phase (Amplitude LFO Phase) You can set the initial phase for the time the LFO wave is reset. Settings: 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 135, 150, 180, 210, 225, 240, 270, 300, 315, 330(°) Phase of the wave Phase Time Level 0° 90° 120° 240° 180° 270° Depth (Amplitude Level LFO Depth) Sets the depth range of volume changes controlled by the LFO. Settings: −127–+0–+127 333 MODX M Operation Manual Effect Routing The screen here is almost the same as the one opened from Effect → Routing on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen, with the exceptions listed below. • No output setting for each Element • Cannot select Parallel for Ins Connect Ins A, Ins B The same as Audio In → Ins A, Ins B on the Common Edit screen. 3-band EQ The same as Effect → 3-band EQ on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 2-band EQ The same as Effect → 2-band EQ on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Ins Assign The same as Effect → Ins Assign on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 334 MODX M Operation Manual Arp/MS Arp Common The same as Arpeggio → Common on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Individual The same as Arpeggio → Individual on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Advanced The same as Arpeggio → Advanced on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. MS Common The same as Motion Seq → Common on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Lane The same as Motion Seq → Lane on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. 335 MODX M Operation Manual Mod/Control Control Assign Other than the Destination setting, the same as Mod/Control → Control Assign on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Use the parameters shown below, instead of ElementSw and others. Oscillator Sw (Oscillator Switch) You can set the controller setting for each Oscillator on or off. This parameter is shown only when the selected Destination is related to Oscillators. Usually, there are three switches shown, but when the Destination is set to OSC FM or OSC Ring, only two of them will be shown. Settings: Off, On Filter Sw You can set the controller setting for each Filter on or off. This parameter is shown only when the selected Destination is related to filters. Settings: Off, On After Touch Other than the Destination setting, the same as Mod/Control → After Touch on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Tx/Rx Switch The same as Mod/Control → Tx/Rx Switch on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Control Settings The same as Mod/Control → Control Settings on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen. Part LFO The screen here is the same as the one opened from Mod/Control → Part LFO on the Part Edit (AWM2) Part Common Edit screen, except that the only available Destination setting is Ins. 336 MODX M Operation Manual Part Edit (AN-X) Oscillator Edit Screens The Normal Part (AN-X) consists of three Oscillators and Noise. The Part Edit (AN-X) includes Part Common Edit for setting parameters for the entire Part, Oscillator Edit for setting parameters for each Oscillator, and Noise Edit for editing Noise. OSC/Tune On the OSC/Tune screen, you can set the general parameters for the Oscillator. The modulation and wave shaping functions available on this screen are FM (Frequency Modulation), Ring Modulation, Oscillator Sync, Pulse Width, and Wave Shaper. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Oscillator selection → OSC/Tune Wave (Oscillator Wave) Sets the waveform for the Oscillator. Settings: Saw1, Saw2 (variation of Saw1 with thicker sound), Square, Triangle, Sine Out Level (Oscillator Out Level) Sets the volume of the Oscillators. Settings: 0–511 Out Level/Vel (Oscillator Out Level Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the Oscillator volume responds to Velocity. Settings: −255–+0–+255 337 MODX M Operation Manual Invert (Oscillator Out Invert Enable) Performs negative/positive inversion of the Oscillator output. Settings: Off, On Connect (Oscillator Out Select) Sets the output destination for the Oscillators. Settings: Filter, Amp Octave (Oscillator Octave) Sets the pitch of the Oscillator in octaves. Settings: 64’, 32’, 16’, 8’, 4’, 2’, 1’ Pitch (Oscillator Pitch) Finely adjusts the pitch of the Oscillator. Settings: −1200 – +0 – +1200(cent) „ FM (Frequency Modulation) Modulates the frequency of the Oscillator by using another Oscillator. FM Level (Oscillator FM Level) Sets the level of the Frequency Modulation. Settings: 0–255 FM Level/Vel (Oscillator FM Level Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how Frequency Modulation responds to Velocity. Settings: −255–+0–+255 „ Ring Modulation By mixing two Oscillator signals, you can create a metallic inharmonic sound. Ring Level (Oscillator Ring Level) Sets the level of Ring Modulation. Settings: 0–255 Ring Level/Vel (Oscillator Ring Level Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how Ring Modulation responds to Velocity. Settings: −255–+0–+255 „ Oscillator Sync Oscillator Sync is a system that creates complex waves by forcing two Oscillators to synchronize. The AN-X sound engine allows each Oscillator to set its synchronization timing, so you can use a single Oscillator for creating complex waveforms. Sync Pitch (Oscillator Self Sync Pitch) Sets the level of the Oscillator Sync in 25 cent units. Settings: 0–4800 (cent) Sync Pitch/Vel (Oscillator Self Sync Pitch Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how Sync Pitch responds to Velocity. Settings: −255–+0–+255 338 MODX M Operation Manual „ Pulse Width Pulse Width is the ratio of the negative and positive parts of the Square wave. When Pulse Width is set to a small value When Pulse Width is set to 50% When Pulse Width is set to a large value The AN-X sound engine lets you use Pulse Width not just on Square waves but also other waves. Modulation of the LFO by using Pulse Width is called Pulse Width Modulation (PWM), which allows you to create a characteristic swirling sound. With the AN-X sound engine, you can use PWM by using Osc EG and Osc LFO. you can specify the level of PWM on the Osc EG screen and Osc LFO screen. Pulse Width (Oscillator Pulse Width) Sets the Pulse Width of the wave. Settings: 1.0%–50.0%–99.0% PulseWidth/Vel (Oscillator Pulse Width Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how Pulse Width responds to Velocity. Settings: −255–+0–+255 „ Wave Shaper Creates a characteristic distortion and changes to the harmonic content by changing the shape of the waveform. Shaper (Oscillator Wave Shaper) Sets the level of the Wave Shaper. By using Wave Shaper, the wave changes dynamically. Settings: 0–255 Shaper/Vel (Oscillator Wave Shaper Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how Wave Shaper responds to Velocity. Settings: −255–+0–+255 Pitch EG Settings General/Pitch → Pitch EG is shown on the Part Edit (AN-X) Part Common Edit screen. Pitch LFO Settings General/Pitch → Pitch LFO is shown on the Part Edit (AN-X) Part Common Edit screen. OSC 1–3 EG Settings The OSC EG screen appears. OSC 1–3 LFO Settings The OSC LFO screen appears. 339 MODX M Operation Manual OSC EG On the OSC EG screen, you can set the Envelope Generator for the Oscillator. You can set how the Sync, Pulse Width, and Wave Shaper change over time, starting from the moment you press a key on the keyboard to when the sound decays. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Oscillator selection → OSC EG Attack (Oscillator EG Attack Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the EG to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard until it reaches the value set at the Attack Level. Settings: 0–255 Decay (Oscillator EG Decay Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the EG to change from the moment you press a key on the keyboard until it reaches the value set at the Decay Level. Settings: 0–255 Sustain (Oscillator EG Sustain Level) Sets the Sustain Level. Settings: 0–511 Release (Oscillator EG Release Time) Sets the length of time it takes for the EG to reach a value of 0 after you have released the key. Settings: 0–255 Osc EG Depth Sync (Oscillator Self Sync EG Depth) Sets how the Sync responds to Osc EG. Settings: −4800 – +0 – +4800 (cent) Osc EG Depth Pulse Width (Oscillator Pulse Width EG Depth) Sets how the Pulse Width responds to Osc EG. Settings: −127–+0–+127 Osc EG Depth Shaper (Oscillator Wave Shaper EG Depth) Sets how the Shaper responds to Osc EG. Settings: −127–+0–+127 340 MODX M Operation Manual OSC LFO On the OSC LFO screen, you can set the Oscillator LFO. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Oscillator selection → OSC LFO LFO Wave (Oscillator LFO Wave) Selects an LFO wave. By using the wave you have selected here, you can create various types of modulation. Settings: Saw, Square, Triangle, Sine, Random Key On Reset (Oscillator LFO Key On Reset) Resets the oscillation of the LFO when a key is pressed. Settings: Off, On Time Key on Time Key on On Off Speed (Oscillator LFO Speed) Sets the speed of LFO wave changes. Settings: 0–415 341 MODX M Operation Manual Delay (Oscillator LFO Delay Time) Sets the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into effect. Settings: 0–127 Fade In (Oscillator LFO Fade In Time) Sets the time length for the LFO effect to fade in after you have released the key and the delay time set in Delay has elapsed. Settings: 0–214 Oscillator LFO Phase Sets the LFO phase for resetting the wave when a key is pressed. Settings: 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 135, 150, 180, 210, 225, 240, 270, 300, 315, 330(°) Osc LFO Depth Sync (Oscillator Self Sync LFO Depth) Sets how the Sync responds to Osc LFO. Settings: −4800 – +0 – +4800 (cent) Osc LFO Depth Pulse Width (Oscillator Pulse Width LFO Depth) Sets how the Pulse Width responds to Osc LFO. Settings: −127–+0–+127 Osc LFO Depth Shaper (Oscillator Wave Shaper LFO Depth) Sets how the Shaper responds to Osc LFO. Settings: −127–+0–+127 342 MODX M Operation Manual Part Edit (AN-X) Noise Edit Screens The Normal Part (AN-X) consists of three Oscillators and Noise. The Part Edit (AN-X) includes Part Common Edit for setting parameters for the entire Part, Oscillator Edit for setting parameters for each Oscillator, and Noise Edit for editing Noise. Noise On the Noise screen, you can set the Noise Generator. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Oscillator selection → Noise Noise Tone (Noise Generator Tone) Sets the frequency response for the Noise. Settings: 0–64–127 0–63: Cuts the treble 64: White noise 65–127: Cuts the bass Out Level (Noise Generator Out Level) Sets the volume of the Noise. Settings: 0–511 Out Level/Vel (Noise Generator Out Level Velocity Sensitivity) Sets how the Noise volume responds to Velocity. Settings: −255–+0–+255 Connect (Noise Generator Out Select) Sets the output destination for the Noise. Settings: Filter, Amp 343 MODX M Operation Manual Category Search Screens Category Search is a convenient function that allows you to quickly find a specific Performance, Part, Arpeggio, or Waveform you wish to use from a specified category. Performance Category Search On the Performance Category Search screen, you can search for and select Performances. While the Category Search screen is shown, you can use the buttons on the top panel to change the Part Select or Mute settings. Operation Press the [CATEGORY] button Tap the Performance name and select Category Search from the context menu Filter Select a filter to use in a search. Settings: Category, Attribute Main (Main Category) Sub (Sub Category) Filters by category. By unchecking the Main or Sub checkbox, you can cancel filtering by category. Settings: Refer to the Data List Attribute Filters by attribute. By unchecking the Attribute checkbox, you can cancel filtering by attribute. Settings: AWM2, FM-X, AN-X, MC, SSS, Smart Morph, Single, Multi, MOTIF XF, MONTAGE, MODX M OS V1.0 344 MODX M Operation Manual Bank/Favorite (Bank/Favorite Select) Filters by bank or Favorites. When Favorite is selected, only the Performances with Favorite Flags will appear in the list. When the Category Search screen is shown, you can press the [CATEGORY] button to switch the Bank in the order of All → Favorite → Preset → User → Library name (when a Library file is loaded). When you hold down the [CATEGORY] button, the selection will be reset to All. Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library name (when a Library file is loaded) Name Search Allows you to enter certain characters included in the name for easy searching. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Job Calls up the Job menu. • Delete Deletes the selected content. This parameter is available only when a Performance in the User Bank is selected. • Rename Changes the name of the selected content. This parameter is available only when a Performance in the User Bank is selected. • Favorite All Clear Clears all Favorite Flags from the Performances. This parameter is not available when there are no Performances with Favorite Flags. Sort Sets the sort order of the Performance list. Settings: Default, Name, Date Name: Sorts by name. The down arrow indicates that the list is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). The up arrow indicates that the list is arranged in descending order. Date: Sorts by date the setting was stored. The down arrow indicates that the list is arranged in descending order (new to old). The up arrow indicates that the list is arranged in ascending order. Audition Sets the audition phrase playback on or off. This parameter is not available when Audition Lock is set to On at [UTILITY] → Settings → Advanced. Settings: Off, On Performance list Shows the Performance name, along with its active Parts, attributes, and Favorite Flag status. 345 MODX M Operation Manual Performance Merge The Performance Merge screen allows you to assign multiple Parts of the selected Performance to empty Parts of another Performance. For example, you can layer a four-Part piano Performance and a two-part string Performance to create a rich six-part Performance. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection (if the selected Part and all subsequent Parts are empty) → Tap [+] Source When selecting a Performance, the sound of the Part specified here is assigned to the currently selected Part. Settings: All, Part 1–16 All: All Parts in the selected Performance are assigned to empty Parts of the other selected Performance (as much as possible). Part 1–16: Only the sound of the specified Part will be assigned to the other selected Part Mute Org (Original Part Mute) When this is set to Off, the Parts that were displayed before the Performance Merge screen was opened will be muted. Settings: Off, On Mute Add (Additional Part Mute) When this is set to Off, the Parts added on the Performance Merge screen will be muted. Settings: Off, On 346 MODX M Operation Manual Part Category Search On the Part Category Search screen, you can search for and select Parts. Operation [SHIFT] + [CATEGORY] (When selecting a Part to which a sound has already been assigned) Tap the Performance name and select Category Search from the context menu (When selecting an empty Part to which a sound has already been assigned) Tap [+] Source (Source Part) When selecting a Performance, the sound of the Part specified here is assigned to the currently selected Part. The initial setting is Part 1. Settings: Part 1–16 Solo Sets the Solo function on or off. When this switch is turned On, the selected Part is set to solo. Settings: Off, On Param. with Part (Parameter with Part) Loads a group of parameter values when a Performance is selected. The parameter groups set to Off will retain their current settings even when a new Performance is selected. Parameter groups: Mixing, Arp/MS, Scene, Zone Settings: Off, On 347 MODX M Operation Manual Rhythm Pattern On the Rhythm Pattern screen, you can search for and select Rhythm Patterns. The Rhythm Pattern function allows you to instantly add a rhythm Part to the current Performance. Also, by combining Rhythm Patterns with envelope follower effects, you can further change the sound. Operation [SHIFT] + [SONG/PATTERN] Arp (Arpeggio) Envelope Follower Selects Arpeggio display or Envelope Follower display. Bank/Favorite (Bank/Favorite Select) Filters by bank or Favorites. When Favorite is selected, only the Rhythm Patterns with Favorite Flags will appear in the list. Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library name (when a Library file is loaded) Name Search Allows you to enter certain characters included in the name for easy searching. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Sort Sets the sort order of the Rhythm Pattern list. Settings: Default, Name, Date Name: Sorts by name. The down arrow indicates that the list is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). The up arrow indicates that the list is arranged in descending order. Date: Sorts by date the setting was stored. The down arrow indicates that the list is arranged in descending order (new to old). The up arrow indicates that the list is arranged in ascending order. Mute Org (Original Part Mute) When this is set to Off, the Parts that were displayed before the Rhythm Pattern screen was opened will be muted. Settings: Off, On Mute Add (Additional Part Mute) When this is set to Off, the Parts added on the Rhythm Pattern screen will be muted. Settings: Off, On Rhythm Pattern list Shows the Rhythm Pattern list. 348 MODX M Operation Manual Cancel Cancels the operation. „ When Arp is set to On Frequently used parameters for Arpeggio settings are displayed on the left side of the screen. Tempo Sets the tempo. Settings: 5–300 Volume Sets the volume of the Rhythm Pattern. Settings: 0–127 Category (Arpeggio Main Category) Sub Category (Arpeggio Sub Category) Name Shows the currently selected Arpeggio category, Sub category, and name. By tapping on the name, you will see the context menu for Arpeggio Category Search and entering numbers. Settings: Refer to the Data List Arp Select (Arpeggio Select) Selects the Arpeggio. Settings: 1–8 349 MODX M Operation Manual „ When Envelope Follower is set to On Frequently used parameters for the Envelope Follower settings are shown on the left side of the screen. This allows for quick editing of parameters frequently used for Rhythm Patterns. When you wish to change other parameters, use Edit to open the Envelope Follower Edit screen. Quick Assign Enables Envelope Follower. Settings: Off, On Gain (Envelope Follower Gain) Sets the input gain for the input source. Settings: −24.0dB – 0.0dB – 24.0dB Destination Sets the destination for the Envelope Follower. Settings: Volume, Cutoff, Resonance, Pitch, Pan, Reverb Send, Variation Send, LFO Speed, LFO Depth 1, LFO Depth 2, LFO Depth 3 Curve Type Polarity (Curve Polarity) Ratio (Curve Ratio) Param1 (Curve Parameter 1) Param2 (Curve Parameter 2) The same as the Control Assign screen. Edit The Envelope Follower Edit screen appears. 350 MODX M Operation Manual How to use the Rhythm Pattern function Here, we will show an example of how to add the Rhythm Pattern 8Z Trance Basics 1 to the Performance Supertrance, and then modify the sound with the Envelope Follower. First, add a rhythm part. 1. Select the performance to which you want to add a rhythm part. Select Supertrance. 2. Press [SHIFT]+[SONG/PATTERN] to open the Rhythm Pattern screen. When all of Parts 1–8 are being used, PartFull will be shown and no Rhythm Patterns can be added. 3. Tap the kit of the rhythm pattern you want to use from the rhythm pattern list. Tap 8Z Trance Basics 1. The rhythm Part has been added. 4. Press the key to play the rhythm. 5. Press the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button or the [EXIT] button to confirm the Rhythm Pattern. The Rhythm Pattern screen will close. NOTE You can also confirm the selection by tapping the HOME icon ( ). 6. To stop the Rhythm Pattern, press the [ARP] button or the [  ] (Stop) button. Next, set the Envelope Follower. For information about the Envelope Follower, see "Using the Envelope Follower." 7. Press [SHIFT]+[SONG/PATTERN] to open the Rhythm Pattern screen, and tap Envelope Follower. 8. Set Quick Assign to On. You can play the keyboard to hear the sound with the Envelope Follower enabled. 351 MODX M Operation Manual 9. The settings can be adjusted as necessary. Here, in this example, set the Polarity to Bi, the Ratio to −64, and the Gain to −12.0 dB. For finer adjustments, open the Envelope Follower Edit from Edit on the screen. When you wish to change the Rhythm Pattern kit or Arpeggio type, press [SHIFT]+[SONG/PATTERN] to go back to the Rhythm Pattern screen. The Envelope Follower settings are retained even after the kit or the Arpeggio type has been changed. 352 MODX M Operation Manual Arp Category Search (Arpeggio Category Search) On the Arp Category Search screen, you can search for and select Arpeggio types. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arpeggio → Individual → [CATEGORY] [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arp / MS → Arp Overview → Part selection → [CATEGORY] Classic (Classic Switch) Sets the Classic view on or off. In the Classic view, only common arpeggios are listed, and no filters are available for search. Settings: Off, On Main (Main Category) Sub (Sub Category) Filters by category. By unchecking the Main or Sub checkbox, you can cancel filtering by category. Settings: Refer to the Data List Attribute Filters by attribute. By unchecking the Attribute checkbox, you can cancel filtering by attribute. Settings: Note, Chord, Other, Intro, Main, Fill, Ending, AF, Accent, Random SFX, Mg, number of bars, time signature, tempo Bank/Favorite (Bank/Favorite Select) Filters by bank or Favorites. When Favorite is selected, only the Arpeggio types with Favorite Flags will appear in the list. Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library name (when a Library file is loaded) 353 MODX M Operation Manual Name Search Allows you to enter certain characters included in the name for easy searching. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Job Calls up the Job menu. • Delete Deletes the selected content. This parameter is available only when the Arpeggio in the User Bank is selected. • Rename Changes the name of the selected content. This parameter is available only when the Arpeggio in the User Bank is selected. • Favorite All Clear Clears all Favorite Flags from the Arpeggios. This parameter is not available when there are no Arpeggio types with Favorite Flags. Sort Sets the sort order of the Arpeggio type list. Settings: Default, Name, Date Name: Sorts by name. The down arrow indicates that the list is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). The up arrow indicates that the list is arranged in descending order. Date: Sorts by date the setting was loaded. The down arrow indicates that the list is arranged in descending order (new to old). The up arrow indicates that the list is arranged in ascending order. Arpeggio list Shows the Arpeggio name, number of measures, time signature, recommended tempo, Attributes, and Favorite Flag status. 354 MODX M Operation Manual Waveform Search (Waveform Category Search) On the Waveform Search screen, you can search for and select Waveforms. Operation Waveform-related screen → Part selection → Waveform selection → [CATEGORY] Bank/Favorite (Bank/Favorite Select) Filters by bank or Favorites. When Favorite is selected, only Waveforms with Favorite Flags will appear in the list. Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library name (when a Library file is loaded) Name Search Allows you to enter certain characters included in the name for easy searching. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Main (Main Category) Sub (Sub Category) Filters by category. By unchecking the Main or Sub checkbox, you can cancel filtering by category. Settings: Refer to the Data List Job Calls up the Job menu. • Delete Deletes the selected content. This parameter is available only when a Waveform in the User Bank is selected. • Rename Changes the name of the selected content. This parameter is available only when a Waveform in the User Bank is selected. • Favorite All Clear Clears all Favorite Flags from the Waveforms. This parameter is not available when there are no Waveforms with Favorite Flags. 355 MODX M Operation Manual Sort Sets the sort order of the Waveform list. Settings: Default, Name, Date Name: Sorts by name. The down arrow indicates that the list is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). The up arrow indicates that the list is arranged in descending order. Date: Sorts by date the setting was stored. The down arrow indicates that the list is arranged in descending order (new to old). The up arrow indicates that the list is arranged in ascending order. Waveform list Shows the Waveform list. 356 MODX M Operation Manual Live Set Screens The Live Set function is a convenient way to instantaneously change among different Performances as you play songs on a setlist, for example. Live Set On the Live Set screen, you can call up a Performance. When you press [SHIFT] + [EDIT/ ] while the User Bank is selected, a dialog will be shown and then you can copy or exchange pages or banks. Operation Press the [LIVE SET] button Tap the LIVE SET icon ( ) Bank (Bank Name) Selects the Live Set bank. Settings: Preset, User 1–8 (factory default settings), Library name (when a Library file is loaded) Page Selects the Live Set page. Edit The Live Set Edit screen appears. Edit appears only when User Bank is selected. Live Set Slot 1–16 Displays a list of Performances registered on the selected Live Set page. Category Search The Performance Category Search screen will open. 357 MODX M Operation Manual Current Performance Name Shows the name of the Performance registered in the selected slot. Current Slot Name Shows the name of the selected slot. When a Pattern, Song, or audio is assigned to a slot, the name of the Pattern or Song, or the audio file will be shown. Performance Attribute Shows the attribute(s) of the Performance registered in the selected slot. On the Live Set screen, the PTN icon changes to PTN CHAIN when a Pattern with chain on is assigned to a slot. PTN: Displayed for a slot to which a Pattern is assigned. PTN CHAIN: Displayed for a slot to which a Pattern with chain on is assigned. SONG: Displayed for a slot to which a Song is assigned. AUDIO: Displayed for a slot to which audio is assigned. 358 MODX M Operation Manual Live Set Register On the Live Set Register screen, you can register Performances to Live Set slots. Operation [SHIFT] + [LIVE SET] While holding down the [SHIFT] button, tap the LIVE SETicon on the Navigation bar Store as New Perf. and Register (Store as New Performance and Register) Stores the current Performance as a new Performance and registers it to the selected slot. Jump to Data Utility The Data Utility screen appears. Overwrite Current Perf. and Register (Overwrite Current Performance and Register) Stores the new Performance over the existing Performance and registers it to the selected slot. Register Registers Performances. While holding down the [SHIFT] button, press Register to register a Performance by inserting it between slots. 359 MODX M Operation Manual Live Set Edit On the Live Set Edit screen, you can edit Live Sets. Only Live Sets in the User Bank can be edited. Operation [LIVE SET] → [EDIT/ ] Bank (Bank Name) Saves the selected Live Set bank under a new name. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Page (Page Name) Saves the selected Live Set page under a new name. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Done Tap to close the Live Set Edit and show the Live Set screen. Live Set Slot 1–16 Displays a list of Performances registered to the selected Live Set. [+] (Add) Tap to register the selected Performance to that slot. Job Calls up the Job menu. • Copy Turns the copy function on. You can copy settings by selecting a slot to copy from, tapping Copy, and then selecting the slot to copy to. Settings: Off, On • Exchange Turns the exchange function on. You can exchange settings by selecting the first slot, tapping Exchange, and then selecting the second slot. Settings: Off, On • Delete Select the slot, and then tap Delete to delete any registered Performances and other settings from the slot. • Delete & Move Select the slot, and then tap Delete & Move to delete any registered Performances and other settings from the slot and move the subsequent slots up. 360 MODX M Operation Manual Slot Type Selects the slot type. Settings: Perform, Song, Audio, Pattern Perform: Registers only the Performance to the slot Song: Registers the Performance and Song to the slot Audio: Registers the Performance and audio file to the slot Pattern: Registers the Performance and Pattern to the slot Slot Name Song Name Audio Name Pattern Name Shows the Slot Name when the Slot Type is Perform. Tapping on the name calls up the onscreen keyboard, allowing you to enter a name for the current slot. You can use up to 20 alphanumeric characters. When the Slot Type is Pattern, the Pattern Name is displayed; when it is Song, the Song Name is displayed; and when it is Audio, the Audio Name is displayed. The registered Pattern, Song or Audio will be shown. When you tap on the name, the Utility Load screen appears. Then you can select the Pattern, Song, or Audio to register. Performance (Performance Name) Shows the name of the Performance registered to the selected slot. Tap to display the Performance Category Search screen. Color Sets the color for the selected slot. Settings: Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, Azure, Pink, Orange, Purple, Sakura, Cream, Lime, Aqua, Beige, Mint, Lilac Volume Sets the volume of the Performance registered in the selected slot. SSS Time Adjusts the SSS Time of the selected slot. If you set the SSS Time, even if you change the Performance while playing, if the sound being played is set to Note Off, the sound will fade out after the set time. Settings: 0.0sec – 30sec, Hold, System Playing back the Pattern, Song, or Audio file from the Live Set screen Operation [LIVE SET] (or tap the LIVE SET icon on the top panel) → User Bank selection → Slot selection → [  ] (Play) button NOTE • Performance and slot cannot be changed while the Pattern or Song is being played back. If you attempt to change them, an error message will appear. • When you press the [  ] (Play) button while the Pattern, Song, or Audio file is played back, the Pattern, Song, or Audio file playback screen will open. 361 MODX M Operation Manual Utility Screens The Utility screen is used for setting common items for the entire instrument. Settings Sound The Sound screen is used for setting the sound output from the instrument. Operation [UTILITY] → Settings → Sound Tone Generator Volume Sets the overall volume of the sound output from the instrument. Settings: 0–127 Tone Generator Note Shift Adjusts the pitch of the overall sound produced by the Tone Generator block of the instrument in semitones. Settings: −24–+0–+24 Tone Generator Tune Adjusts the tuning of the overall sound produced by the Tone Generator block of the instrument in semitones. You can fine-adjust the pitch in units of cents. Settings: −102.4–+0.0–+102.3 SSS Time Adjusts the SSS Time of the overall sound produced by the Tone Generator block of the instrument. When selected, the Live Set Slot's SSS Time will be applied. Settings: 0.0sec – 30sec, Hold, System 362 MODX M Operation Manual Keyboard Octave Shift Shifts the pitch of the keyboard in octaves. It is linked to the [OCTAVE] buttons on the top panel. Settings: −3–+0–+3 NOTE The Keyboard Octave Shift setting will be set to 0 the next time you start the program. Keyboard Transpose Shifts the pitch of the keyboard in semitones. Settings: −11semi to +0semi to +11semi NOTE • If the pitch exceeds the range (C -2 to G8) that the sound source section of the unit can play, a note one octave higher (or lower) will be output. • The Keyboard Transpose setting will be set to +0semi the next time you start the program. Keyboard Velocity Curve Sets the velocity curve to determine how velocity is expressed in relation to the strength with which the keys are played. The horizontal axis of the graph displayed on the screen of the instrument indicates the strength with which the keys are played, and the vertical axis indicates the velocity output from the keys. Settings: Normal, Soft 1, Soft 2, Hard 1, Hard 2, Wide, Fixed Normal: The most common curve, where the strength and velocity of the keystroke are proportional Soft 1: Provides increased response Soft 2: The curve between Soft 1 and Normal Hard 1: Provides decreased response Hard 2: The curve between Hard 1 and Normal Wide: A curve that suppresses velocity with a light touch and makes velocity more pronounced with a strong touch. It provides a feeling of a wider dynamic range. Fixed: Used when you want to create a sound source with a constant velocity regardless of the strength of the key presses. The value set in Keyboard Fixed Velocity is used as the velocity value Keyboard Fixed Velocity Sends a fixed velocity to the tone generator regardless of how hard or soft you play the keyboard. This is only valid if you set the Keyboard Velocity Curve parameter to Fixed. Settings: 1–127 Sustain Pedal (Sustain Pedal Select) Select the type of footswitch connected to the FOOT SWITCH [SUSTAIN] jack on the rear panel. • FC3, FC3A (half-damper feature enabled) Select FC3A (Half On). If you do not need to use the half-damper feature, select FC3A (Half Off). • FC4, FC4A, FC5 Select FC4A or FC5. The half-damper feature is not available with the FC4, FC4A, and FC5. • Pedal with reverse polarity Select Reverse Polarity. The half-damper feature is not available. Settings: FC3A (Half On), FC3A (Half Off), FC4A/FC5, Reverse Polarity NOTE If you are using control changes from an external MIDI device to play half damper, the Sustain Pedal (Sustain Pedal Select) setting is not necessary. 363 MODX M Operation Manual Global Tuning (Global Micro Tuning Switch) When this parameter is On, the micro tuning settings in the global settings are prioritized over the micro tuning settings for each Part of the Performance. This applies to all Parts except the Drum Part. Settings: Off, On NOTE The Global Tuning (Global Micro Tuning Switch) setting will be set to Off the next time you start the program. Micro Tuning Name (Global Micro Tuning Name) Shows the name of the selected micro tuning. Tapping on the name lets you call up the menu for selecting the micro tuning. Settings: Preset: Equal Temperament, Pure Major, Pure Minor, Werckmeister, Kirnberger, Vallotti & Young, 1/4 shift, 1/4 tone, 1/8 tone, Indian, Arabic1, Arabic2, Arabic3 User: Init Tuning1–8 Library: Library name (when a Library file is loaded) Root (Global Micro Tuning Root) Sets the root note for the micro tuning. This parameter is not shown if the selected type in Micro Tuning Name does not require a root note. Settings: C–B Edit User Tuning Opens the User Micro Tuning settings window. 364 MODX M Operation Manual Quick Setup This function allows you to set all necessary settings for connecting the external device to the optimal values by simply selecting a group of settings. Parameters across several setting screens can be set all at once to suit the intended purpose. Operation [QUICK SETUP] [UTILITY] → Settings → Quick Setup Audio Signal Flow Displays the current audio signal flow diagram. The signal flow depicted changes depending on the connection on the USB [TO HOST] terminal and the other settings of the instrument. MIDI Signal Flow Displays the current MIDI signal flow diagram. The signal flow diagram changes depending on the settings of the instrument. Quick Setup (Quick Setup Select) Selects Quick Setup. Settings: Standalone, MIDI Rec on DAW (Setup No.1), Audio Rec on DAW (Setup No.1), With Plugin Host App (Setup No.3) The parameters stored in each quick setup are as follows: Audio settings Direct Monitor MIDI settings Local Control Performance settings Part 1–16 Output Select A/D In Output Select Digital In Output Select Part 1–8 Keyboard Control Switch Part 1–16 Part Mode Part 1–16 Transmit Channel See Audio I/O for audio setting parameters and MIDI I/O for MIDI setting parameters. 365 MODX M Operation Manual Quick Setup initial settings • Standalone Settings for using the instrument by itself and for operating the external device from the instrument Direct Monitor Local Control Output Select Keyboard Sw Part Mode Transmit Ch On On Main L&R Part 1–8: On Part 1–16: Int Part 1–16: Ch 1–16 • MIDI Rec on DAW Settings for recording your performance in MIDI on DAW software Direct Monitor Local Control Output Select Keyboard Sw Part Mode Transmit Ch On Off Main L&R Part 1–8: On Part 1–16: Int Part 1–16: Ch 1–16 • Audio Rec on DAW Settings for recording each Part on the internal Tone Generator to DAW software as an individual audio track Direct Monitor Local Control Output Select Keyboard Sw Part Mode Transmit Ch Off On Different for each Part Part 1–8: On Part 1–16: Int Part 1–16: Ch 1–16 • With Plugin Host App Settings for using the internal Tone Generator with a sound generator plug-in on a computer Direct Monitor Local Control Output Select Keyboard Sw Part Mode Transmit Ch On On Main L&R Part 1–5: On Part 6–8: Off Part 1–4: Int Part 5–16: Ext Part 1–4: Ch 1–4 Part 5–8: Ch 1–4 Part 9–16: Ch 9–16 Store Current Settings You can save the current settings to any one of Setup No.1–3 of Quick Setup. 366 MODX M Operation Manual Audio I/O On the Audio I/O screen, you can set the audio signal input and output. Operation [UTILITY] → Settings → Audio I/O Audio Signal Flow Displays the current audio signal flow diagram. The signal flow depicted changes depending on the connection on the USB [TO HOST] terminal and the other settings of the instrument. A/D Input (A/D Input Gain) Sets the input gain for the A/D INPUT jack to Mic or Line. Settings: Mic, Line Mic: Intended for a device with a low output level, such as a microphone. Line: Intended for a device with a high output level, such as a synthesizer, or audio device. NOTE A guitar or bass having an active pickup can be directly connected. On the other hand, when using a passive pickup, connect the instrument via an effect unit or direct box. USB Volume (USB Input Volume) Adjusts the volume of the audio signal input from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. Settings: 0–127 NOTE The USB input volume is stored as a system-wide setting and not on a per-performance basis. Direct Monitor Sets the audio signal output from Main L&R, USB Main or USB 1–8 channels to the external device (such as a computer) to be also played back from this instrument (direct monitoring). When this is set to On, the audio signals output to the Main L&R, USB Main, and USB 1–8 channels are also sent to the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and [R] jacks and the [PHONES] jack of the instrument. When there is no USB connection, this is automatically turned On. Settings: Off, On 367 MODX M Operation Manual Main L&R (Analog Output L&R Output Gain) Sets the output gain of the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and [R] terminals. Settings: −6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB USB Main (USB Main L&R Output Gain) Sets the output gain of the Main L&R channel of the USB [TO HOST] terminal. Settings: −6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB USB 1-8 (USB Individual Output Gain) Sets the output gain of the channels 1–8 of the USB [TO HOST] terminal. Settings: −6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB Monitor Volume The Monitor Volume screen appears. 368 MODX M Operation Manual MIDI I/O The MIDI input and output is set on the MIDI I/O screen. Operation [UTILITY] → Settings → MIDI I/O Tap the Quick Setup icon MIDI Signal Flow Displays the current MIDI signal flow diagram. The flow diagram changes depending on the settings of the instrument. By tapping near the Local Control switch on the MIDI Signal Flow, you can turn Local Control On or Off. MIDI IN/OUT Selects the terminal(s) for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages. Settings: MIDI, USB MIDI Thru Specifies whether the MIDI [OUT] terminal is used as a MIDI Thru terminal. Settings: Off, On Local Control Switches Local Control on or off. When the Local Control is set to Off, the instrument's Controller block and the Tone Generator block will be disconnected, and no sound is produced when you play the keyboard. However, regardless of this setting, the keyboard performance data on this instrument are transmitted as MIDI messages. In addition, MIDI input messages are processed by the Tone Generator block. Settings: Off, On MIDI I/O Channel Sets the MIDI channel for input and output of the Common and the Part with the Keyboard Control Switch to be set to On. Settings: Ch1–Ch16 369 MODX M Operation Manual MIDI Sync Sets the parameters related to synchronization to the connected external device. Select the internal clock of this instrument or the external MIDI clock of DAW software on the computer or the external MIDI device, or the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT jacks for playing back the Arpeggios, Motion Sequencer, Songs, and Patterns. Settings: Internal, MIDI, A/D In (ABS) Internal: Synchronizes to the internal clock. For using this instrument by itself or as the master clock source for other devices to sync to. MIDI: Synchronizes to the MIDI clock received from the external MIDI device. For using the external device as the master clock source. A/D In (ABS): Operates by extracting the tempo from the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT terminal using the Audio Beat Sync function. Clock Out (MIDI Clock Out) Sets the MIDI clock messages to be transmitted. Settings: Off, On Receive (Receive Sequencer Control) Receives the MIDI messages for starting and stopping the Song. Settings: Off, On Transmit (Transmit Sequencer Control) Transmits the MIDI messages for starting and stopping the Song. Settings: Off, On Controller Hold/Reset Sets whether to use the current settings of the controllers such as modulation wheel, aftertouch, foot controller, and breath controller (Hold) or to reset to their initial settings (Reset) when you switch between Performances. Settings: Hold, Reset When set to Reset, the controllers will be reset when you switch between Performances as shown below: Pitch bend Center Modulation wheel Minimum Aftertouch Minimum Foot controller Maximum Footswitch Off Ribbon controller Center Breath controller Maximum Expression Maximum Assignable switches 1 and 2 Off [KEYBOARD HOLD] button Off Each lane of the motion sequencer When the Motion Seq Polarity for the lane is set to Unipolar: the value is 0 (minimum) When the Motion Seq Polarity for the lane is set to Bipolar: the value is 64 (center) FS Assign (FootSwitch Assign Control Number) Sets the Control Change number generated by the operation of the footswitch connected to the FOOT SWITCH [ASSIGNABLE] jack. When this instrument receives a MIDI message with the same Control Change number specified here from the external MIDI device, the instrument will act as if the footswitch has been operated. Settings: Off, 1–95, Arp Sw, MS Sw, Play/Stop, Live Set+, Live Set−, Oct Reset, Tap Tempo 370 MODX M Operation Manual Super Knob CC (Super Knob Control Change Number) Sets the Control Change number generated by the operation of the Super Knob. When this instrument receives the MIDI message with the same Control Change number specified here from the external device, the instrument will act as if the Super Knob has been operated. Settings: Off, 1–95 NOTE When this parameter is set to Off, the System Exclusive (SysEx) is used for handling MIDI messages. Scene CC (Scene Control Change Number) Sets the Control Change number generated when you switch between Scenes. Also, Scene will change when a MIDI message with the same Control Change number set here is received from the external MIDI device. Settings: Off, 1–95 NOTE • Depending on the Control Change number, one of the Scenes 1–8 will be selected. 0–15: Scene 1, 16–31: Scene 2, 32–47: Scene 3, 48–63: Scene 4, 64–79: Scene 5, 80–95: Scene 6, 96–111: Scene 7, 112–127: Scene 8 • If the Super Knob CC number and the Scene CC number are set to the same value, an exclamation mark appears in front of the number. In that case, the Scene Control Change takes priority, and the Super Knob Control Change is disabled. Control Number Opens Control → Control Number on the Common Edit screen. 371 MODX M Operation Manual Advanced On the Advanced screen, you can set the detailed settings for the instrument. Operation [UTILITY] → Settings → Advanced Audition Lock Switches the audition lock On or Off. When set to On, the audition function is disabled. Settings: Off, On Audition Loop When this is set to On, the audition phrase will be played back in a loop. When this is set to Off, the playback of the audition phrase will stop automatically after it has been played to the end. Settings: Off, On Kbd Hold Lock (Keyboard Hold Lock) Switches Keyboard hold function On or Off. When set to On, the keyboard hold function is disabled. It works in conjunction with the [KEYBOARD HOLD] button. Settings: Off, On Auto Power Off (Auto Power Off Time) Auto power off is a function that automatically turns off the power if the unit is not operated for a certain period of time in order to prevent unnecessary power consumption due to leaving the unit on by accident. Here, you can set the length of time until the instrument is automatically turned off. Settings: Off (Auto Power Off disabled), 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 60min, 120min Device Number Sets the MIDI device number. For sending and receiving System Exclusive messages such as Bulk Dump and Parameter Change to and from an external MIDI device, you need to set this number to match the device number of the other device. Settings: 1–16, All, Off 372 MODX M Operation Manual Bank Select (Receive/Transmit Bank Select) Sets the reception and transmission of Bank Select messages between the instrument and the external MIDI device. When this is set to On, the instrument will receive or recognize Bank Select messages sent from the external MIDI device. Settings: Off, On Pgm Change (Receive/Transmit Program Change) Sets the reception and transmission of Program Change messages between the instrument and the external MIDI device. When this is set to On, the instrument will receive or recognize Program Change messages sent from the external MIDI device. Settings: Off, On Receive Bulk Sets the reception of Bulk Dump messages. Settings: Protect (Do not receive), On (Receive) Bulk Interval Sets the interval time for transmission of Bulk data when this instrument receives the Bulk Request message from the external device. Settings: 0–900ms Sequencer Event Chase (Song Event Chase) This ensures that specified events to be recognized properly when, for example, a Song is played back from the middle, or with the Forward (fast-forward) and Back (rewind) operations. Events set with MIDI Event Chase will then function properly with the Forward and Back operations. Settings: Off, PC (Program Change), PC+PB+Ctrl (Program Change+Pitch Bend+Control Change) Init On Boot (Initialize User Data on Boot-up) Sets whether user data is initialized (On) or not (Off) when starting up. Settings: Off, On Audio I/O Mode Switches the output mode for the audio signal output from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. The instrument must be rebooted for this setting to be effective. Settings: 5 Stereo/44.1kHz, 1 Stereo/44.1–96kHz 5 Stereo/44.1kHz: Up to 10 channels (5 stereo channels) at a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz 1 Stereo/44.1-96kHz: Up to 2 channels (1 stereo channel) at a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz to 96 kHz NOTE When set to 1 Stereo/44.1-96kHz, the available frequencies are: 44.1/48/96kHz. Legacy Mode Set this to On if you want to use MIDI 1.0 instead of MIDI 2.0. The instrument must be rebooted for this setting to be effective. Settings: Off, On Initialize Advanced Settings Initializes the settings on the Advanced screen. 373 MODX M Operation Manual System On the System screen, you can set the parameters related to the entire instrument. Operation [UTILITY] → Settings → System [UTILITY] + [DAW REMOTE] ( → Calibrate Touch Panel setting) Power on Mode Sets the screen to be shown on the display when the instrument is turned on. Settings: Perform, Live Set Calibrate Touch Panel Opens the screen for touchscreen calibration. Use it when the touchscreen does not respond correctly. Initial Live Set Bank (Initial Live Set Bank) Initial Live Set Page (Initial Live Set Page) Initial Live Set Slot (Initial Live Set Slot) When Power on Mode is set to Live Set, this determines the live set slot to be selected immediately after startup. NOTE You can also set the slot by selecting a Performance on the Live Set screen, opening this screen, and then tapping the Set Current Slot button. Set Current Slot (Set Current Slot to Initial Live Set) Sets the current Performance to the Live Set slot selected after startup. Initialize All Settings Initializes all Utility screen settings. Animation Sets whether animation is On or Off when the screen switches. Settings: Off, On 374 MODX M Operation Manual Beep Turns the touchscreen operation sound on or off. Settings: Off, On Part Display Sets the Part Name to show the Category and Part Type or just Part Name. Settings: Type, Name Live Set Font Determines the font size of the contents names and category names on the Live Set screen and the Category Search screen. Settings: Normal, Large Initialize User Data Initializes all user area data in user memory (performance, motion sequences, live sets, etc.) and all settings on the Utility screen. Knob Flash (Super Knob LED Blink) Sets the flashing of the Super Knob on or off. Settings: Off, On KnobBrightness Sets the brightness of lighting on the Super Knob. Settings: 0–128 Half Glow (LED Half Glow Brightness) Controls the dimming of the button lamps. Settings: Off, 1/4, 1/2 Perf Inc/Dec Sets how performance is switched on the Home screen. Settings: Default, Live Set Default: Switches in the order of the Performance list on the Performance Category Search screen Live Set: Switches in the order of the Live Set slots Initialize All Data Initializes all data in User memory and Utility screen settings. Product Info Shows the firmware version of the instrument. NOTICE Initializing will overwrite all of the target data and system settings to the factory settings. Be careful not to lose important data. It is also recommended to save the necessary settings to a USB flash drive in advance. 375 MODX M Operation Manual Contents Load Files and internal data are loaded using the Load screen. Operation [UTILITY] → Contents → Load [SHIFT] + [STORE] Content Type All data or a specific set of data is loaded from a single file saved on a USB flash drive or setting stored on the instrument. Here, you can select which set of data in a file to load. Available settings vary depending on the route you take to open the screen. Settings: The file types which can be loaded are as follows. Content Type Device Type File extension Description User File File .Y2U (.Y2W) .X7U .X8U • User files saved on a USB drive are loaded into the user area of user memory. • If the user file has been split, both the .Y2U and .Y2W must be stored on the USB drive. • The following settings are included in a User file. Performance, Arpeggio, Motion Sequence, Curve, Live Set, Microtuning, Waveform, Audition, Utility Settings (.Y2U only), Quick Setup (.Y2U only) Library File File .Y2L (.Y2M) .X7L .X8L • Library files saved on a USB drive are loaded into the Library area of User memory. • If a Library file has been split both .Y2L and .Y2M must be saved on the USB drive. • The following settings are included in a Library file. Performance, Arpeggio, Motion Sequence, Curve, Live Set (1 bank only), Microtuning, Waveform, Audition 376 MODX M Operation Manual Content Type Device Type File extension Description Backup File File .Y2A (.Y2B) .X7A .X8A • Backup files saved on a USB drive are loaded into the User memory. • A backup file includes everything in the User and Library areas, as well as Songs, and Patterns. • If a backup file has been split, both .Y2A and .Y2B must be saved on the USB drive. Song&Perf (Song & Performance) Internal data • Only the specified Song is loaded from Songs stored in the User area of the User memory. • Both MIDI sequences and Performances can be loaded. Song Internal data • Only the specified Song is loaded from Songs stored in the User area of the User memory. • Only MIDI sequences can be loaded. .mid File File .MID Standard MIDI Files (SMF) saved on a USB drive are loaded (either in format 0 or format 1). .wav File File .WAV Audio files saved on a USB drive are loaded. Pattern&Perf (Pattern & Performance) Internal data • Only the specified Pattern is loaded from Patterns stored in the User area of the User memory. • Both MIDI sequences and Performances can be loaded. Pattern Internal data • Only the specified Pattern is loaded from Patterns stored in the User area of the User memory. • Only MIDI sequences can be loaded. Audio File* File .WAV .AIF Audio files saved on a USB drive are loaded as Waveforms. Example: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → [EDIT/ ] → Part selection → Element selection → Osc/Tune Motion Seq (Motion Sequence)* Internal data Only the specified sequence is loaded from the Motion Sequences saved (stored) in the User area of the User memory. Smart Morph* Internal data Only Smart Morph data is loaded from the Performance saved (stored) in the User area of User memory. NOTE Content types marked with an asterisk (*) are not displayed when this screen is opened from the Utility screen. Parent Folder Name Current Folder Name Indicates the name of the parent folder and the name of the current folder. Once you tap on the parent folder name, it is then the current folder. Job Sets whether the Job function is enabled (On) or disabled (Off). When this parameter is turned On, tapping on the current file, folder, or content will call up the Rename or Delete context menu. Tapping on the connected USB flash drive, will call up the Format context menu. Settings: Off, On 377 MODX M Operation Manual Free Storage Indicates the used capacity and total capacity of the selected storage. The indication differs depending on the content type. Folder file select Indicates the folders and files within the current folder. Sort Set the sort order for the files in file select. Settings: Name, Size, Date, Default (depending on content type) Name: Sorts by name. The down arrow indicates that the list is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). The up arrow indicates that the list is arranged in descending order. Size: Sorts in order of data size. The down arrow indicates that the list is in ascending order (small to large). The up arrow indicates that the list is in descending order. Invalid for content types Motion Seq, Song, Song&Perf, Pattern, Pattern&Perf, Performance, Smart Morph Date: Sorts by date the setting was stored. The down arrow indicates that the list is arranged in descending order (new to old). The up arrow indicates that the list is arranged in ascending order. This is available only when the content type is Motion Seq, Song, Song&Perf, Pattern, Pattern&Perf, Performance, Smart Morph Default: Sorts in ascending order of content number. This is available only when the content type is Song, Song&Perf, Pattern, Pattern&Perf, Performance, Motion Seq, Smart Morph Mode Selects the mode for loading. This is displayed only for a User File or a Library File. Settings: Default, 1 Perf Default: Loads all Performances 1 Perf: Loads only a specified Performance Key (Center Key) Select the key to which the loaded WAV or AIFF is to be assigned. This is shown only for audio files. Settings: Keyboard Select (C−2 −G8), All Keyboard Select Set whether Center Key is updated by keyboard operation. This is shown only for audio files. Page If the files appearing in the file select cannot fit on a single page, a scroll button will appear to allow you to select a page. Alternately you can use a Display knob to select a page. 378 MODX M Operation Manual Save On the Save screen, you can save files and internal data. This is basically the same as the Load screen. Operation [UTILITY] → Contents → Save Content Type All data or a specified portion of data from files stored on a USB drive or the main unit can be retrieved and loaded into the instrument. Here, you can set which data to store or save. Available settings vary depending on the route you take to open the screen. Settings: The following table shows the content types that can be stored or saved. Content Type Device Type File extension Description Performance Internal data Saves (Stores) the Performance to the User area of the User memory. User File File .Y2U (.Y2W) • Settings saved (stored) in the User area of User memory are saved to a USB drive as a User file. • The following settings are included in a User file. Performance, Arpeggio, Motion Sequence, Curve, Live Set, Microtuning, Waveform, Audition, Utility Settings, Quick Setup • When the file size exceeds 2 GB and the file has been divided, both .Y2U and .Y2W must be handled as a set. Library File File .Y2L (.Y2M) • Settings saved (stored) in the Library area of User memory are saved to a USB drive as a Library file. • The settings contained in the Library file are as follows (same as the User File, except for the utility settings): Performance, Arpeggio, Motion Sequence, Curve, Live Set (1 bank only), Microtuning, Waveform, Audition • When the file size exceeds 2 GB and the file has been divided, both .Y2L and .Y2M must be handled as a set. Backup File File .Y2A (.Y2B) • Settings stored in the User memory are saved to a USB drive as a backup file. • A backup file includes everything in the User and Library areas, as well as Songs, and Patterns. • When the file size exceeds 2 GB and the file has been divided, both .Y2A and .Y2B must be handled as a set. 379 MODX M Operation Manual Content Type Device Type File extension Description .mid File File .MID MIDI data stored in the Song and Pattern area of User memory is saved to a USB drive as a Standard MIDI File (SMF; only in format 1). Motion Seq (Motion Sequence)* Internal data Stores (saves) the Motion Sequence being edited to the User area. NOTE Content types marked with an asterisk (*) are not displayed when this screen is opened from the Utility screen. 380 MODX M Operation Manual Data Utility On the Data Utility screen, you can manage files and data in User memory. This is basically the same as the Load screen. Operation [UTILITY] → Contents → Data Utility Folder select Shows the Content types in User memory as folders. Tap the folder to open. Content Type: Arp, Audition, Curve, Library, Live Set, Micro Tuning, Motion Seq, Pattern, Performance, Song, Waveform Content Select Tapping the content calls up the Rename, Delete context menu. When Job is set to On, the following three items are displayed. Select All Selects all of the contents in the folder. Displayed when nothing has been selected. Unselect All Unselects all of the contents in the folder. Displayed when any of the contents have been selected. Delete Deletes all selected content. Displayed when any of the contents have been selected 381 MODX M Operation Manual Library Import This function selects a specific performance from the library and copies it to the user bank. This is basically the same as the Load screen. Operation [UTILITY] → Contents → Library Import Select All Selects all Performances in the current library folder. Shown only when no Performance has been selected. Unselect All Deselects all Performances in the current library folder. Displayed only when any Performance has been selected. Import to User Bank Copies the selected Performance to the User Bank. When this operation is carried out, the User Waveforms and User Arpeggios, User Curves, User Micro Tuning, and User Auditions used in the selected Performance are also copied to the User Bank. Displayed only when any performance has been selected. 382 MODX M Operation Manual Tempo Settings On the Tempo Settings screen, you can set the parameters related to tempo and synchronization. Operation [TEMPO/TAP] [UTILITY] + Tempo Settings Tap the TEMPO SETTINGS icon Tempo Sets the Performance tempo. If MIDI Sync is set to MIDI or A/D In (ABS) and is synchronized with an external device, Ex.Tempo will be displayed instead of the setting value. Settings: 5–300 Knob Flash (Super Knob LED Blink) Sets the flashing of the Super Knob On or Off. Settings: Off, On Global Tempo When this parameter is set to Off, the Tempo setting for each Performance is used. When set to On, the current tempo is retained even when you change the Performance. Settings: Off, On Tap Tempo By tapping this area or by pressing (tapping) the [ENTER] button while the cursor is present, you can set the tempo to the tap or press speed. Or you can use the [TEMPO/TAP] button to set the tempo in the same way. However, this parameter is not available when MIDI Sync is set to MIDI and the instrument is set to synchronize to an external device. NOTE If MIDI Sync is set to “A/D In (ABS)”, the tempo is changed with the tap serving as the beginning of the beat. 383 MODX M Operation Manual MIDI Sync Sets the parameters related to synchronization to the connected external device. You can choose whether to play Arpeggio, Motion Sequencer, and Song using the internal clock of the instrument, using the clock (external clock) of the DAW software or MIDI devices connected to this unit, or using audio signals input from the A/D INPUT terminal. Settings: Internal, MIDI, A/D In (ABS) Internal: Synchronizes to the internal clock. For using this instrument by itself or as the master clock source for other devices. MIDI: Synchronizes to the MIDI clock received from the external MIDI device. For using the external device as the master clock source. A/D In (ABS): Operates by extracting the tempo from the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT terminal using the Audio Beat Sync function. Clock Out (MIDI Clock Out) Sets the MIDI clock messages to be transmitted. Settings: Off, On Sync Quantize (Arpeggio Synchro Quantize Value) Adjusts the timing for starting the next Arpeggio if playing back an Arpeggio for multiple Parts. When set to Off, the Arpeggio is played back when the Part is played on the keyboard. Settings: "Off, 60 (thirty-second note), 80 (sixteenth note triplet), 120 (sixteenth note), 160 (eighth note triplet), 240 (eighth note), 320 (quarter note triplet), 480 (quarter note)" Mode (Click Mode) Set the timing for when the click sound (metronome sound) is played. Settings: Off, Rec, Rec/Play, Always Off: No click sound is played. Rec: The click sound is played during Song or Pattern recording. Rec/Play: The click sound is played during Song or Pattern recording and playback. Always: The click sound is always played. NOTE The click sound is played using an internal tone generator, so some of the simultaneous sound output will be consumed. Precount (Click Precount) Sets the number of count-in measures from the time the [  ] (Play) button is pressed until recording actually starts when recording a Song or Pattern. Settings: Off (recording starts as soon as you press the [  ] (Play) button), 1meas–8meas Volume (Click Volume) Sets the volume for the click sound. Settings: 0–127 Beat (Click Beat) Sets the beat at which the click sound is played. Settings: 1/16 (sixteenth notes), 1/8 (eighth notes), 1/4 (quarter notes), 1/2 (half notes), Whole (whole notes) Type (Click Type) Selects the type of click sound. Settings: 1–10 Click Out (Click Output Select) Sets the output destination for the click sound. Settings: MainL&R, (AsgnL&R), USB Stereo, (AsgnL), (AsgnR), USB mono MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and OUTPUT [R] jacks. USB Stereo: Outputs in stereo (channels 1 and 2, to channels 7 and 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal USB mono: Outputs in mono (channels 1 to 8) to the USB [TO HOST] terminal NOTE The settings for data compatibility with MONTAGE M are shown below. They are considered Off when set. • AsgnL&R • USB Stereo: USB9&10 – USB29&30 • USB mono: USB9 – USB30 • AsgnL • AsgnR 384 MODX M Operation Manual Effect Switch On the Effect Switch screen, you can set the parameters related to effect bypass. The settings on this screen are not saved (stored), so the settings are reset to the default when the instrument is restarted. Operation [UTILITY] → Effect Switch Tap the EFFECT icon ( FX ) [SHIFT] + [QUICK SETUP] Insertion FX (Insertion Effect) Sets the Insertion Effect on or off. Settings: Off, On System FX (System Effect) Sets the System Effect on or off. Settings: Off, On Master FX (Master Effect) Sets the Master Effect on or off. Settings: Off, On Master EQ Sets the Master EQ on or off. Settings: Off, On Arp Bypass (Arpeggio Bypass) Sets the Arpeggio Bypass on or off. When this parameter is set to On, all Arpeggio operations are disabled. Settings: Off, On NOTE • When Arp Bypass On, the [ARP] button flashes. • When Arp Bypass is set to On, if you change the Arpeggio Switch for each Part, Arp Bypass will be set to Off. • The Songs recorded by using the Arpeggio function will have the Arpeggio sequence included in the data. If you continue to edit the song data in the DAW software, setting Arp Bypass to On prevents the arpeggiator from having a double effect. 385 MODX M Operation Manual Kbd Ctrl Lock (Keyboard Control Lock) Sets lock for the Keyboard Control on or off. When set to On, the lock is activated and Keyboard Control for all parts is disabled. Turning it off unlocks Keyboard Control. This is useful for creating or editing each MIDI track separately, for example, when using the instrument as a 16-part multi- timbral sound module with the DAW software. Settings: Off, On NOTE When Kbd Ctrl Lock is On, if you change Keyboard Control SW of each part, Kbd Ctrl Lock will be set to Off. Global A/D When this parameter is set to On, the volume of the A/D Part does not change when switching between performances, and other parameters related to the A/D part do not change. When this parameter is set to Off, the volume changes to a performance-specific setting when switching between performances, and other parameters related to the A/D part will change. Master FX and Master EQ are switched on and off simultaneously. Settings: Off, On 386 MODX M Operation Manual Other Info Other information is displayed on the Other Info screen. Shift Function Shows the list of shortcut operations for simultaneous pressing of the [SHIFT] button and other buttons. Legal Notices Shows content such as copyrights. 387 MODX M Operation Manual Screens shown by pressing specific buttons Panel Lock Using the panel lock function prevents accidental operation during live performances. Operation When the Home screen or the Live Set screen is shown, press [SHIFT]+[TEMPO/TAP] „ Valid operations Keyboard, pedals, Master Volume, Super Knob, Pitch bend wheel, Modulation wheel, Ribbon controller, and panel lock disengage „ Invalid operation All other operations, including touchscreen operations How to disengage the panel lock To unlock the panel, hold the [SHIFT] button again while tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button to unlock the panel. 388 MODX M Operation Manual Split Job Sets the split. Operation Press the [SPLIT] button. Split Points Specifies the number of split points. Settings: Off, 1–3 Split Point 1–3 Specifies the key for the split point. When Keyboard is set to On, you can also specify the split point position using the keyboard. Settings: C#−2 – G8 Part Name Tapping on the Part name calls up the context menu for Category Search and Delete. [+](Add) Tap to display the Part Category Search screen or Performance Merge screen, which allows you to add a Part. Group A–D Press a Group button to assign the Part to the group. Tap the group buttons while holding down the [SHIFT] button to assign a single Part to multiple groups. × (Cancel) Cancels group assignments. Done Confirms the settings and closes the screen. NOTE Tapping the × (close) on the upper left closes the screen without confirming settings other than adding, deleting, or changing parts. 389 MODX M Operation Manual Note Range Operation [SHIFT] + [SPLIT] The Part - Note view is shown on the Home screen. The cursor will move to TG Note Limit Low of the selected part, and you can enter the lower limit of the note range on the keyboard. Navigation Operation Press the [NAVIGATION] button (With the (Home screen View Modeset to Default) Tap Navigation displayed on the screen Tapping the icons calls up the corresponding setting screens. Pressing the [NAVIGATION] button during editing calls up the current location icon ( ). From the Navigation screen, you can jump not only to elements, but also to the Part Common's Filter and Amp EG. 390 MODX M Operation Manual FX Overview On the FX OVERVIEW screen, you can check the status of effect settings and easily access screens for advanced settings. Operation [SHIFT] + [NAVIGATION] (With the Home screen View Mode set to Default) Tap the Fx Overview displayed on the screen Switching Parts for display Switches the Parts to display. Settings: 1–4, 5–8, 9–12, 13–16, A/D In All Ins Turns all Insertion Effects (A and B) on or off. Settings: Off, On Var + Rev Turns the Variation and Reverb effects on or off. Settings: Off, On Ins A, Ins B, Var, Rev, MFX, MEQ Shows the corresponding screen for detailed settings. Effect switch Switches each effect on or off. Settings: Off, On Type Sets the type for each effect. Settings: Refer to the Effect types Preset Sets the preset for each effect. Settings: Refer to the Data List 391 MODX M Operation Manual Store This is the confirmation screen when saving (storing) the current Performance in the User area. Operation [STORE] Store As New Performance Registers as a new Performance. Update Current Live Set Slot When a slot in the User Live Set bank is selected, a message confirming the update of the Live Set slot will appear. To proceed with the update, check the box and select Store As New Performance. Overwrite Current Perf. Saves the Performance you are editing over the existing settings (Bank, MSB, LSB, and Program Change number) shown on the display. Jump to Data Utility Displayed when saving is not possible due to an error such as Performance full. Use [UTILITY] → Contents → Data Utility to display the screen. 392 MODX M Operation Manual DAW Remote Pressing the [DAW REMOTE] button enables the DAW remote function, allowing you to conveniently control your preferred DAW with the controllers on the instrument. Operation [DAW REMOTE] Mode (Remote Control Mode) Select the DAW remote function from three modes of operation. Settings: Track, Plugin, Transport Track: Mode for controlling multiple tracks on the DAW at once. Knob and control slider operations are sent as Mackie Control compatible protocols from Port 2. Plugin: Mode for controlling a specific plugin on the DAW. Knob and control slider operations are sent as messages in CC Number format for Remote functions from Port 1. Transport: Mode for playing the keyboard while playing back the recorded data on the DAW, or recording your keyboard performance on the DAW. You can use the Sequencer transport buttons to start or stop the playback on the DAW. All controllers except the Sequencer transport buttons operate as they normally do. Switching screens Opens the settings screen for each controller and the remote function. Settings: Knob/Slider, Scene Sw, Display Knob, AS, Pedal, Settings Local Control Sets Local Control On or Off. This is the same as what can be set in [UTILITY] → Settings → MIDI I/O. Use for Remote Cursor / Dial Sets whether to use the Data dial and Cursor buttons on the Top panel for controlling the DAW. On: For controlling the DAW. Off: For controlling the Main display on the top panel. Track (Track Select) Outputs the Track group selection (by eight tracks at a time). 393 MODX M Operation Manual For using controllers „ Track mode Controllers (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (4) Controllers DAW operation (1) [ASSIGN] button Pan selection (1 – 4 / 5 – 8) (2) Knob 1 – 4 (5 – 8) Track Pan is output from Port2 (3) Control sliders 1–8 Track volume is output from Port2 (4) PART button, [PART SELECT] button Selects track(s), and switches mute and solo of the selected track(s) on or off. (5) SCENE buttons Functions 1 – 8 are output from Port2 (6) Data dial, cursor buttons Moves the cursor position or Song position. (7) Sequencer transport button. [SONG/PATTERN] button Controls the transport actions (recording and playback). Other controllers are set to send the Control Change messages set in remote mode. 394 MODX M Operation Manual „ Plugin mode Controllers (1) (2) Controllers DAW operation (1) [ASSIGN] button Knob selection (1 – 4 / 5 – 8) (2) Knobs 1 – 4 (5 – 8), Control sliders 1 – 8, SCENE button, Display knob Any Control Change you have selected. (The CC number set in Edit on the DAW Remote screen will be output.) PART buttons, [PART SELECT] button, [KEYBOARD CONTROL] button, data dial, cursor buttons, sequencer transport buttons, BANK buttons, and PAGE buttons behave the same way as in Track mode. 395 MODX M Operation Manual „ Transport mode Controllers (1) (2) Controllers DAW operation (1) Data dial, cursor buttons Moves the cursor position or Song position. (2) Sequencer transport button. [SONG/PATTERN] button Controls the transport actions (recording and playback). Other controllers operate as normal. 396 MODX M Operation Manual During Edit Edit Sets the Control Change message, such as the control number and channel mode, that is output from Port 1. The settings on each tab are as follows: „ Common Local (Local Control) Sets Local Control On or Off. This is the same as what can be set in [UTILITY] → Settings → MIDI I/O. Use for Remote Cursor / Dial Sets whether to use the Data dial and Cursor buttons on the Top panel for controlling the DAW. On: For controlling the DAW. Off: For controlling the Main display on the top panel. „ Knob / Slider CC Num. (Control Change Number) Sets the control number for the knobs and control sliders. Settings: 1–95 „ Scene SW Scene1–8CC# (Scene 1–8 Control Number) Sets the control number for the SCENE buttons. Settings: 1–95 Latch/Momentary (Scene 1–8 Switch Mode) Switches the operating mode of the SCENE buttons. Settings: Momentary, Latch „ Display Knob DispKnob 1–6CC# (Display Knob 1–6 Control Number) Sets the control number for the Display Knobs. Settings: 1–95 AS Porta Sw CC# (Portamento Switch Control Number) Sets the control number for the [PORTAMENTO] button. Settings: 1–95 Latch/Momentary (Portamento Switch Mode) Switches the operating mode of the [PORTAMENTO] button. Settings: Momentary, Latch Porta Knob CC# (Portamento Knob Control Number) Sets the control number for the PORTAMENTO [TIME] knob. Settings: 1–95 397 MODX M Operation Manual AssignSw 1 CC# (Assignable Switch 1 Control Number) AssignSw 2 CC# (Assignable Switch 2 Control Number) MS Trigger CC# (Motion Seq Trigger Switch Control Number) Sets the control numbers for the [ASSIGN 1] button, [ASSIGN 2] button, and [MSEQ TRIGGER] button. Settings: 1–95 Assign SW 1 Latch/Momentary (Assignable Switch 1 Mode) Assign SW 2 Latch/Momentary (Assignable Switch 2 Mode) MS Trigger Latch/Momentary (Motion Seq Trigger Switch Mode) Switches the operating mode of the [ASSIGN 1] button, [ASSIGN 2] button, and [MSEQ TRIGGER] button. Settings: Momentary, Latch „ Pedal FC 1 CC# (Foot Controller 1 Control Number) FC 2 CC# (Foot Controller 2 Control Number) Sets the control number for Foot Controller 1 and Foot Controller 2. Settings: 1–95 FS CC# (Foot Switch Control Number) Shows the control number for the foot switch. Settings: 1–95 Latch/Momentary (Foot Switch Mode) Switches the operating mode of the foot switch. Settings: Momentary, Latch „ Settings DAW Selects the particular DAW for use with this instrument. Settings: Cubase, Logic Pro, Pro Tools, Live MIDI I/O Ch. Sets the MIDI channel for input and output of the Common and the Part with the Keyboard Control Switch to be set to On. The MIDI channel set here is used also for sending the Control Change message from DAW Remote. This is the same as what can be set in [UTILITY] → Settings → MIDI I/O. Settings: Ch1–Ch16 398 MODX M Operation Manual Control Assign Register the combination of Source and Destination in the Controller Set. Operation Press the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button while selecting parameters that can be assigned to the controller on the screen. Operate the controller used to adjust the target parameter, or select Motion Sequencer Lane, Envelope Follower, or Ribbon on the screen. NOTE • When you move the Super Knob but there aren’t any unused assignable knobs to proceed with the setting, an error message will appear. • When a Part parameter is selected, press the [COMMON] button while operating the assignable knob to select the assignable knob for Common. 399 MODX M Operation Manual Control View You can check the settings of the controller being operated. Operation [SHIFT] + [CONTROL ASSIGN] (With the Home screen View Mode set to Default) Tap the Control View displayed on the screen. Operate the controller you want to check, or select Motion Sequencer Lane, Envelope Follower, or Ribbon on the screen. The Control Assign screen will open where you can view the settings information. 400 MODX M Operation Manual 7. Other information Effect types No Effect Disables the Effects. Does not output the sound. Thru Sets the Effect to Thru. The input sound is output without any effects being applied. Reverb HD Hall Simulates the natural acoustics of a concert hall. REV-X Hall Hall reverb using the REV-X reverb algorithm R3 Hall Hall reverb using the reverb algorithm of the ProR3 Digital Reverb Processor SPX Hall Hall reverb from the classic SPX1000 HD Room Simulates the natural acoustics of a room. REV-X Room Room reverb using the REV-X reverb algorithm R3 Room Room reverb using the reverb algorithm of the ProR3 Digital Reverb Processor SPX Room Room reverb from the classic SPX1000 HD Plate Simulates a plate reverb. R3 Plate Plate reverb using the reverb algorithm of the ProR3 Digital Reverb Processor SPX Stage Stage reverb from the classic SPX1000. Space Simulator Allows you to specify the width, height, and depth of the room size. Gated Reverb Produces a gated reverb. Reverse Reverb Produces reverse playback of a gated reverb. Shimmer Reverb Creates mystical shimmering effects by adding pitch-changed Reverb sounds. Delay Cross Delay The feedback of the delayed sound on each of the two channels is routed to the opposite channel. Produces alternate delayed sounds on the right and left. Tempo Cross Delay Tempo-synchronized Cross delay Tempo Delay Mono Tempo-synchronized Mono delay Tempo Delay Stereo Tempo-synchronized Stereo delay Control Delay Delay for creating scratch sounds by changing the delay length in real-time. Delay LR Produces two delayed sounds on the left and right, with two feedback delays. Delay LCR Produces three delayed sounds on the left, center, and right. Analog Delay Retro Simulates a bucket-brigade analog delay, set to short delay. Analog Delay Modern Simulates a bucket-brigade analog delay, set to long delay. 401 MODX M Operation Manual Chorus G Chorus Creates a deep sound with complex modulation. 2 Modulator Allows you to set the pitch modulation and amplitude modulation. Spreads out the sound naturally. SPX Chorus Chorus effect that uses a 3-phase LFO to add modulation and spaciousness to the sound. Symphonic Multiplexes the modulations for creating more spaciousness. Ensemble Detune Chorus effect without modulation, created by adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound. Flanger VCM Flanger Flanger using VCM technology Classic Flanger Flanger with typical swirling sounds Tempo Flanger Flanger with tempo synchronized LFO Dynamic Flanger Flanger that controls the delay modulation in real-time depending on the level of the input sound. Control Flanger Allows manual operation instead of the LFO. Phaser VCM Phaser Mono Mono Phaser using VCM technology VCM Phaser Stereo Stereo Phaser using VCM technology Tempo Phaser Phaser with tempo synchronized LFO Dynamic Phaser Effect that controls the phase in real-time depending on the level of the input sound. Control Phaser Allows manual operation instead of the LFO. Trem/Rtr (Tremolo & Rotary) Auto Pan Moves the Pan left and right. Tremolo Creates cyclical changes to the volume. Rotary Speaker 1 Simulates a rotary speaker. Rotary Speaker 2 Simulates a rotary speaker including an amplifier. VCM Rotary Speaker Classic Standard rotary speaker effect using VCM technology. Suitable for organs. VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive Rotary speaker effect using VCM technology. Simulates the distorted sound of a rotary speaker with a transistor preamp connected. VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Rotary speaker effect using VCM technology, with three-dimensional rotation. Dist (Distortion) Amp Simulator 1 Simulates a guitar amplifier. Amp Simulator 2 Simulates a guitar amplifier. Comp Distortion Combines Compressor and Distortion. Comp Distortion Delay Combines Compressor, Distortion, and Delay. U.S. Combo American combo amp simulator Jazz Combo Jazz combo amp simulator U.S. High Gain American high gain amp simulator British Lead British stack amp simulator Multi FX Multi-effect processor for guitars Small Stereo Stereo distortion for guitar sounds British Combo British combo amp simulator British Legend British stack amp simulator 402 MODX M Operation Manual Comp (Compressor) VCM Compressor 376 Compressor using VCM technology Classic Compressor Simple, easy-to-use compressor. Suitable for solo instruments. Multi-band Comp Splits the sound into three bands and applies compressor separately on those bands. Uni Comp Down Compressor with a downward algorithm that suppresses loud sounds. Uni Comp Up Compressor with an upward algorithm that amplifies soft sounds. Parallel Comp Compressor applying parallel processing of the compressed sounds and dry sounds Wah VCM Auto Wah Auto Wah using VCM technology. Creates cyclical changes to the center frequency of the filter. VCM Touch Wah Touch Wah using VCM technology. Changes the center frequency of the filter depending on the level of the input sound. VCM Pedal Wah Pedal Wah using VCM technology. Changes the center frequency of the filter by operating controllers, such as a pedal. Lo-Fi Lo-Fi Downgrades the quality of the audio input for a lo-fi sound. Noisy Adds noise to the sound. Digital Turntable Adds turntable noise to the sound. Bit Crusher Produces distortion by reducing the resolution or bandwidth of the digital sound. Tech Ring Modulator Changes the input to a metallic sound. Dynamic Ring Modulator The OSC Freq parameter for the Ring Modulator is controlled in real-time depending on the level of the input sound. Dynamic Filter The filter cutoff frequency is controlled in real-time depending on the level of the input sound. Auto Synth Resynthesizes the input signal using delay and modulation. Spiralizer P Special phaser-based filter with seemingly endless up or down pitch changes. Tempo Spiralizer P Spiralizer with tempo synchronized LFO Spiralizer F Special flanger-based filter with seemingly endless up or down pitch changes. Tempo Spiralizer F Spiralizer with tempo synchronized LFO Isolator Controls the volume of each band by using a powerful filter. Slice Slices the Amplitude EG of the input sound. Tech Modulation Applies special modulation. Control Filter A filter that allows manual operation of the cutoff frequency. Vinyl Break Causes the pitch to drop gradually to create a sound effect of a turntable stopped by hand or turning the device off. Beat Repeat (even) Creates mechanical beats by repeatedly playing sampled sounds. The length of the repeat is specified as a fraction of a beat with a denominator of an even number, such as 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, and so on. Beat Repeat (triplet) Creates mechanical beats by repeatedly playing sampled sounds. The length of the repeat is specified as a fraction of a beat with a denominator having multiples of three, such as 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, and so on. Beat Repeat (even+tri.) Creates mechanical beats by repeatedly playing sampled sounds. Contains both even and triplet settings. Beat Repeat (free) Creates mechanical beats by repeatedly playing sampled sounds. The length of the repeat is specified as a decimal number. 403 MODX M Operation Manual Misc VCM EQ 501 5-band EQ using VCM technology Presence Gives greater sonic presence to the input sound. Harmonic Enhancer Adds harmonic overtones to make the input sound stand out. Stereophonic Optimizer Adjusts the stereo location in the sound field. Talking Modulator Resynthesizes the input sound to create vowel formants. Wave Folder Controls the harmonic overtones to create a rich sound that changes over time. VCM Mini Filter Filter that adds thickness and depth to the sound. Simulates analog synthesizer circuitry. VCM Mini Booster Booster with distinctive characteristics. Simulates analog synthesizer circuitry. Damper Resonance Simulates the resonance of open string notes of an acoustic piano. Pitch Change Changes the pitch of the input sound. Early Reflection An effect created by isolating the early reflections of the reverb. Vocoder Extracts characteristics from the microphone sound and applies it to the Part played on the keyboard. The instrument's sound changes to sound like a robot's voice. NoiseGate+Comp+Eq Contains Noise Gate, Compressor, and 3-band EQ. Suitable mainly for vocals. 404 MODX M Operation Manual Effect parameters A Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description AEG Phase AEG Phase Slice Shifts the phase of the Amplitude EG. AM Depth AM Depth 2 Modulator, Tremolo, Noisy, Auto Synth, Shimmer Reverb Sets the depth of Amplitude Modulation. AM Freq AM Frequency Shimmer Reverb Sets the Amplitude Modulation speed. AM Inverse R AM Inverse R Auto Synth Sets the phase of the Amplitude Modulation for the right channel. AM LR Phase AM LR Phase Shimmer Reverb Sets the phase of the Amplitude Modulation between the L and R channels. AM Speed AM Speed Noisy, Auto Synth Sets the Amplitude Modulation speed. AM Wave AM Wave Auto Synth Selects the wave for modulating the Amplitude. AM Waveform AM Waveforms Shimmer Reverb Selects the wave for modulating the Amplitude. Amp Type Amp Type Amp Simulator 2 Selects the amplifier type to be simulated. Analog Feel Analog Feel Classic Flanger Adds the characteristics of an analog flanger to the sound. Attack Attack Comp Distortion, VCM Compressor 376, Classic Compressor, Downward Compressor, Upward Compressor Sets the length of time it takes for the compressor to reach the maximum. Attack Offset Attack Offset VCM Touch Wah Sets the length of time it takes for the Wah effect to be applied. Attack Time Attack Time Dynamic Flanger, Dynamic Phaser, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Dynamic Filter Sets the attack time of the Envelope Follower. Beat Repeat Sets the Attack time of the Gate applied to the entire sound B Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Balance Balance U.S. Combo Adjusts the balance between the bass and the treble. Bass Bass British Combo, British Lead, British Legend, Jazz Combo, U.S. High Gain Adjusts the tone quality of the bass. Bit Bit Bit Crusher Reduces the bit precision. Bit Assign Bit Assign Lo-Fi Sets how Word Length is applied to the sound Bit Link Bit Link Bit Crusher Sets the level of the Side setting that follows the Mid value when M/S is on BPF 1–10 Gain BPF1–10 Gain Vocoder Sets the Gain of BPFs 1–10 of the Vocoder effect Break Break Vinyl Break Sets Break to On Brilliant Brilliant British Combo Adjusts the volume of the sound for which the bass is cut. 405 MODX M Operation Manual C Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Chorus Chorus Jazz Combo Selects the Chorus type. Click Density Click Density Digital Turntable Sets the frequency of the click sound to be repeated. Click Level Click Level Digital Turntable Sets the click level. Clipper Clipper Upward Compressor, Downward Compressor Sets the distortion level of the Clipper that determines the maximum level for limiting the wave. Clipper Source Clipper Source Upward Compressor, Downward Compressor Selects the signal to which the Clipper effect is applied. Color Color Control Phaser, VCM Phaser Mono, VCM Phaser Stereo Sets the fixed phase modulation. Com Release Common Release Multi Band Comp Sets the Release Time (the time it takes for the Compressor effect to fade away) used commonly on three bands. Comp Attack Comp Attack NoiseGate+Comp+Eq Sets the length of time for the Compressor to be applied. Comp Level Comp Level Small Stereo Adjusts the output level of the compressor. Comp Out Lvl Comp Output Level NoiseGate+Comp+Eq Sets the output level of the compressor. Comp Ratio Comp Ratio NoiseGate+Comp+Eq Sets the ratio of the compressor. Comp Release Comp Release NoiseGate+Comp+Eq Sets the length of time it takes until the compressor effect fades away. Comp Sustain Comp Sustain Multi FX, Small Stereo Adjusts the length of time for the compressor to sustain. Comp Sw Comp SW Small Stereo Turns the compressor on or off. Comp Threshold Comp Threshold NoiseGate+Comp+Eq Sets the input level for the effect to be applied. Compress Compress Comp Distortion Delay Sets the threshold (or the minimum input level) for the compressor to be applied. Compression Compression Parallel Compressor Sets the extent to which the compressor is applied. Control Type Control Type Control Delay When set to Normal, the delay effect is always applied to the sound. When set to Scratch, the delay effect is not applied if the controller value 0 is set to the Delay Time. The delay is applied to other cases. Cross-Feedback Cross-Feedback Shimmer Reverb Sets the balance of the pitch-shifted sound on the first routing and the pitched sound on the second routing to be sent to the opposite routing for the feedback of the pitch-shifted sound Crush Type Crush Type Bit Crusher Sets how the bit precision is reduced. Cut Cut British Combo Sets the velocity curve to the end of the sound Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Beat Repeat Cuts the high frequencies. VCM Mini Filter Sets the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter for the effect sound. Cutoff Frequency Control Control Filter Sets the Filter Cutoff Frequency. 406 MODX M Operation Manual D Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Damper Control Damper Control Damper Resonance Sets the amount of resonance for the piano damper. Decay Decay REV-X Hall, REV-X Room Controls how the reverb sound decays. Delay Control Delay Control Multi FX Adjusts the depth or amount of the effect set to Delay Sw Delay Input Lvl Delay Input Level Analog Delay Retro, Analog Delay Modern Sets the input level to the delay. Delay Level Delay Level Auto Synth Sets the level of the delayed sound. Delay Level C Delay Level C Delay LCR Sets the level of the delayed sound for the center channel. Delay Mix Delay Mix Comp Distortion Delay Sets the mixing level of the delayed sound. Delay Offset Delay Offset G Chorus, 2 Modulator, SPX Chorus, Symphonic, Classic Flanger, Tempo Flanger, Dynamic Flanger Sets the offset value for the delay modulation. Delay Sw Delay SW Multi FX Sets the delay type or modulation type. Delay Time Delay Time Tempo Delay Mono, Tempo Delay Stereo Specifies the delay length in note duration. Comp Ratio Comp Ratio Control Delay, Auto Synth, Tech Modulation, Multi FX, Analog Delay Retro, Analog Delay Modern Sets the delay length. Delay Time C Delay Time C Delay LCR Sets the delay length for the center channel. Delay Time L Delay Time L Delay LR, Delay LCR, Comp Distortion Delay Sets the delay length for the left channel. Delay Time L>R Delay Time L>R Cross Delay, Tempo Cross Delay Sets the delay time for the sound that is input from the left to be output from the right. Delay Time R Delay Time R Delay LR, Delay LCR, Comp Distortion Delay Sets the delay length for the right channel. Delay Time R>L Delay Time R>L Cross Delay, Tempo Cross Delay Sets the delay time for the sound that is input from the right to be output from the left. Delay Tm Ofs R Delay Time Offset R Auto Synth, Tech Modulation Sets the offset to the delay length for the right channel. Density Density R3 Hall, R3 Room, R3 Plate, SPX Hall, SPX Room, SPX Stage, Space Simulator Sets the density of the reverb. Early Reflection, Gated Reverb, Reverse Reverb Sets the density of the reflections. Depth Depth Space Simulator Sets the depth of the simulated room. VCM Flanger Sets the Amplitude of the LFO wave that controls the cyclic change of the delay modulation. VCM Phaser Mono, VCM Phaser Stereo Sets the Amplitude value of the LFO wave that controls the cyclic change of the phase modulation. Jazz Combo Sets the depth of the Chorus/Vibrato. Device Device Amp Simulator 1, Comp Distortion Delay Sets the device for creating distortion sounds 407 MODX M Operation Manual Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Diffusion Diffusion REV-X Hall, REV-X Room, R3 Hall, R3 Room, R3 Plate, SPX Hall, SPX Room, SPX Stage, Space Simulator, Gated Reverb, Reverse Reverb, Shimmer Reverb Sets the spread of the reverb. Tempo Phaser, Early Reflection Sets the spread of the selected effect. Direction Direction Dynamic Flanger, Dynamic Phaser, VCM Touch Wah, VCM Pedal Wah, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Dynamic Filter Sets the direction of the modulation controlled by the envelope follower. Tempo Spiralizer P, Tempo Spiralizer F Sets the direction of the pitch shift. Dist Drive Dist Drive Multi FX, Small Stereo Controls the amount of distortion. Dist EQ Dist EQ Multi FX, Small Stereo Switches the EQ type for adjusting the tone quality of distortion. Dist Presence Dist Presence Multi FX, Small Stereo Adjusts the tone quality for each distortion type. Dist Sw Dist SW Multi FX Sets the distortion type. Dist Tone Dist Tone Multi FX, Small Stereo Adjusts the tone quality of distortion. Dist Type Dist Type Small Stereo Sets the distortion type. Distortion Distortion Jazz Combo Sets the level of distortion. Divide Freq Hi Divide Freq High Multi Band Comp Sets the Mid/High frequency to divide into three bands Divide Freq Low Divide Freq Low Multi Band Comp Sets the Low/Mid frequency to divide into three bands Divide Min Lvl Divide Min Level Slice Sets the minimum level of the sliced section. Divide Type Divide Type Slice Specifies the timing for slicing by note duration. Drive Drive Noisy, Slice, Rotary Speaker 2, VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets the level of distortion. Harmonic Enhancer, Talking Modulator Sets the level of the effect. Drive Horn Drive Horn Rotary Speaker 1 Sets the depth of modulation generated by the rotation of the horn (treble). Drive Rotor Drive Rotor Rotary Speaker 1 Sets the depth of modulation generated by the rotation of the rotor (woofer). Dry Level Dry Level Digital Turntable Sets the level of the dry sound. Dry LPF Cutoff Dry LPF Cutoff Frequency Digital Turntable Sets the frequency to cut by using the Low-Pass Filter applied to the dry sound. Dry Mix Level Dry Mix Level Auto Synth Sets the level of the dry sound. Dry/Wet Dry/Wet Balance All Sets the balance of the dry sound and the effect sound. 408 MODX M Operation Manual E Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Edge Edge Comp Distortion Sets the curve that determines how the sound is distorted. Emphasis Emphasis Lo-Fi Sets the change of the high frequency characteristics. EQ 1 Freq EQ1(LSH) Frequency VCM EQ 501 Sets the cutoff frequency of EQ1 (Low Shelving) EQ 1 Gain EQ1(LSH) Gain VCM EQ 501 Sets the gain of EQ1 (Low Shelving) EQ 2 Freq EQ2 Frequency VCM EQ 501 Sets the center frequency of EQ2. EQ 2 Gain EQ2 Gain VCM EQ 501 Sets the gain of EQ2. EQ 2 Q EQ2 Q VCM EQ 501 Sets the Q of EQ2. EQ 3 Freq EQ3 Frequency VCM EQ 501 Sets the center frequency of EQ3 EQ 3 Gain EQ3 Gain VCM EQ 501 Sets the gain of EQ3 EQ 3 Q EQ3 Q VCM EQ 501 Sets the Q of EQ3 EQ 4 Freq EQ4 Frequency VCM EQ 501 Sets the center frequency of EQ4 EQ 4 Gain EQ4 Gain VCM EQ 501 Sets the gain of EQ4 EQ 4 Q EQ4 Q VCM EQ 501 Sets the Q of EQ4 EQ 5 Freq EQ5(HSH) Frequency VCM EQ 501 Sets the cutoff frequency of EQ5 (High Shelving) EQ 5 Gain EQ5(HSH) Gain VCM EQ 501 Sets the gain of EQ5 (High Shelving) EQ Frequency EQ Frequency Noisy Sets the frequency to boost or attenuate by using the EQ. VCM Mini Booster Sets the frequency of the EQ set to Type EQ Gain EQ Gain Noisy Sets the gain to boost or attenuate by using the EQ. EQ High Freq EQ High Frequency Cross Delay, Tempo Cross Delay, Tempo Delay Mono, Tempo Delay Stereo, Control Delay, Delay LR, Delay LCR, G Chorus, 2 Modulator, SPX Chorus, Symphonic, Ensemble Detune, Classic Flanger, Tempo Flanger, Dynamic Flanger, Tempo Phaser, Dynamic Phaser, Auto Pan, Tremolo, Rotary Speaker 1, Ring Modulator, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Dynamic Filter, Slice, HD Hall, HD Room, HD Plate, NoiseGate+Comp+Eq Sets the frequency of the high band to boost or attenuate by using the EQ. EQ High Gain EQ High Gain Cross Delay, Tempo Cross Delay, Tempo Delay Mono, Tempo Delay Stereo, Control Delay, Delay LR, Delay LCR, G Chorus, 2 Modulator, SPX, Chorus, Symphonic, Ensemble Detune, Classic Flanger, Tempo Flanger, Dynamic Flanger, Tempo Phaser, Dynamic Phaser, Auto Pan, Tremolo, Rotary Speaker 1, Ring Modulator, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Dynamic Filter, Slice, HD Hall, HD Room, HD Plate, NoiseGate+Comp+Eq Sets the gain of the high band to boost or attenuate by using the EQ. 409 MODX M Operation Manual Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description EQ Low Freq EQ Low Frequency Cross Delay, Tempo Cross Delay, Tempo Delay Mono, Tempo Delay Stereo, Control Delay, Delay LR, Delay LCR, G Chorus, 2 Modulator, SPX Chorus, Symphonic, Ensemble Detune, Classic Flanger, Tempo Flanger, Dynamic Flanger, Tempo Phaser, Dynamic Phaser, Auto Pan, Tremolo, Rotary Speaker 1, Ring Modulator, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Dynamic Filter, Slice, Comp Distortion, HD Hall, HD Room, HD Plate Sets the frequency of the low band to boost or attenuate by using the EQ. EQ Low Gain EQ Low Gain Cross Delay, Tempo Cross Delay, Tempo Delay Mono, Tempo Delay Stereo, Control Delay, Delay LR, Delay LCR, G Chorus, 2 Modulator, SPX Chorus, Symphonic, Ensemble Detune, Classic Flanger, Tempo Flanger, Dynamic Flanger, Tempo Phaser, Dynamic Phaser, Auto Pan, Tremolo, Rotary Speaker 1, Ring Modulator, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Dynamic Filter, Slice, Comp Distortion, HD Hall, HD Room, HD Plate Sets the gain of the low band to boost or attenuate by using the EQ. EQ Mid Freq EQ Mid Frequency G Chorus, 2 Modulator, SPX Chorus, Symphonic, Classic Flanger, Tempo Flanger, Auto Pan, Tremolo, Comp Distortion, NoiseGate+Comp+EQ Sets the frequency of the mid band to boost or attenuate by using the EQ. EQ Mid Gain EQ Mid Gain G Chorus, 2 Modulator, SPX Chorus, Symphonic, Classic Flanger, Tempo Flanger, Auto Pan, Tremolo, Comp Distortion, NoiseGate+Comp+EQ Sets the gain of the mid band to boost or attenuate by using the EQ. EQ Mid Width EQ Mid Width G Chorus, 2 Modulator, SPX Chorus, Symphonic, Classic Flanger, Tempo Flanger, Auto Pan, Tremolo, Comp Distortion, NoiseGate+Comp+EQ Sets the width of the middle band to boost or attenuate by using the EQ. EQ Width EQ Width Noisy Sets the width to boost or attenuate by using the EQ. ER/Rev Balance ER/Rev Balance R3 Hall, R3 Room, R3 Plate, SPX Hall, SPX Room, SPX Stage, Space Simulator Sets the level balance of the early reflection and reverb sounds. 410 MODX M Operation Manual F Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description F/R Depth F/R Depth Auto Pan Sets the depth of the pan on the front and rear (available when PAN Direction is set to L Turn or R Turn) FB Hi Dmp Ofs R FB Hi Damp Offset R Tech Modulation Sets the offset for the treble attenuation on the right channel FB High Damp Feedback High Damp R3 Hall, R3 Room, R3 Plate, SPX Hall, SPX Room, SPX Stage, Space Simulator, Cross Delay, Tempo Cross Delay, Tempo Delay Mono, Tempo Delay Stereo, Control Delay, Delay LR, Delay LCR, Classic Flanger, Early Reflection, Gated Reverb, Reverse Reverb, Comp Distortion Delay, Tech Modulation Adjusts the attenuation of high frequency sound by using the feedback sound. The smaller the value, the faster the attenuation of the high frequency sounds. FB Level Ofs R FB Level Offset R Auto Synth, Tech Modulation Sets the offset for the amount of feedback on the right channel FB Time L Feedback Time L Delay LR Sets the length of feedback for left delay FB Time R Feedback Time R Delay LR Sets the length of feedback for right delay Feedback Feedback VCM Flanger, VCM Phaser Mono, VCM Phaser Stereo, Control Flanger, Control Phaser Spiralizer P, Spiralizer F, Tempo Spiralizer P, Tempo Spiralizer F Sets the level of the output signal returned to the effect block. Feedback Feedback Level R3 Hall, R3 Room, R3 Plate, SPX Hall, SPX Room, SPX Stage, Space Simulator, Early Reflection, Gated Reverb, Reverse Reverb Sets the feedback level of the initial delay. Cross Delay, Tempo Cross Delay, Tempo Delay Mono, Tempo Delay Stereo, Control Delay, Delay LR, Delay LCR, G Chorus, 2 Modulator, SPX Chorus, Classic Flanger, Tempo Flanger, Dynamic Flanger, Comp Distortion Delay, Auto Synth, Teck Modulation Sets the level of the delay sound to be sent back to the input (phase is inverted for negative values) Analog Delay Retro, Analog Delay Modern Sets the feedback level of the delayed sound. Tempo Phaser, Dynamic Phaser Sets the level of the signal output from the phaser and returned to the input (phase is inverted for negative values) Feedback Lvl 1 Feedback Level 1 Pitch Change Sets the feedback level of the delayed sound on the first routing Feedback Lvl 2 Feedback Level 2 Pitch Change Sets the feedback level of the delayed sound on the second routing Feedback Time Feedback Time Delay LCR, Comp Distortion Delay Sets the delay length of the feedback. Filter Type Filter Type Lo-Fi Selects the effect type. Dynamic Filter, Control Filter Sets the filter Type. Beat Repeat Sets the filter type for the effect sound. Fine 1 Fine 1 Pitch Change, Shimmer Reverb Fine-tunes the pitch on the first routing. 411 MODX M Operation Manual Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Fine 2 Fine 2 Pitch Change, Shimmer Reverb Fine-tunes the pitch on the second routing. Flanger Control Flanger Control Control Flanger Sets the delay value (the value of the Comb Filter of the delay modulation) Fold Fold Wave Folder Distorts the sound. Fold Type Fold Type Wave Folder Selects the level of distortion. Formant Offset Formant Offset Vocoder Adds the offset value to the Cutoff Frequency of the BPF for the input of the instrument sound. Formant Shift Formant Shift Vocoder Shifts the Cutoff Frequency of each BPF for the input of the instrument sound. Freeze Freeze Beat Repeat When this parameter is set to On, the beat is repeated. G Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Gain Gain U.S. High Gain Sets the gain of the preamplifier. VCM Mini Booster Adjusts the Gain of the ShelfEQ Gain Boost Gain Boost U.S. Combo Switches the gain of the power amplifier. Gain Limit Gain Limit Upward Compressor Sets the maximum Gain level Gate Time Gate Time Slice Sets the gate time of a slice. Beat Repeat Sets the Gate time of the entire sound H Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Height Height Space Simulator Sets the height of the simulated room. Hi Damp Freq High Damp Frequency HD Hall, HD Room, HD Plate Adjusts the attenuation of the high band. High Attack High Attack Multi Band Comp Sets the length of time for the compressor to be applied to the high band High Cut High Cut U.S. Combo Cuts the high band. High Gain High Gain Multi Band Comp Sets the output level for the high band High Gain L High Subband Gain Lch Stereophonic Optimizer Sets the resultant gain of the High band after the adjustment of the stereo sound (L channel) High Gain R High Subband Gain Rch Stereophonic Optimizer Sets the resultant gain of the High band after the adjustment of the stereo sound (R channel) High Level High Level Isolator Sets the level of the high band. High Mute High Mute Isolator Switches the mute for the high band. High Ratio High Ratio REV-X Hall, REV-X Room, HD Hall, HD Room, HD Plate Adjusts the ratio of the high frequencies. Multi Band Comp Sets the compression ratio for the high band High Threshold High Threshold Multi Band Comp Sets the minimum input level for the effect to be applied to the high band High Treble High Treble Jazz Combo Adjusts the tone quality in the frequency higher than the Treble setting 412 MODX M Operation Manual Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Horn Accel Horn Acceleration Rotary Speaker 2, VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets how the rotation of the horn (treble) changes from Slow to Fast Horn Decel Horn Deceleration Rotary Speaker 2, VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets how the rotation of the horn (treble) changes from Fast to Slow Horn Fast Horn Speed Fast Rotary Speaker 1, Rotary Speaker 2, VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets the rotation speed of the horn (treble) for the Fast setting Horn Level Horn Level VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets the volume of the horn (treble). Horn Slow Horn Speed Slow Rotary Speaker 1, Rotary Speaker 2, VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets the rotation speed of the horn (treble) for the Slow setting Horn Slow/Fast Horn Slow/Fast Time Rotary Speaker 1 Sets the transition time for the rotation speed of the horn (treble) to change from Slow to Fast HPF Cutoff HPF Cutoff Frequency REV-X Hall, REV-X Room, R3 Hall, R3 Room, R3 Plate, SPX Hall, SPX Room, SPX Stage, Space Simulator, Ring Modulator, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Auto Synth, Harmonic Enhancer, Early Reflection, Gated Reverb, Reverse Reverb Sets the low frequency to cut by using the HPF Vocoder Sets the Cutoff Frequency of the High-Pass Filter applied to the sound input from the microphone. HPF Output Lvl HPF Output Level Vocoder Sets how much the output from High-Pass Filter is mixed with the output from the Vocoder. 413 MODX M Operation Manual I Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Initial Delay Initial Delay REV-X Hall, REV-X Room, R3 Hall, R3 Room, R3 Plate, SPX Hall, SPX Room, SPX Stage, Space Simulator, Early Reflection, HD Hall, HD Room, HD Plate, Gated Reverb, Reverse Reverb Sets the delay time for the early reflections. Initial Delay 1 Initial Delay 1 Pitch Change Sets the delay length of the first series of effects. Initial Delay 2 Initial Delay 2 Pitch Change Sets the delay length of the second series of effects. Initial Delay L Initial Delay Lch Ensemble Detune Sets the length of the left channel delay. Initial Delay R Initial Delay Rch Ensemble Detune Sets the length of the right channel delay. Input Level Input Level Bit Crusher, VCM Compressor 376, Rotary Speaker 2, Parallel Compressor, Wave Folder, VCM Mini Filter, VCM Mini Booster Sets the input level. Input Mode Input Mode G Chorus, 2 Modulator, SPX Chorus, Auto Pan, Tremolo, Lo-Fi Selects whether the input sound is in mono or stereo. Input Select Input Select Cross Delay, Tempo Cross Delay Selects an input. Inst Level Inst Level Vocoder Sets the input level of the Instrument sound. K Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Knee Knee Upward Compressor, Downward Compressor Sets the curve around the Threshold. The higher the value, the shallower the curve. L Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description L/R Depth L/R Depth Auto Pan Sets the depth of the left and right pan. L/R Diffusion L/R Diffusion Tempo Delay Mono, Tempo Delay Stereo Sets the difference of the delay on the right and left for creating spaciousness. Lag Lag Tempo Cross Delay, Tempo Delay Mono, Tempo Delay Stereo Sets an additional delay length applied to the delayed sound specified by a note duration. Length Length Beat Repeat Sets the length for a repeat. Level Offset Dyna Level Offset Dynamic Flanger, Dynamic Phaser, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Dynamic Filter Sets the offset value added to the output of the envelope follower. LFO Depth LFO Depth SPX Chorus, Symphonic, Classic Flanger, Tempo Flanger, Ring Modulator Sets the depth of the modulation. Tempo Phaser Sets the depth of the phase modulation. Wave Folder Adjusts the depth of the LFO effect. LFO Shape LFO Shape Wave Folder Adjusts the shape of the LFO. 414 MODX M Operation Manual Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description LFO Speed LFO Speed G Chorus, 2 Modulator, SPX Chorus, Symphonic, Classic Flanger, Tremolo, Ring Modulator, Multi FX Sets the frequency of the modulation. Tempo Flanger, Tempo Phaser Specifies the modulation speed by note duration. Auto Pan Sets the frequency of the Auto Pan. Wave Folder Adjusts the LFO speed. LFO Wave LFO Wave Classic Flanger, Ring Modulator Selects the wave for modulation. Auto Pan Sets the panning curve. VCM Auto Wah Selects the wave: sine or square. Liveness Liveness Gated Reverb, Reverse Reverb, Early Reflection Sets the attenuation of the early reflections. Ln Chg Quantz Length Change Quantize Beat Repeat Quantizes the timing for changing the Length parameter. Low Attack Low Attack Multi Band Comp Sets the length of time for the compressor to be applied to the low band Low Cut Low Cut U.S. Combo Cuts the low band. Low Gain Low Gain Multi Band Comp Sets the output level for the low band Low Gain L Low Subband Gain Lch Stereophonic Optimizer Sets the resultant gain of the Low band after the adjustment of the stereo sound (L channel) Low Gain R Low Subband Gain Rch Stereophonic Optimizer Sets the resultant gain of the Low band after the adjustment of the stereo sound (R channel) Low Level Low Level Isolator Sets the level for the low band. Low Mute Low Mute Isolator Switches the mute for the low band. Low Ratio Low Ratio REV-X Hall, REV-X Room Sets the adjustment of the low frequencies. Multi Band Comp Sets the compression ratio for the low band Low Threshold Low Threshold Multi Band Comp Sets the minimum input level for the effect to be applied to the low band Lower Range Lower Range VCM Auto Wah, VCM Touch Wah, VCM Pedal Wah Sets the maximum value for the variable range of the Wah filter. Control Flanger Sets the maximum value for the variable range of the Flanger Control Control Phaser Sets the maximum value for the variable range of the Phase Control LPF Cutoff LPF Cutoff Frequency REV-X Hall, REV-X Room, R3 Hall, R3 Room, R3 Plate, SPX Hall, SPX Room, SPX Stage, Space Simulator, Amp Simulator 2, Comp Distortion, Noisy, Ring Modulator, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Auto Synth, Early Reflection, Gated Reverb, Reverse Reverb, Auto Synth, Noisy Sets the high frequency range cut by the Low-Pass Filter. LPF Resonance LPF Resonance Noisy Adds characteristics to the input to the Low- Pass Filter. 415 MODX M Operation Manual M Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description M/S M/S Bit Crusher When this parameter is on, each sound located at the center, left, and right changes individually. Make Up Gain Make Up Gain Upward Compressor, Downward Compressor Adjusts the level of the signal output from the compressor. Manual Manual VCM Flanger Sets the offset value of the delay modulation. VCM Phaser Mono, VCM Phaser Stereo Sets the offset value of the phase modulation. Master Volume Master Volume U.S. High Gain, British Lead, British Legend Adjusts the gain of the power amplifier. Mic Input Level Mic Input Level Vocoder Sets the input level of the microphone Mic L-R Angle Mic L-R Angle Rotary Speaker 1, Rotary Speaker 2, VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets the L/R angle of the microphone for extracting sound from the output Mic Out Gate Mic Output Gate Switch Vocoder Off: Always passes HPF output and Noise Generator output On: Passes HPF output and Noise Generator output when there is audio input of the Instrument sound Mic Position Mic Position U.S. Combo, Jazz Combo, U.S. High Gain, British Lead, British Combo, British Legend, Rotary Speaker 2 Sets the relative position of the microphone to the speaker. Mid Middle British Lead, British Legend, Jazz Combo, U.S. High Gain Sets the tone quality of the mid band. Mid 1 Gain L Mid1 Subband Gain Lch Stereophonic Optimizer Sets the resultant gain of the Mid1 band after the adjustment of the stereo sound (L channel) Mid 1 Gain R Mid1 Subband Gain Rch Stereophonic Optimizer Sets the resultant gain of the Mid1 band after the adjustment of the stereo sound (R channel) Mid 2 Gain L Mid2 Subband Gain Lch Stereophonic Optimizer Sets the resultant gain of the Mid2 band after the adjustment of the stereo sound (L channel) Mid 2 Gain R Mid2 Subband Gain Rch Stereophonic Optimizer Sets the resultant gain of the Mid2 band after the adjustment of the stereo sound (R channel) Mid 3 Gain L Mid3 Subband Gain Lch Stereophonic Optimizer Sets the resultant gain of the Mid3 band after the adjustment of the stereo sound (L channel) Mid 3 Gain R Mid3 Subband Gain Rch Stereophonic Optimizer Sets the resultant gain of the Mid3 band after the adjustment of the stereo sound (R channel) Mid Attack Mid Attack Multi Band Comp Sets the length of time for the compressor to be applied to the mid band Mid Cut Mid Cut U.S. Combo Cuts the mid frequencies. Mid Gain Mid Gain Multi Band Comp Sets the output level for the mid band Mid Level Mid Level Isolator Sets the level for the mid frequencies. Mid Mute Mid Mute Isolator Switches the mute for the mid frequencies. Mid Ratio Mid Ratio Multi Band Comp Sets the compression ratio for the mid band 416 MODX M Operation Manual Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Mid Sweep Mid Sweep U.S. Combo Adjusts the frequency range over which the mid frequencies are cut. Mid Threshold Mid Threshold Multi Band Comp Sets the minimum input level for the effect to be applied to the mid band Mid Width Mid Width U.S. Combo Sets the bandwidth to cut the mid frequencies. Mix Mix VCM Flanger, Control Flanger Sets the volume of the effect sound. Mix Level Mix Level Harmonic Enhancer Sets the level of the effect sound mixed with the dry sound. Mod Depth Mod Depth Noisy, Auto Synth, Tech Modulation, Shimmer Reverb Sets the depth of the modulation. Modulation Depth Rotary Speaker 2 Sets the depth of cyclical changes in the volume. Mod Dpt Ofs R Mod Depth Offset R Auto Synth Sets the offset to the depth of the modulation for the R channel. Mod Feedback Mod Feedback Noisy Sets the level of feedback to the modulation. Mod Gain Mod Gain Tech Modulation Sets the gain level of the modulation. Mod LPF Cutoff Mod LPF Cutoff Frequency Tech Modulation Sets the Cutoff Frequency of the Low-Pass Filter applied to the modulated sound. Mod LPF Res Mod LPF Resonance Tech Modulation Adds characteristics to the modulated sound by using the Low-Pass Filter. Mod Mix Mod Mix Balance Noisy, Tech Modulation Sets the mix balance of the modulated sound. Mod Phase Modulation Phase Classic Flanger Sets the L/R phase difference of the modulated wave. Mod Speed Mod Speed Noisy, Auto Synth, Tech Modulation, Shimmer Reverb Sets the modulation speed. Mod Wave Type Mod Wave Type Auto Synth Selects the wave type for modulation. Mode Mode VCM Phaser Mono, VCM Phaser Stereo, Control Phaser Sets an element for changing the phaser type, or more specifically, the factor for forming the phaser effect. British Combo Switches the preamplifier. Modulator Lvl Modulator Input Level Ring Modulator Sets the modulator level. Move Speed Move Speed Talking Modulator Sets how long it takes to change to the sound specified by the Vowel parameter N Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Noise Level Background Noise Level VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets the amount of background noise. Noise Level Vocoder Sets the level of the noise input. Digital Turntable Sets the noise level. Noise LPF Q Noise LPF Q Digital Turntable Sets the Resonance of the Low-Pass Filter applied to the noise. Noise Switch Background Noise Off/ On VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Turns the background noise on or off. Noise Tone Noise Tone Digital Turntable Sets the tone quality of the noise. 417 MODX M Operation Manual Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Normal Normal British Combo Adjusts the volume of the sound with flat EQ response. Ns Gate Atk Noise Gate Attack NoiseGate+Comp+Eq Sets the length of time for the Noise Gate to be applied. Ns Gate Rls Noise Gate Release NoiseGate+Comp+Eq Sets the length of time for the Noise Gate to be inactive. Ns Gate Thrs Noise Gate Threshold NoiseGate+Comp+Eq Sets the minimum input level for the Noise Gate to be applied. Ns LPF Cutoff Noise LPF Cutoff Frequency Digital Turntable Sets the frequency to cut by using the Low- Pass Filter applied to the noise. Ns Mod Depth Noise Mod Depth Digital Turntable Sets the depth of the noise modulation. Ns Mod Speed Noise Mod Speed Digital Turntable Sets the speed of the noise modulation. O Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Offset Filter Offset Spiralizer P, Spiralizer F, Tempo Spiralizer P, Tempo Spiralizer F Sets the initial pitch value in semitones. Ofs Transition Offset Transition Rate Spiralizer P, Spiralizer F, Tempo Spiralizer P, Tempo Spiralizer F Sets the transition time for the Offset value to change to the new value. On/Off Switch On/Off Switch Isolator Turns the isolator on or off. Stereophonic Optimizer Turns the effect on or off. Osc Freq OSC Frequency Coarse Ring Modulator Sets the frequency for modulating the input wave. Osc Freq Fine OSC Frequency Fine Ring Modulator Finely adjusts the frequency for modulating the input wave. Output Output VCM Auto Wah, VCM Touch Wah, VCM Pedal Wah Sets the output level. Output Level Filter Output Level Control Filter Sets the output level of the filter. Output Level Amp Simulator 1, Amp Simulator 2, Comp Distortion, Comp Distortion Delay, U.S. Combo, Jazz Combo, U.S. High Gain, British Combo, British Lead, British Legend, Multi FX, Small Stereo, VCM Compressor 376, Classic Compressor, VCM EQ 501, Talking Modulator, Lo- Fi, Bit Crusher, Vinyl Break, Beat Repeat, Rotary Speaker 2, Downward Compressor, Upward Compressor, Parallel Compressor, Presence, Wave Folder, VCM Mini Filter, VCM Mini Booster Sets the output level. Vocoder Sets the output level of the Vocoder. Output Level 1 Output Level1 Pitch Change Sets the output level on the first routing. Output Level 2 Output Level2 Pitch Change Sets the output level on the second routing. Overdrive Overdrive Amp Simulator 1, Amp Simulator 2, Comp Distortion, Comp Distortion Delay, VCM Auto Wah, VCM Touch Wah, VCM Pedal Wah Sets the level of distortion. 418 MODX M Operation Manual P Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Pan 1 Pan 1 Pitch Change Sets the pan on the first routing. Pan 2 Pan 2 Pitch Change Sets the pan on the second routing. Pan AEG Min Lvl Pan AEG Min Level Slice Sets the minimum level of the Amplitude EG applied to the panned sound. Pan AEG Type Pan AEG Type Slice Sets the type of Amplitude EG applied to the panned sound. Pan Depth Pan Depth Slice Sets the depth of the pan. Pan Direction Pan Direction Auto Pan Sets the Auto Pan type. Pan Type Pan Type Slice Sets the pan type. Panning Panning Jazz Combo Sets the spread of the Chorus/Vibrato. Pedal Control Pedal Control VCM Pedal Wah Controls the Cutoff Frequency of the Wah filter. Phase Control Phase Control Control Phaser Sets the depth of the phase modulation. Phase Differ LFO Phase Difference Tempo Flanger, Tremolo Sets the L/R phase difference of the modulated wave. (No phase difference for 0 deg or the value 64.) Phase Reset LFO Phase Reset Tempo Flanger, Tempo Phaser, Slice Sets how the initial phase of the LFO is reset. Phase Shift Ofs Phase Shift Offset Tempo Phaser Sets the offset value of the phase modulation. Phaser Sw Phaser SW Multi FX Sets the Phaser type. Pitch 1 Pitch 1 Pitch Change, Shimmer Reverb Sets the pitch for the first routing in semitones. Pitch 2 Pitch 2 Pitch Change, Shimmer Reverb Sets the pitch for the second routing in semitones. P1/P2 Balance Pitch 1/Pitch 2 Balance Shimmer Reverb Sets the volume balance of the pitch-shifted sound on the first routing and the pitch- shifted sound on the second routing. P1&P2 Dly Ofs Pitch 1 & Pitch 2 Delay Offset Shimmer Reverb Sets the delay offset value for the pitch- shifted sound on the first routing and the pitch-shifted sound on the second routing. P1&P2 Panning Pitch 1/Pitch 2 Panning Shimmer Reverb Sets the pan for the pitch-shifted sound on the first routing and the pitch-shifted sound on the second routing. Pitch Sweep Pitch Sweep Beat Repeat Sets the pitch to change gradually in each repetition. Plate Type Plate Type HD Plate Sets how the sound resonates. Play Speed Play Speed Beat Repeat Sets the playback speed. PM Depth PM Depth G Chorus, 2 Modulator, Tremolo Sets the depth of the pitch modulation. Post-comp HPF Post-comp HPF Upward Compressor, Downward Compressor Sets the Cutoff Frequency of the High-Pass Filter which follows the compressor. Pre Mod HPF F Pre Mod HPF Cutoff Frequency Tech Modulation Sets the Cutoff Frequency of the High-Pass Filter before modulation is applied. Preamp Preamp British Lead Sets the gain of the preamplifier. Pre-Delay Pre-Delay Shimmer Reverb Sets the delay time for the early reflections. Pre-LPF Cutoff Pre-LPF Cutoff Frequency Lo-Fi Sets the Cutoff Frequency of the Low-Pass Filter for cutting the high frequency. Pre-LPF Res Pre-LPF Resonance Lo-Fi Adds characteristics to the input to the Low- Pass Filter. Presence Presence Presence Sets the level of the effect. Amp Simulator 1, Comp Distortion Delay U.S. Combo, U.S. Hi Gain, British Lead, British Legend Boosts the high frequencies. 419 MODX M Operation Manual R Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description R/H Balance Rotor/Horn Balance Rotary Speaker 1, Rotary Speaker 2 Sets the volume balance of the horn (treble) and rotor (woofer). Random Random Beat Repeat Creates random repetition. Ratio Ratio Comp Distortion, VCM Compressor 376, Classic Compressor, Downward Compressor, Upward Compressor Sets the ratio of the compressor. Release Release Comp Distortion, VCM Compressor 376, Classic Compressor, Downward Compressor, Upward Compressor Sets the length of time it takes until the compressor effect fades away. Release Curve Release Curve Dynamic Flanger, Dynamic Phaser, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Dynamic Filter Sets the release curve of the envelope follower. Release Time Release Time Dynamic Flanger, Dynamic Phaser, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Dynamic Filter Sets the release time of the envelope follower. Beat Repeat Sets the Release time of the Gate applied to the entire sound Repeat Repeat Beat Repeat Sets the Repeat on or off. Resonance Resonance Dynamic Filter, Control Filter, VCM Mini Filter, VCM Mini Booster Adds characteristics to the filter. Beat Repeat Sets the Resonance of the filter for the effect sound. Resonance Ofs Resonance Offset VCM Auto Wah, VCM Touch Wah, VCM Pedal Wah Sets the offset value to the Resonance. Retrigger Cycle Retrigger Cycle Beat Repeat Sets the cycle for retriggering the Repeat Reverb Delay Reverb Delay R3 Hall, R3 Room, R3 Plate, SPX Hall, SPX Room, SPX Stage, Space Simulator Sets the delay time from the early reflections to the reverb. Reverb Time Reverb Time REV-X Hall, REV-X Room, R3 Hall, R3 Room, R3 Plate, SPX Hall, SPX Room, SPX Stage, Space Simulator, HD Hall, HD Room, HD Plate Sets the reverb length. Room Size Room Size REV-X Hall, REV-X Room, Early Reflection, HD Hall, HD Room, Gated Reverb, Reverse Reverb Sets the size of the room. Rotor Accel Rotor Acceleration Rotary Speaker 2, VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets the rotation speed of the rotor (woofer) to change from Slow to Fast Rotor Decel Rotor Deceleration Rotary Speaker 2, VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets the rotation speed of the rotor (woofer) to change from Fast to Slow Rotor Fast Rotor Speed Fast Rotary Speaker 1, Rotary Speaker 2, VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets the rotation speed of the rotor (woofer) for the Fast setting 420 MODX M Operation Manual Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Rotor Level Rotor Level VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets the volume of the rotor (woofer). Rotor Slow Rotor Speed Slow Rotary Speaker 1, Rotary Speaker 2, VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets the rotation speed of the rotor (woofer) for the Slow setting Rotor Slow/Fast Rotor Slow/Fast Time Rotary Speaker 1 Sets the transition time for the rotation speed of the rotor (woofer) to change from Slow to Fast Rtg Attack T Retrigger Attack Time Beat Repeat Sets the Attack time of the Gate applied to the entire sound Rtg Gate Time Retrigger Gate Time Beat Repeat Sets the Gate time of the entire sound Rtg Quantize Retrigger Quantize Beat Repeat When this parameter is set to On, the sound is repeated at the beginning of the measure set in the built-in sequencer. Rtg Release T Retrigger Release Time Beat Repeat Sets the Release time of the Gate applied to the entire sound S Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Sample Rate Sample Rate Bit Crusher Lowers the Sample Rate Sampling Freq Sampling Frequency Control Lo-Fi Controls the sampling frequency. SC EQ Freq Side Chain EQ Frequency Downward Compressor, Upward Compressor Sets the frequency of the EQ used for detecting the compressor level. SC EQ Gain Side Chain EQ Gain Downward Compressor, Upward Compressor Sets the gain of the EQ used for detecting the compressor level. SC EQ Q Side Chain EQ Q Downward Compressor, Upward Compressor Sets the Q of the EQ used for detecting the compressor level. Scale Type Spiral Step Scale Type Spiralizer P, Spiralizer F, Tempo Spiralizer P, Tempo Spiralizer F Sets how to create changes when the Step Mode is set to Scale Semitones Spiral Step Semitones Spiralizer P, Spiralizer F, Tempo Spiralizer P, Tempo Spiralizer F Specifies the variation width in semitones when the Step Mode is set to Semitone Send to Noise Dry Send to Noise Digital Turntable Sets the level of the dry signal sent to the noise effect. Sensitivity Sensitivity Dynamic Flanger, Dynamic Phaser, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Dynamic Filter Sets the sensitivity of the modulation applied to the input change. VCM Touch Wah Sets the sensitivity of the Wah filter’s change applied to the input change. SEQ Clock SEQ Clock Wave Folder Adjusts the speed of the built-in sequencer. SEQ Depth SEQ Depth Wave Folder Adjusts the depth of the effect on the built-in sequencer. SEQ Pattern SEQ Pattern Wave Folder Select the pattern on the built-in sequencer. SEQ Ph Reset SEQ Phase Reset Wave Folder Sets the mode for resetting the built-in sequencer. SEQ Variation SEQ Variation Wave Folder Changes the behavior of the built-in sequencer. Shimmer Fdbk Shimmer Feedback Shimmer Reverb Adjusts the feedback level of the pitch-shifted sound. 421 MODX M Operation Manual Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Shimmer Gain Shimmer Gain Shimmer Reverb Adjusts the level of the pitch-shifted sound. Shimmer HPF Shimmer HPF Frequency Shimmer Reverb Sets the Cutoff Frequency of the High Pass Filter for cutting the low frequency of the pitch-shifted sound. Shimmer LPF Shimmer LPF Frequency Shimmer Reverb Sets the Cutoff Frequency of the Low Pass Filter for cutting the high frequency of the pitch-shifted sound. Side Bit Side Bit Bit Crusher Reduces the bit precision for the side chain. Side Chain EQ Side Chain EQ Switch Downward Compressor, Upward Compressor Turns the EQ used for detecting the compressor level on or off. Side Chain Lvl Side Chain Input Level VCM Compressor 376, Classic Compressor, Dyna Flanger, Dyna Phaser, Dyna Ring Mod, Dyna Filter, Multi Band Comp Sets the level of the input to the control circuit for Side Chain. Side Smpl Rate Side Sample Rate Bit Crusher Reduces the Sample Rate for the Side Size Size Shimmer Reverb Sets the apparent size of the reverb space. Smpl Rate Link Sample Rate Link Bit Crusher Sets the level of the Side setting that follows the Mid value when M/S is on Space Type Space Type Space Simulator Selects the space simulation type. Speaker Air Speaker Air U.S. Combo, Jazz Combo, U.S. High Gain, British Lead, British Combo, British Legend Emphasizes the characteristics of the speaker cabinet. Speaker Type Speaker Type Amp Simulator 1, Comp Distortion Delay Selects the speaker simulation type. U.S. Combo, Jazz Combo, U.S. High Gain, British Lead, Small Stereo, British Combo, British Legend, Multi FX Sets the speaker type. Speed Speed VCM Flanger Sets the frequency of the LFO wave which controls the cyclic change of the delay modulation. VCM Phaser Mono, VCM Phaser Stereo Sets the frequency of the LFO wave which controls the cyclic change of the phase modulation. VCM Auto Wah Sets the speed of the LFO. Vinyl Break Sets the length of time for the sound to stop. Speed Adjust Speed Adjust Vinyl Break Finely adjusts the speed. Speed Control Speed Control Rotary Speaker 1, Rotary Speaker 2 Switches the rotation speed (Slow/Fast) VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Switches the rotation speed (Slow/Stop/Fast) Spiral Spiral Switch Spiralizer P, Spiralizer F, Tempo Spiralizer P, Tempo Spiralizer F Turns the LFO On or Off. Spiral Speed Spiral Speed Spiralizer P, Spiralizer F, Tempo Spiralizer P, Tempo Spiralizer F Sets the speed of the pitch change. Spiral Sync Spiral Sync Spiralizer P, Spiralizer F, Tempo Spiralizer P, Tempo Spiralizer F Sets the standard cycle for changing the pitch in steps. Spread Spread Ensemble Detune, VCM Flanger, VCM Phaser Stereo, Control Phaser Sets how the sound spreads. 422 MODX M Operation Manual Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Stage Stage VCM Phaser Mono, VCM Phaser Stereo, Tempo Phaser, Dynamic Phaser, Control Phaser Sets the number of steps for the phase shifter. Step Mode Spiral Step Mode Spiralizer P, Spiralizer F, Tempo Spiralizer P, Tempo Spiralizer F Sets the pitch to change continuously (smoothly) or in steps. Step Transition Spiral Step Transition Rate Spiralizer P, Spiralizer F, Tempo Spiralizer P, Tempo Spiralizer F Sets the transition time for the pitch to change in steps. Sample Rate Sample Rate Bit Crusher Lowers the Sample Rate Sampling Freq Sampling Frequency Control Lo-Fi Controls the sampling frequency. T Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Texture Texture Parallel Compressor, Presence, VCM Mini Filter, VCM Mini Booster Creates various changes to the texture of the effect. Threshold Threshold Comp Distortion, Classic Compressor, Downward Compressor, Upward Compressor Sets the input level for the effect to be applied. Threshold Level Dyna Threshold Level Dynamic Flanger, Dynamic Phaser, Dynamic Ring Modulator, Dynamic Filter Sets the minimum level at which the envelope follower starts. Time Sweep Time Sweep Beat Repeat Creates a gradual change in the time length with each repetition. Tone Tone Rotary Speaker 2, VCM Rotary Speaker Classic, VCM Rotary Speaker Overdrive, VCM Rotary Speaker Studio Sets the tone control. Tone Shift Tone Shift British Lead Switches the characteristic of the tone control. Transition Rate Delay Transition Rate Control Delay Sets the transition speed for changing the current Delay Time to the new value Delay Time Treble Treble British Combo, British Lead, British Legend, Jazz Combo, U.S. High Gain Adjusts the tone quality of the treble. Type Type VCM Flanger, Control Flanger Selects the flanger type. VCM Auto Wah, VCM Touch Wah, VCM Pedal Wah Selects the Wah type. Early Reflection, Gated Reverb, Reverse Reverb Selects the reflection type. US High Gain, British Lead Selects the amplifier type. Analog Delay Retro, Analog Delay Modern Sets the character of the delay. Parallel Compressor Sets the compressor type. Mini Filter, Mini Boost Sets the filter Type. 423 MODX M Operation Manual U Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Upper Range Upper Range VCM Auto Wah, VCM Touch Wah, VCM Pedal Wah Sets the maximum value for the variable range of the Wah filter. Control Flanger Sets the maximum value for the variable range of the Flanger Control Control Phaser Sets the maximum value for the variable range of the Phase Control V Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Vib Speed Vib Speed Jazz Combo Sets the speed of the vibrato. Available when Chorus is set to Vib. Vocoder Attack Vocoder Attack Vocoder Sets the Attack value of the Vocoder output. Vocoder Rls Vocoder Release Vocoder Sets the Release value of the Vocoder output. Volume Volume U.S. Combo, Jazz Combo Sets the level of the preamp. Vowel Vowel Talking Modulator Selects a vowel type. W Display name Parameter name Effect types using the parameter Description Wah Pedal Wah Pedal Multi FX Sets the position of the Wah pedal. Wah Sw Wah SW Multi FX Sets the Wah type. Wall Vary Wall Vary Space Simulator Sets the wall type of the simulated room. Higher values produce more diffuse reflections. Width Width Space Simulator Sets the width of the simulated room. Width High Width High Stereophonic Optimizer Adjusts the stereo balance of the High band Width Low Width Low Stereophonic Optimizer Adjusts the stereo balance of the Low band Width Mid 1 Width Mid1 Stereophonic Optimizer Adjusts the stereo balance of the Mid1 band Width Mid 2 Width Mid2 Stereophonic Optimizer Adjusts the stereo balance of the Mid2 band Width Mid 3 Width Mid3 Stereophonic Optimizer Adjusts the stereo balance of the Mid3 band Word Length Word Length Lo-Fi Sets the resolution of the sound, or how coarse the sound is. 424 MODX M Operation Manual Shortcuts and special operations In addition to shortcut operations using the [SHIFT] button, etc., special operations can also be performed by pressing a button twice or holding it down. Shortcuts Operation Function [SHIFT] + Knob 1 to 4 (5 to 8) Switches knob to high-precision mode (slower value changes) This is useful when you want to fine-tune a value [SHIFT] + [EDIT/ ] Calls up the Copy/Exchange screen [SHIFT] + KNOB POSITION [LEFT] Registers the Assign 1–8 value assigned to the knob to the KNOB POSITION [LEFT] button [SHIFT] + KNOB POSITION [MID] Registers the Assign 1–8 value assigned to the knob to the KNOB POSITION [MID] button [SHIFT] + KNOB POSITION [RIGHT] Registers the Assign 1–8 value assigned to the knob to the KNOB POSITION [RIGHT] button [SHIFT] + [PAGE JUMP] Changes the parameters that can be switched with the [QUICK EDIT] button to match the parameters currently displayed on the screen [SHIFT] + [PART SELECT] Enables the PART buttons for turning the mute setting on or off [SHIFT] + Part Group [1–8/9–16] Enables the PART buttons and sliders to switch between Parts 9–16 [SHIFT] + [COMMON] Selects Common for Elements, Operators, and Oscillators. [SHIFT] + PART [1]–[8] Selects one from Element 1–8, Operator 1–8, Oscillator 1–3, and Noise. [SHIFT] + OCTAVE [−] Sets the transpose value to −1 (reduce) [SHIFT] + OCTAVE [+] Sets the transpose value to +1 (increase) [SHIFT] + OCTAVE [−] + OCTAVE [+] Sets the transpose value to 0 (reset). [SHIFT] + SCENE [1]–[8] Registers the created Scene to one of the SCENE [1]–[8] buttons. [SHIFT] + [DEC/NO] Sets the selected parameter value to −10 (reduce) Returns to the previous page on the Live Set screen [SHIFT] + [INC/YES] Sets the selected parameter value to +10 (increase) Moves to the next page on the Live Set screen [SHIFT] + [ARP] Calls up the Arp Edit screen [SHIFT] + [MSEQ] Calls up the Motion Seq Edit screen [SHIFT] + [CONTROL ASSIGN] Calls up the Control View screen [SHIFT] + [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] Calls up the info screen (property screen) (Home screen only) [SHIFT] + [LIVE SET] Moves to the Live Set Register screen [SHIFT] + [CATEGORY] Opens the Part Category Search screen for the selected Part [SHIFT] + [UTILITY] Displays the parameter value. [SHIFT] + [NAVIGATION] Calls up the FX Overview screen [SHIFT] + [QUICK SETUP] Calls up the Effect Switch screen [SHIFT] + [STORE] Calls up the Load screen [SHIFT] + [SPLIT] Calls up the Homescreen with the Part-Note view selected [SHIFT] + [SONG/PATTERN] Calls up the Rhythm Pattern screen [SHIFT] + [TEMPO/TAP] Turns the panel lock function on or off (only on the Home screen or Live Set screen) [SHIFT] + [A/D INPUT] Calls up the Audio In Mixing screen [SHIFT] + [PORTAMENTO] Calls up the Pitch Edit screen [SHIFT] + [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] Calls up the Control Settings screen [UTILITY] + [DAW REMOTE] Selects the Calibration Touch Panel OCTAVE [−] + OCTAVE [+] Resets octave shift. 425 MODX M Operation Manual Other operations Operation Function Quickly press the PART button twice Switches between Internal and External When switched to External, the Part name is displayed in blue Hold down the [CATEGORY] button Resets Bank/Favorite (Bank/Favorite Select) to All 426 MODX M Operation Manual Message List Message Description Required operation ** library will be overwritten. The Library file with the same name has already been loaded when you tried to load a library. The existing data will be overwritten when the new data is loaded. The name of the Library file you are attempting to load is displayed in place of **. ** Control Assign full. Could not carry out the operation because there is no controller set available. The Part name you are attempting to add to the controller set is displayed in place of “**.” Delete the unnecessary controller set and redo the operation. ** will be deleted. Data will be deleted as a result of this operation. ** will be loaded to Pattern. The .mid file will be loaded to the Pattern. ** will be loaded to Song. The .mid file will be loaded to the Song. ** will be loaded. The file will be loaded. ** will be overwritten. When saving, the Performance, file, folder, or Quick Setup with the same name already exists. The existing data will be overwritten by the data being saved. The name of the Performance, file, folder, or Quick Setup that you are attempting to save is displayed in place of “**.” Activate the source controller to assign. You can assign parameters to the controller you are about to operate. Operate the controller that you wish to assign. Advanced settings will be initialized. Initializes the settings of the [UTILITY] → Settings → Advanced tab. All data and libraries will be initialized. Unsaved user data will be lost. Restores the factory default settings. It is recommended to save any necessary settings you wish to keep to a USB flash drive in advance. All data is initialized upon power- on. The instrument has been set to restore factory defaults when the instrument is turned on. All data will be overwritten by ** When loading is performed, all data will be overwritten. The name of the backup file you are attempting to load is displayed in place of “**.” All Favorite Marks will be cleared. All Favorite marks will be deleted. All settings will be initialized. User data is kept. The settings for the instrument will be initialized. The User data will not be deleted. All sound will be stopped during optimization. The internal memory will be restored. All user data will be initialized. Unsaved user data will be lost. The User area in the User memory will be initialized. It is recommended to save any necessary settings you wish to keep to a USB flash drive in advance. Arpeggio bypass disabled. Arpeggio Bypass is disabled. Arpeggio full. Could not carry out the operation because the Arpeggio is full. Delete unnecessary User Arpeggio data from the [UTILITY] → Contents → Data Utility screen. 427 MODX M Operation Manual Message Description Required operation Assignable knob full. Could not carry out the operation because all assignable knobs are used in the controller set. Delete any unnecessary controller set that has an assignable knob set as a Source and redo the operation. Audio file is not found. The specified audio file cannot be found. Audio Rec stopped due to lack of memory space. Audio recording stopped automatically because the USB flash drive is full. Use a new USB flash drive or delete unnecessary files, and try this operation again. Audition full. Could not carry out the operation because the User Audition data is full. Delete unnecessary User Audition data from the [UTILITY] → Contents → Data Utility screen. Auto power off disabled. The Auto Power Off function has been disabled. Bulk data protected. Bulk data cannot be received because of the setting. Can’t process. Cannot process the requested operation. Can’t register unstored performance. Cannot register the Performance to the Live Set because the bank or program number being edited has not yet been set. Completed. The specified load, save, format, or other Job has been completed. Connecting to USB device... Connecting the USB flash drive to the instrument. Converting Pattern to Song. The Pattern is being converted. CPU Fan Error The built-in cooling fan has stopped. This condition may cause the internal temperature to rise and the instrument may stop working. Immediately back up all necessary data, turn off the instrument and contact your Yamaha dealer. Current user data will be overwritten by **. User data already exists at the destination for the file to be loaded. If you proceed, the existing user data will be overwritten. The name of the User file you are attempting to load is displayed in place of “**.” Curve full Could not carry out the operation because the User Curve data is full. Delete unnecessary User Curve data from the [UTILITY] → Contents → Data Utility screen. Data memory full. (When loading a Library file) The content data in the library cannot be saved because the instrument memory is full. Device number is off. The bulk data cannot be sent or received because the device number is off. Device number mismatch. The bulk data cannot be sent or received because the device number does not match. Dividing the drum track makes new performance data. Performance full. Cannot run because there is no room in the Performance created by using Divide Drum Track. Dividing the drum track makes new performance data. You can’t undo this operation. A new Performance will be created by using Divide Drum Track. This operation cannot be undone. File is not found. There are no files for the selected type. File or folder already exists. A file or folder with the same already exists. 428 MODX M Operation Manual Message Description Required operation File or folder path is too long. Cannot open the specified file or folder because its path name is too long. Folder is not empty. You are attempting to delete a folder that contains data. Folder is too deep. The folder cannot be opened because the folder hierarchy is too deep. Illegal bulk data. An error occurred while receiving bulk data or bulk requests. Illegal file name. The file name is invalid. Illegal file. The specified file cannot be handled or loaded into this instrument. Illegal parameters. Incorrect parameters have been specified. Illegal sample data. The specified sample data is not supported. Illegal smart morph data. The specified Smart Morph data is not supported. Keybank full. While loading, the total number of keybanks exceeds the maximum number. Keyboard control lock disabled. Keyboard Lock is disabled. Knob value stored. The Knob Value has been stored. Library full. The total number of libraries exceeds the maximum number. Micro Tuning full. Could not run because the User Micro Tuning data is full. Delete unnecessary User Micro Tuning data from the [UTILITY] → Contents → Data Utility screen. MIDI buffer full. Could not be processed because an excessively large amount of MIDI data was received at once. MIDI checksum error. The checksum of the received System Exclusive message is incorrect. No data. There is no data in the selected track or specified range. Select the range again. No read/write authority to the file. No read or write permissions for this file. Note ranges will be initialized. The Note Range will be initialized. Now initializing all data... The factory settings are being restored. Now initializing... Some data is being initialized. Now loading... The file is being loaded. Now receiving MIDI bulk data... The instrument is receiving MIDI bulk data. Now saving... The file is being saved. Now transmitting MIDI bulk data... The instrument is sending MIDI bulk data. Panel unlocked. The panel lock has been disabled. Part *** will be overwritten. There is already a Part at the copy destination. If you continue the operation, the existing Part at the copy destination will be overwritten. Part full. Could not open the Rhythm Pattern screen because there were no Parts available. Delete the unnecessary Part(s) and redo the operation. Pattern full. Could not carry out the operation because the Pattern is full. Pattern will be converted to Song. The Pattern will be converted to a Song. 429 MODX M Operation Manual Message Description Required operation Performance data in *** will be loaded. The Performance Data in the file for a past model will be loaded. Performance full. Could not carry out the operation because the Performance is full. Please connect USB device. Connect a USB flash drive. Please keep power on. Writing data in the flash ROM. Do not turn off the instrument while this message is shown. If the instrument is turned off while this is displayed, User data may be lost or the system may be corrupted, preventing the system from starting properly the next time the instrument is turned on. Please reboot to enable the new Audio I/O Mode. Restart the instrument to enable the changes to the audio input and output settings. Please reboot to enable the new USB Driver Mode. Restart the instrument to enable the changes to the USB driver mode settings. Please reboot to maintain internal memory. Restart the instrument to repair the instrument memory. Please stop audio play/rec. Stop audio recording or playback, and then try again. Please stop sequencer. Stop the sequencer (Pattern or Song), and then try again. Please store the pattern to change the chain play mode. Store the Pattern before changing the chain playback mode. Please wait... Processing. Please wait. Press [SHIFT]+[TEMPO/TAP] to unlock panel. Panel Lock has been enabled. Press [SHIFT] + [TEMPO/TAP] to unlock the panel. Quick Setup ** is loaded. Quick Setup has been loaded. Recall latest edits. Recalls the last edited Performance data and puts it in the edit buffer. Redo **. Carries out the operation again (Redo) that had been undone. The name of the operation is displayed in place of “**.” Sample is protected. The sample is protected and cannot be changed. Sample is too long. The sample size is too large and cannot be loaded. Turn on Memory Switch to memorize ** into this scene. To register a function to a Scene, Memory (Memory Switch) for the function must be turned on in advance. Open the screen from [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Scene and turn the switch on. Undo **. Cancels the immediately previous action (undo). The name of the operation is displayed in place of “**.” Unsupported USB device. This USB device is not supported by this instrument. USB connection terminated. The USB flash drive was shut off due to abnormal current flow. Disconnect the USB flash drive and then press any button on the top panel. USB device is full. The USB flash drive is full and files cannot be saved. Use a new USB flash drive or delete unnecessary files, and try this operation again. 430 MODX M Operation Manual Message Description Required operation USB device is write-protected. The USB flash drive you are using is write- protected. USB device read/write error. An error occurred during read/write to the USB flash drive. USB device will be formatted. The USB flash drive will be formatted. User auditions will be overwritten with stored songs. The existing User Audition will be overwritten by the currently stored Song. VCM Rotary is disabled except in Part 1. The VCM Rotary can be used only with Part 1. It cannot be used on other Parts. Voice data in *** will be loaded. The Voice Data in the file for a past model will be loaded. Waveform full. The total number of waveforms exceeds the maximum number. 431 MODX M Operation Manual When there's a problem No sound? Wrong sound? When a problem like this occurs, make sure to check the troubleshooting section before assuming that the product is faulty. Many problems can be solved by carrying out Initialize All Data, after backing up your data to a USB flash drive. If the problem persists, consult your Yamaha dealer. The touchscreen response is poor • Is the cursor pointing to the precise location you have touched on the touchscreen? If not, calibrate the touchscreen. [UTILITY] + [DAW REMOTE] → Calibrate Touch Panel [UTILITY] → Settings → System → Calibrate Touch Panel No sound • Are Control sliders 1–8 at the lowest setting? Try moving Control sliders 1–8 to change their position. • Are any amplifiers, speakers, or headphones connected to the instrument? Since this instrument has no built-in speakers, it is necessary to connect amplifiers, speakers, or headphones to hear any sounds. • Is this instrument as well as any connected devices turned on? • Have you made all the appropriate level settings—including the Master Volume on the instrument and the volume settings on the connected device? When a foot controller is connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack, try moving the foot controller. • Is Local Control set to Off? When Local Control is set to Off, no sound is produced when you play the keyboard. [UTILITY] → Settings → MIDI I/O → Local Control • Is a blank Part selected? If so, assign a sound to the Part or select another Part. • Is the Mute switch for each Part turned on? When the Mute switch is turned on, no sound is produced when you play the keyboard. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → Mute • Is the Keyboard Control Switch of each Part turned off? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → Keyboard Control Switch • Is the Arp Play Only of the selected Part turned on? When Arp Play Only is turned on, the corresponding Part produces sound only via Arpeggio playback. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General / Pitch → Part Settings → Arp Play Only [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arpeggio → Common → Arp Play Only 432 MODX M Operation Manual • Are the MIDI volume or MIDI expression settings too low when using the external controller? • Are the effect and filter settings appropriate? If you are using a filter, try changing the cutoff frequency. Some cutoff settings may filter out all of the sound. [SHIFT]+[NAVIGATION] [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Select Element or Drum Key → Filter [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect For Normal Parts (FM-X) and Normal Parts (AN-X) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Filter / Amp [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect • Is Vocoder selected as the Insertion Effect Type of the Part? If so, set the parameters related to the A/D INPUT jacks to appropriate values, and then play the keyboard while speaking or singing into the microphone connected to this instrument. Check the A/D INPUT [GAIN] knob on the top panel is set to a value other than 0. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Audio In • Are the volume or level settings too low? [UTILITY] → Settings → Sound → Tone Generator Volume [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Perf Settings → Volume [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Part Settings → Volume [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Part Settings → Dry Level For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Element or Drum Key selection → Amplitude → Level/Pan → Level For Normal Parts (FM-X) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Operator selection → Level → Level For Normal part (AN-X) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Oscillator selection → OSC/Tune → Out Level • Are the element switch, note limit, velocity limit, and velocity offset settings appropriate? For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Part Settings [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Element or Drum Key selection → Osc/Tune For Normal Parts (FM-X) and Normal Parts (AN-X) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Part Settings 433 MODX M Operation Manual • Is the Mute switch for each Element or Operator of Part turned on? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part Common selection → Element, Operator, or Oscillator status on the Navigation bar • With a Normal Part (FM-X), is the Carrier Level set to “0”? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Operator selection → Level → Level • Is the output setting of each Part turned off? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Part Settings → Part Output • Are the controller settings appropriate? When Destination is set to Volume or Cutoff, no sound is produced depending on the setting and controller status. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Mod/Control → Control Assign No sound from the A/D INPUT jacks • Is the connected microphone turned on? • Is a dynamic microphone connected to the instrument? • Is the cable between the microphone or audio equipment and this instrument properly connected? • Is the A/D INPUT [GAIN] knob turned to the minimum? • Is the [A/D INPUT] button turned on (lit)? • Check if the cable connection to the A/D INPUT jacks matches the Mono/Stereo settings for the jack. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Audio In → Mixing → A/D In Input Mode • Are the Mic or Line settings appropriate? Set to Mic when a microphone or any device with a low output level is connected. Set to Line when an audio device, electronic instrument, or any device with a high input level is connected. [UTILITY] → Settings → Audio I/O → A/D Input • Are the volume settings of the A/D Input Part too low? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Audio In → Mixing → A/D In Volume • Are the effect settings for the A/D Input Part appropriate? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Audio In → Routing • Is the output setting of the A/D Input Part appropriate? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Audio In → Mixing → A/D In Output Select • Check if the Vocoder effect is selected. If the insertion effect is set to use vocoder, the input sound from the A/D INPUT connector may not produce sound unless the keyboard is played. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing 434 MODX M Operation Manual Playback continues without stopping • When the [KEYBOARD HOLD] button is on, try turning it off. • When the [ARP] button is on, try turning it off. • For the Pattern/Song/Audio screen, press the [  ] (Stop) button. • When an effect sound (such as Delay) continues and does not stop, change the effect setting or select a different Performance. • When the click sound continues, check the following setting. If set to Always, the click sound will always sound. Set this parameter to something other than Always. [UTILITY] → Tempo Settings → Click Mode Distorted sound • Is the volume set too high? [UTILITY] → Settings → Sound → Tone Generator Volume [UTILITY] → Settings → Audio I/O [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Perf Settings → Volume [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Part Settings → Volume For Normal Parts (AWM2) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Element selection → Amplitude → Level/Pan → Level For Drum Parts [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Key selection → Level/Pan → Level For Normal Parts (FM-X) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Operator selection → Level → Level For Normal part (AN-X) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Oscillator selection → OSC/Tune → Out Level The sound is cut off • Is the entire sound exceeding the maximum polyphony? • AWM2 (preset waveforms): 128 sounds (both stereo and mono waveforms) • AWM2 (user or library waveforms): 128 sounds (both stereo and mono waveforms) • FM-X: 128 • AN-X: 12 435 MODX M Operation Manual Only one note sounds at a time • Check if the tone generation mode is set to Mono. If you wish to play chords, set this parameter to Poly. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Part Settings → Mono/Poly Wrong pitch • Is the Tune setting set too far from 0? [UTILITY] → Settings → Sound → Tone Generator Tune • Is the note shift or detuning for each part set to anything other than 0? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Pitch → Note Shift [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Pitch → Detune • If the part is out of pitch, is a special temperament selected in the micro tuning setting? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Pitch → Micro Tuning Name • Have you set a special temperament in Global Tuning? [UTILITY] → Settings → Sound → Global Settings • When the Part produces a wrong pitch, is LFO Pitch Modulation Depth set too high? For Normal Parts (AWM2) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Element selection → Element LFO → Pitch Mod For Normal Parts (FM-X) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Mod/Control → 2nd LFO → Pitch Modulation Depth For Normal part (AN-X) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → Pitch LFO → Pitch LFO Depth • If the part is out of pitch, are the coarse tuning and fine tuning misaligned? For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Element or Drum Key selection → Osc/Tune → Coarse [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Element or Drum Key selection → Osc/Tune → Fine For Normal Parts (FM-X) [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Operator selection → Form/Freq → Coarse [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Operator selection → Form/Freq → Fine • If the part is out of pitch, is the controller destination set to pitch? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Mod/Control → Control Assign → Destination • For an AN-X Part, is Voltage Drift set to an excessively large value? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → General/Pitch → AN-X Settings → Voltage Drift 436 MODX M Operation Manual No effect is applied Check the effect settings using [SHIFT] + [NAVIGATION]. • Is the Effect Switch off? [UTILITY] → Effect Switch • Are the variation send and reverb send values set at the lowest level? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing → Var Send [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing → Rev Send • Are the variation return and reverb return values set at the lowest level? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing → Var Return [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Common selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing → Rev Return • Is the Insertion Effect on all Elements or all Keys in the Part set to Thru? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Routing → Connect or Element 1–8 • (For System Effects) Is the effect type selected for each effect set to No Effect? • (For Insertion Effects) Is the effect type selected for each effect set to Thru? • Is the Insertion Switch setting appropriate? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Effect → Ins A or Ins B Cannot start the Arpeggio • Is the [ARP] button on? Check the number of Parts for which the Arpeggio switch is turned on. You can simultaneously play back Arpeggios for up to eight Parts. • Are the arpeggio note limits and velocity limits settings appropriate? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arpeggio → Common • Is the Arpeggio Type set to Off? [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arpeggio → Individual → Name • Check the Arpeggio switch settings for each Part. When the Arpeggio switch is set to off, the Arpeggio will not be played back even when you turn on the [ARP] button on the Top panel. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arpeggio → Common, Individual, or Advanced → Arp Part 437 MODX M Operation Manual Cannot stop the Arpeggio • If you cannot stop Arpeggio playback by releasing your finger from the key, change the Arpeggio Hold switch to Off. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] → Part selection → [EDIT/ ] → Arpeggio → Common → Hold • Turn off the [KEYBOARD HOLD] button on the Top panel. Pattern or Song playback does not start by pressing the [  ] (Play) button • Is there data in the selected pattern or song? Cannot record pattern or song audio • Is there any memory space available for recording a Pattern or Song? Memory space on the instrument can hold up to 128 Patterns and 128 Songs. If you attempt to record more than 128 Songs or Patterns, you will get a Song full message, and no more recording is possible. Data communication between the instrument and the connected computer is not working properly • Is the Port setting on the computer appropriate? • Have you selected the proper terminal (MIDI or USB) on the Utility screen? [UTILITY] → Settings → MIDI I/O → MIDI IN/OUT MIDI Bulk dump data transmission or reception is not working properly • Is Receive Bulk protected? Set MIDI Receive Bulk to On. [UTILITY] → Settings → Advanced → MIDI Receive Bulk • To enable the reception of data recorded by using the Bulk dump function of this instrument, you must set the same device number for both transmission and reception. [UTILITY] → Settings → Advanced → MIDI Device Number • Is the same device number set to the connected MIDI device? [UTILITY] → Settings → Advanced → MIDI Device Number 438 MODX M Operation Manual Cannot save to the USB flash drive • Is the USB flash drive write-protected? • Is there enough free space on the USB flash drive? Open the Content screen and set the device to a USB flash drive. Check to see if the free storage space shown in the upper right corner of the screen is 0.0 KB. [UTILITY] → Contents → Save • Are you using a USB flash drive that has been confirmed to work with this instrument? Check the following URL for the list of USB devices that have been confirmed to work with this instrument. https://download.yamaha.com/ In the display, there are some black points (unlit) or white points (always lit) This is a characteristic of color LCDs, and is not a malfunction. 439 MODX M Operation Manual Restoring the factory default settings (Initialize All Data) NOTICE When the Initialize All Data function is carried out, all the Performances and songs stored in the User memory, as well as the settings for the entire instrument on the Utility screen, will be restored to the factory default settings. It is recommended to save any important data you wish to keep to a USB flash drive in advance. 1. Open the settings screen from [UTILITY] → Settings → System. This calls up the settings screen for the entire instrument. 2. Tap Initialize All Data. The confirmation screen appears. To cancel the operation, tap the Cancel(NO) button on the screen or press the [DEC/NO] button on the top panel. 3. Tap the Initialize(YES) button on the screen or press the [INC/YES] button on the top panel. The Initialize All Data operation is carried out. © 2025 Yamaha Corporation Published 03/2026 MW-C0